.ty  Medical  Center  LiLi 


niversi 

Historical  Collection 


k. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2015 


X 


https://archive.org/details/americannaturalh3182godm 


AMERICAN 


NATURAL  HISTORY. 


VOLUME  III. 


PART  I.— MASTOLOGY. 


BY  JOHN  D.  GODMAN,  M.D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  NATURAE  HTSTOET  IN  THE  FRANKLIN  INSTITUTE  OF  PENN- 
SXLVANIA;  ONE  OP  THE  PROFESSORS  OF  THE  PHILADELPHIA  MTTSEUK; 
MEMBER  OF  THE  AMERICAN  PHILOSOPHICAL  SOCIETY;  OF  THE  PHILADEL- 
PHIA ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES,  &C. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

^ CAREY,  LEA  & CAREY-CHESTNUT  STREET. 


1828, 


Eastern  District  of  Pennsylvania,  to  vnt; 

BE  IT  REMEMBERED,  That  on  the  first  day  of  February,  in  the 
fifty-second  year  of  the  Independence  of  the  United  States  of  America, 
A.  D.  1828,  P.  H.  Nicklin,  of  the  said  district,  hath  deposited  in  this 
office  the  title  of  a book,  the  right  whereof  he  claims  as  proprietor,  in 
the  words  following,  to  wit: 

“ American  Natural  History.  Vol.  HI.  Part  I.  Mastology.  By  John 
D.  Godman,  M.  D.  Professor  of  Natural  History  in  the  Franklin  Insti- 
tute of  Pennsylvania;  one  of  the  Professors  of  the  Philadelphia  Mu- 
seum; Member  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society;  of  the  Phila- 
delphia Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  &c. 

In  conformity  to  the  Act  of  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  enti- 
tled, “ An  act  for  the  Encouragement  of  Learning,  by  securing  the 
copies  of  maps,  charts,  and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of 
such  copies,  during  the  times  therein  mentioned.” — And  also  to  the 
act,  entitled,  “ An  act  supplementary  to  an  act,  entitled,  “ An  act  for 
the  encouragement  of  learning,  by  securing  the  copies  of  maps,  charts, 
and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies  during  the 
times  therein,  mentioned,”  and  extending  the  benefits  thereof  to  the 
arts  of  designing,  engraving,  and  etching  historical  and  other  prints.” 

D.  CALDWELL, 

Ckrk  of  the  EasteM  District  of  Pennsylvania. 


AMERICAN 


NATURAL  HISTORY. 


The  head  is  large,  having  a straight  outline; 
large  ears  and  eyes;  a large  muzzle  and  long 
smooth  tongue.  'Uhe  subocular  sinuses  do  not  ex- 
ist. The  body  is  of  large  size,  supported  upon 
strong  legs.  A fold  of  skin  depends  below  the  neck, 
called  the  dewlap.  The  tail  is  frequently  long  and 
terminates  in  a brush;  in  some  species  it  is  of  a mid- 
dling length.  The  horns  are  conical,  smooth  and 
simple,  variously  curved,  though  often  turned  late- 
rally with  the  points  upwards. 


CHAPTER  I 


Genus  Ox;  Bos;  L. 


Fr.  Boeuf.  Germ.  Ochs. 
Sp.  Buly.  Hal.  Bove. 


GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 


Dental  System. 

12  Upper  ^ 12  Molar 


4 


THE  BISON. 


Species  L — The  Bison. 

Bos  Americanus  Gmel. 

Taurus  Mexicanus;  HEMfAinj.  Mex.  58f.  Tauri  Vaccsqiie,  Ibid. 

Anirn.  p.  10. 

The  Buffalo:  Catesbt,  Carol.  28  tab.  20. 

Boeuf  Sauvage:  Duphatz,  Louisiane,  ii.  66. 

Jlmerican  Bull:  Penk.  Quad.  pi.  ii,  fig.  2. 

\_Commonly  called  Buffalue.^ 

From  other  species  of  the  ox  kind,  the  Bison  is 
well  distinguished  by  the  following  peculiarities. 
A long  shaggy  hair  clothes  the  fore  part  of  the  body, 
forming  a well  marked  beard  beneath  the  lower  jaw, 
and  descending  behind  the  knee  in  a tuft.  This  hair 
rises  on  the  top  of  the  head  in  a dense  mass,  nearly 
as  high  as  the  extremities  of  the  horns.  Over  the 
forehead  it  is  closely  curled,  and  matted  so  thickly 
as  to  deaden  the  force  of  a rifle  ball,  which  either 
rebounds,  or  lodges  in  the  hair,  merely  causing  the 
animal  to  shake  his  head  as  he  heavily  bounds 
along. 

The  head  of  the  bison  is  large  and  ponderous, 
compared  with  the  size  of  the  body;  so  that  the  mus- 
cles for  its  support,  necessarily  of  great  size,  give 
great  thickness  to  the  neck,  and  by  their  origin  from 
the  prolonged  dorsal  vertebral  processes  form  the 
peculiar  projection  called  the  hump.  This  hump 
is  of  an  oblong  form  diminishing  in  height  as  it  re- 
cedes, so  as  to  give  considerable  obliquity  to  the 
line  of  the  back. 


EKca  rn\..  Sc . 


THE  BISON. 


5 


The  eye  of  the  bison  is  small,  black,  and  bril- 
liant; the  horns  are  black  and  very  thick  near  the 
head,  whence  they  curve  upwards  and  outwards, 
rapidly  tapering  towards  their  points.  The  outline 
of  the  face  is  somewhat  convexly  curved,  and  the 
upper  lip,  on  each  side  being  papillous  within,  di- 
lates and  extends  downwards,  giving  a very  oblique 
appearance  to  the  lateral  gape  of  the  mouth,  in  this 
particular  resembling  the  ancient  architectural  bas- 
reliefs  representing  the  heads  of  oxen. 

The  physiognomy  of  the  bison  is  menacing  and 
ferocious,  and  no  one  can  see  this  formidable  ani- 
mal in  his  native  wilds,  for  the  first  time,  without 
feeling  inclined  to  attend  immediately  to  his  person- 
al safety.  The  sunimer  coat  of  the  bison  differs 
from  his  winter  dress,  rather  by  difference  of  length 
than  by  other  particulars.  In  summer,  from  the 
shoulders  backwards,  the  hinder  parts  of  the  ani- 
mal are  all  covered  with  a very  short  fine  hair,  tlial 
is  as  smooth  and  as  soft  to  the  touch  as  velvet. 
The  tail  is  quite  short  and  tufted  at  the  end,  and 
its  utility  as  a fly-brush  is  necessarily  very  limited. 
The  colour  of  the  hair  is  uniformly  dun,  but  the 
long  hair  on  the  anterior  parts  of  the  body  is  to  a 
certain  extent  tinged  with  yellowish  or  rust  colour. 
These  animals,  however,  present  so  little  variety  in 
regard  to  colour,  tiiat  the  natives  consider  any  re- 
markable difference  from  the  common  appearance 
as  resulting  from  the  immediate  interference  of  the 
Great  Spirit. 


G 


THE  BISON. 


Some  varieties  of  colour  have  been  observed, 
although  the  instances  are  rare.  A Missouri  trader 
informed  the  members  of  Long’s  exploring  party, 
that  he  had  seen  a greyish  white  bison,  and  a year- 
ling calf,  that  was  distinguished  by  several  white 
spots  on  the  side,  a star  or  blaze  in  the  forehead, 
and  white  fore  feet.  Mr.  J.  Doughty,  an  inter- 
preter to  the  expedition,  saw  in  an  Indian  hut  a 
very  well  prepared  bison  head  with  a star  on  the 
front.  This  was  highly  prized  by  the  proprietor, 
who  called  it  his  great  medicine,  for,  said  he  “ the 
herds  come  every  season  to  the  vicinity  to  seek  their 
white  faced  companion.” 

In  appearance  the  bison  cow  bears  the  same  re- 
lation to  the  bull,  that  is  borne  by  the  domestic  cow 
to  her  mate.  Her  size  is  much  smaller,  and  she 
has  much  less  hair  on  the  fore  part  of  her  body. 
The  horns  of  the  cow  are  much  less  than  those  of 
the  bull,  nor  are  they  so  much  concealed  by  the 
hair.  The  cow  is  by  no  means  destitute  of  beard, 
but  though  she  possesses  this  conspicuous  appen- 
dage, it  is  quite  short  wdien  compared  wdth  that  of 
her  companion. 

From  July  to  the  latter  part  of  December  the  bi- 
son cow  continues  fat.  Their  breeding  season  be- 
gins towards  the  latter  part  of  July  and  continues 
until  the  beginning  of  September,  and  after  this 
month  the  cows  separate  from  the  bulls  in  distinct 
herds  and  bring  forth  their  calves  in  April.  The 
calves  rarely  separate  from  the  mother  before  they 


THE  BISON.  7 

are  one  year  old,  and  cows  are  frequently  seen  ac- 
companied by  calves  of  three  seasons. 

The  flesh  of  the  bison  is  somewhat  coarser  in  its 
fibre  than  that  of  the  domestic  ox,  yet  travellers  are 
unanimous  in  considering  it  equally  savoury  as  an 
article  of  food,  we  must,  however,  receive  the  opin- 
ions of  travellers  ou  this  subject,  with  some  allow- 
ance for  their  peculiar  situations,  being  frequently 
at  a distance  from  all  other  food  and  having  their 
relish  improved  by  the  best  of  all  possible  recom- 
mendations in  favour  of  the  present  viands — hunger. 
It  is  with  reason,  however,  that  the  flesh  is  stated  to 
be  more  agreeably  sapid,  as  the  grass  upon  which 
these  animals  feed  is  short,  firm  and  nutritious,  be- 
ing very  different  from  the  luxuriant  and  less  sa- 
line grass  produced  on  a more  fertile  soil.  The  fat 
of  the  bison  is  said  to  be  far  sweeter  and  richer,  and 
generally  preferable  to  that  of  the  common  ox.  The 
observations  made  in  relation  to  the  bison’s  flesh, 
when  compared  with  the  flesh  of  the  domestic  oxj 
may  be  extended  to  almost  all  wild  meat,  which 
has  a peculiar  flavour  and  raciness  that  renders  it 
decidedly  more  agreeable  than  that  of  tame  animals, 
although  the  texture  of  the  flesh  may  be  much 
coarser  and  the  fibre  by  no  means  as  delicate. 

Of  all  the  parts  of  the  bison  that  are  eaten,  the 
hump  is  the  most  famed  for  its  peculiar  richness  and 
delicacy;  because  when  cooked  it  is  said  very  much 
to  resemble  marrow.  The  Indian  mode  of  cooking 
the  hump  is  to  cut  it  out  from  the  vertebrae,  after 


THE  BISON. 


S : 

which  the  spines  of  bone  are  taken  out,  the  denuded 
portion  is  then  covered  with  skin,  wliich  is  finally 
sewed  to  tlie  skin  covering  the  hump.  The  hair  is 
then  singed  and  pulled  oiBf,  and  the  whole  mass  is 
put  in  a hole  dug  in  the  earth  for  its  reception,  which 
has  been  previously  heated  by  a strong  fire  in  and 
over  it  the  evening  previous  to  the  day  on  which  it 
is  to  be  eaten..  It  is  then  covered  with  cinders  and 
earth  about  a foot  deep,  and  a strong  fire  made  over 
it.  By  the  next  day  at  noon  it  is  fit  for  use.  The 
tongues  and  marrow  bones  are  also  highly  esteem- 
ed by  the  hunters.  To  preserve  the  flesh  for  future 
use  the  hunters  and  Indians  cut  it  into  thin  slices 
and  dry  it  in  the  open  air,  which  is  called 
this  process  is  speedily  finished,  and  a large  stock 
of  meat  may  thus  be  kept  for  a considerable  length 
of  time. 

From  the  dried  flesh  of  the  bison  the  fur  traders 
of  the  north  west  prepare  a food  which  is  very  valua- 
f)le  on  account  of  the  time  it  may  be  preserved  with- 
out spoiling,  though  it  will  not  appear  very  alluring 
to  those  who  reside  where  provisions  are  obtained 
without  difficulty.  The  dried  bison’s  flesh  is  placed 
on  skins  and  pounded  with  stones  until  suflBcient- 
ly  pulverized.  It  is  then  separated  as  much  as  pos- 
sible from  impurities,  and  one  third  of  its  weight  of 
the  melted  tallow  of  the  animal  is  poured  over  it. 
This  substance  is  called  pemmican,  and  being  pack- 
ed firmly  in  bags  of  skin  of  a convenient  size  for 
transportation,  may  be  kept  for  one  year  without 


THE  BISON.  9 

much  difficulty,  and  with  great  care,  perhaps  two 
years. 

During  the  months  of  August  and  September  the 
flesh  of  the  bison  bull  is  poor  and  disagreeably  fla- 
voured; they  are  however  much  more  easily  killed, 
as  they  are  not  so  vigilant  as  the  cows,  and  some- 
times allow  the  hunter  to  come  up  with  them  with- 
out much  difficulty.  Lewis  & Clarke  relate  that  once 
approaching  a large  herd,  the  bulls  would  scarcely 
move  out  of  their  way  and  as  they  came  near,  the  ani- 
mals would  merely  look  at  them  for  a moment,  as  at 
something  new,  and  then  quietly  resume  their  graz- 
ing. 

The  general  appearance  of  the  bison  is  by  no 
means  attractive  or  prepossessing,  his  huge  and 
shapeless  form,  being  altogether  de  void  of  grace  and 
beauty.  His  gait  is  awkward  and  cumbrous,  al- 
though his  great  strength  enables  him  to  run  with 
very  considerable  speed  over  plains  in  summer,  or  in 
winter  to  plunge  expeditiously  through  the  snow. 

The  sense  of  smelling  is  remarkably  acute  in  this 
animal,  and  it  is  remarked  by  hunters  that  the  odour 
of  the  white  man  is  far  more  terrifying  to  them  than 
that  of  the  Indian.  From  the  neighbourhood  of 
white  settlements  they  speedily  disappear:  this, 
however,  is  very  justly  accounted  for  by  Mr.  Say, 
who  attributes  it  to  the  impolitic  and  exterminating 
warfare,  which  the  white  man  wages  against  all  un- 
subdued animals  within  his  reach. 

As  an  exemplification  of  the  peculiar  strength  of 
VoL.  111. 2 


iO 


THR  RISON. 


their  sense  of  smelling,  we  may  here  relate  a circum- 
stance mentioned  by  Mr.  Say,  in  that  valuable  and 
highly  interesting  work.  Long’s  Expedition  to  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  to  which  we  are  under  continual 
obligations.  These  we  are  the  more  happy  to  ac- 
knowledge, because  we  are  well  acquainted  with 
the  solicitude  of  the  gentlemen  composing  that  ex- 
pedition, to  diffuse,  as  widely  as  possible,  the  know- 
ledge of  American  Natural  History. 

The  exploring  party  were  riding  through  a drea- 
ry and  uninteresting  country,  which  at  that  time 
was  enlivened  by  vast  numbers  of  bisons,  who  were 
moving,  in  countless  thousands,  in  every  direction. 
As  the  wind  was  blowing  fresh  from  the  south,  the 
scent  of  the  party  was  wafted  directly  across  the 
river  Platte,  and  through  a distance  of  eight  or  ten 
miles,  every  step  of  its  progress  was  distinctly  mark- 
ed by  the  terror  and  consternation  it  produced  among 
the  bisons.  The  instant  their  atmosphere  was  infected 
by  the  tainted  gale,  they  ran  as  violently  as  if  closely 
pursued  by  mounted  hunters,  and  instead  of  fleeing 
from  the  danger,  they  turned  their  heads  towards  the 
wind,  eager  to  escape  this  terrifying  odour.  They 
dashed  obliquely  forward  towards  the  party,  and 
plunging  into  the  river,  swam,  waded,  and  ran  with 
headlong  violence,  in  several  instances  breaking 
through  the  Expedition’s  line  of  march,  which  was 
immediately  along  the  left  branch  of  the  Platte.  One 
of  the  party,  (Mr.  Say  himself,)  perceiving  from  the 
direction  taken  by  the  bull  who  led  the  extended 


THE  BISON. 


11 


column,  that  he  would  emerge  from  tlie  low  river 
bottom  at  a point  where  the  precipitous  bank  was 
deeply  worn  by  much  travelling,  urged  his  horse 
rapidly  forward,  that  he  might  reach  this  station  in 
order  to  gain  a nearer  view  of  these  interesting  ani- 
mals. He  had  but  just  reached  the  spot  when  the 
formidable  leader,  bounding  up  the  steep,  gained  the 
summit  of  the  bank  with  his  fore-feet,  and  in  this 
position,  suddenly  halted  from  his  full  career,  and 
fiercely  glared  at  the  horse  which  stood  full  in  his 
path.  The  horse  was  panic-struck  by  this  sudden 
apparition,  trembled  violently  from  fear,  and  would 
have  wheeled  and  taken  to  flight,  had  not  his  rider 
exerted  his  utmost  strength  to  restrain  him;  he  re- 
coiled, however,  a few  feet  and  sunk  down  upon 
his  hams.  The  bison  halted  for  a moment,  but 
urged  forward  by  the  irresistible  pressure  of  the 
moving  column  behind,  he  rushed  onward  by  the 
half-sitting  horse.  The  herd  then  came  swiftly  on, 
crowding  up  the  narrow  defile.  The  party  had  now 
reached  the  spot,  and  extended  along  a considerable 
distance;  the  bisons  ran  in  a confused  manner,  in  va- 
rious directions,  to  gain  the  distant  bluffs,  and  num- 
bers were  compelled  to  pass  through  the  line  of  march. 
This  scene,  added  to  the  plunging  and  roaring  of 
those  who  were  yet  crossing  the  river,  produced  a 
grand  effect,  that  was  heightened  by  the  fire  opened 
on  them  by  the  liunters. 

To  the  Indians  and  visiters  of  the  western  regions 
the  bison  is  almost  invaluable;  we  have  mentioned 


12 


THE  UISON. 


that  they  supply  a large  part  of  the  food  used  by 
the  natives,  and  covering  to  their  tents  and  per- 
sons, while  in  many  parts  of  the  country  there  is 
no  fuel  to  be  obtained  but  the  dried  dung  of  this 
animal.  The  Indians  always  associate  ideas  of 
enjoyment  with  plenty  of  bison,  and  they  fre- 
quently constitute  the  skull  of  one  of  them,  their 
“ Great  Medicine.’’  They  have  dances  and  cere- 
monies that  are  observed  previous  to  the  com- 
mencement of  their  hunting. 

The  herds  of  bison  wander  over  the  country  in 
search  of  food,  usually  led  by  a bull  most  remarka- 
ble for  strength  and  fierceness.  While  feeding, 
they  are  often  scattered  over  a great  extent  of  coun- 
try, but  when  they  move  in  mass  they  form  a dense 
almost  impenetrable  column,  which,  once  in  mo- 
tion, is  scarcely  to  be  impeded.  Their  line  of  march 
is  seldom  interrupted  even  by  considerable  rivers, 
across  which  they  swim  without  fear  or  hesitation, 
nearly  in  the  order  that  tliey  traverse  the  plains. 
When  flying  before  their  pursuers,  it  would  be  in 
vain  for  the  foremost  to  halt,  or  attempt  to  obstruct 
the  progress  of  the  main  body,  as  the  throng  in  the 
rear  still  rushing  onward,  the  leaders  must  ad- 
vance, although  destruction  awaits  the  movement. 
The  Indians  take  advantage  of  this  circumstance  to 
destroy  great  quantities  of  this  favourite  game,  and, 
certainly,  no  mode  could  be  resorted  to  more  effec- 
tually destructive,  nor  could  a more  terrible  devasta- 
tion  be  produced,  than  that  of  forcing  a numerous 


THE  BISON. 


13 


herd  of  these  large  animals,  to  leap  together  from 
the  brink  of  a dreadful  precipice,  upon  a rocky  and 
broken  surface,  a hundred  feet  below. 

When  the  Indians  determine  to  destroy  bison  in 
this  way,  one  of  their  swiftest  footed  and  most  active 
young  men  is  selected,  who  is  disguised  in  a bison 
skin,  having  the  head,  ears,  and  horns  adjusted  on 
his  own  head,  so  as  to  make  the  deception  very 
complete,  and  thus  accoutred,  he  stations  himself 
between  the  bison  herd  and  some  of  the  precipices, 
that  often  extend  for  several  miles  along  the  rivers. 
The  Indians  surround  the  herd  as  nearly  as  possi- 
ble, when,  at  a given  signal,  they  show  themselves 
and  rush  forward  with  loud  yells.  The  animals 
being  alarmed,  and  seeing  no  way  open  but  in  the 
direction  of  the  disguised  Indian,  run  towards  him, 
and  he,  taking  to  flight,  dashes  on  to  the  precipice, 
where  he  suddenly  secures  himself  in  some  previous- 
ly ascertained  crevice.  The  foremost  of  the  herd 
arrives  at  the  brink — there  is  no  possibility  of  retreat, 
no  chance  of  escape;  the  foremost  may  for  an  instant 
shrink  with  terror,  but  the  crowd  behind,  who  are 
terrified  by  the  approaching  hunters,  rush  forward 
with  increasing  impetuosity,  and  the  aggregated 
force  hurls  them  succeswely  into  the  gulf,  where 
certain  death  awaits  them. 

It  is  extremely  fortunate  that  this  sanguinary 
and  wasteful  method  of  killing  bisons  is  not  very 
frequently  resorted  to  by  the  savages,  or  we  might 
expect  these  animals  in  a few  years  to  become  al- 


14 


THE  BISON. 


most  entirely  extinct.  The  waste  is  not  the  only 
unpleasant  circumstance  consequent  on  it;  the  air 
for  a long  time  after,  is  filled  with  the  horrible 
stench  arising  from  the  putrefying  carcases  not 
consumed  by  the  Indians  after  such  an  extensive 
and  indiscriminate  slaughter.  For  a very  consi- 
derable time  after  such  an  event,  the  wolves  and 
vultures  feast  sumptuously  and  fatten  to  tameness 
• on  the  disgusting  remains,  becoming  so  gentle  and 
fearless,  as  to  allow  themselves  to  be  approached 
by  the  human  species,  and  even  to  be  knocked  down 
with  a stick,  near  places  where  such  sacrifices  of 
bison  have  been  made.  Lewis  & Clarke  bestowed 
the  name  of  Slaughter  River  on  one  of  the  tributa- 
ries of  the  Mississippi,  in  consequence  of  the  preci- 
pices along  its  sides,  having  been  used  by  the  In- 
dians for  this  mode  of  killing  the  bison. 

A better  and  more  common  way  of  killing  bison 
is  that  of  attacking  them  on  horseback.  The  In- 
dians, mounted  and  well  armed  with  bows  and  ar- 
rows, encircle  the  herd  and  gradually  drive  them 
into  a situation  favourable  to  the  employment  of 
the  horse.  They  then  ride  in  and  single  out  one, 
generally  a female,  and  following  her  as  closely  as 
possible,  wound  her  with  arrows  until  the  mortal 
blow  is  given,  when  they  go  in  pursuit  of  others 
until  their  quivers  are  exhausted.  Should  a wound- 
ed bison  attack  the  hunter,  he  escapes  by  the  agility 
of  his  horse,  which  is  usually  well  trained  for  the 
purpose.  In  some  parts  of  the  country,  the  hunter 


THE  BISON. 


15 


is  exposed  to  a considerable  danger  of  falling,  in 
consequence  of  the  numerous  holes  made  in  the 
plains  by  the  badger. 

When  the  hunting  is  ended  and  a sufficiency  of 
game  killed,  the  squaws  come  up  from  the  rear  to 
skin  and  dress  the  meat,  a business  in  Avhich  they 
have  acquired  a great  degree  of  dexterity,  as  they 
can,  with  very  inferior  instruments,  butcher  a bison 
with  far  more  celerity  and  precision  than  the  w'hite 
hunters. 

If  a bison  is  found  dead,  without  an  arrow  in  the 
body,  or  any  particular  mark  attached,  it  becomes 
the  property  of  the  finder,  so  that  a hunter  may  ex- 
pend his  arrows  to  no  purpose  when  they  fall  off, 
after  wounding  or  fairly  perforating  the  animal. 
That  the  Indians  do  frequently  send  their  arrows 
through  the  body  of  this  animal  is  well  attested 
by  a great  number  of  witnesses.  In  Long’s  ex- 
pedition to  the  sources  of  St.  Peters’  river,  it  is 
related  that  Wahnita,  a distinguished  chief  of  the 
Sioux,  has  been  seen  to  drive  his  arrow  through  the 
body  of  one  bison,  and  sufficiently  deep  into  the 
body  of  a second  to  inflict  a deadly  W'ound. 

When  the  ice  is  breaking  up  on  the  rivers  in  the 
spring  of  the  year,  the  dry  grass  of  the  surrounding 
plains  is  set  on  fire,  and  the  bison  are  tempted  to 
cross  the  river  in  search  of  the  young  grass  that  im- 
mediately succeeds  the  burning  of  the  old.  lu  the 
attempt  to  cross,  the  bison  is  often  insulated  on  a 
large  cake  of  ice  that  floats  down  tlie  river.  The 


16 


THE  mSON. 


savages  select  the  most  favourable  points  for  attack, 
and  as  the  bison  approaches,  the  Indians  leap  with 
wonderful  agility  over  the  frozen  ice,  to  attack  him, 
and  as  the  animal  is  necessarily  unsteady,  and  his 
footing  very  insecure  on  the  ice,  he  soon  receives 
his  death  wound  and  is  drawn  triumphantly  to  the 
shore. 

The  Cree  Indians  make  a bison-pound,  by  fenc- 
ing a circular  space  of  about  a hundred  yards  in 
diameter.  The  entrance  is  banked  up  with  snoAV 
sufficiently  high  to  prevent  the  animals  from  re- 
treating after  they  have  once  entered.  For  about 
a mile  on  each  side  of  the  road  leading  to  the  pound, 
stakes  are  driven  into  the  ground  at  nearly  equal 
distances  of  about  twenty  yards,  which  are  intend- 
ed to  look  like  men,  and  to  deter  the  animals  from 
endeavouring  to  break  through  the  fence.  Within 
fifty  or  sixty  yards  of  the  pound,  branches  of  trees 
are  placed  between  the  stakes  to  screen  the  Indians 
who  lie  down  beiiind  them,  to  wait  for  the  approach 
of  the  bison.  The  mounted  hunters  display  the 
greatest  dexterity  in  this  sort  of  chase,  as  they  are 
obliged  to  manoeuvre  around  the  herd  in  the  plains 
so  as  to  urge  them  into  the  road-way,  which  is 
about  a quarter  of  a mile  broad.  When  this  is  ef- 
fected, the  Indians  raise  loud  shouts,  and  pressing 
closely  on  the  animals,  terrify  them  so  much,  that 
they  rush  heedlessly  forwards  towards  the  snare. 
When  they  have  advanced  as  far  as  the  men  who 
are  lying  in  ambush,  they  also  show  themselves  in- 


THE  BISON. 


17 


creasing  the  consternation  of  the  bison  by  shouting 
violently  and  firing  their  guns.  The  affrighted 
animals  have  no  alternative  but  to  iTish  directly 
into  the  pound,  where  they  are  quickly  despatched 
by  guns  or  arrows.  In  the  centre  of  one  of  these 
pounds,  there  was  a tree  on  which  the  Indians  had 
hung  strips  of  bison  flesh  and  pieces  of  cloth,  as 
tributary  or  grateful  offerings  to  the  Great  Master 
of  life.  They  occasionally  place  a man  in  the  tree 
to  sing  to  the  presiding  spirit  as  the  bisons  advance. 
He  is  obliged  to  remain  there  until  all  the  animals 
that  have  entered  the  pound  are  killed.^ 

The  Omawhaw  Indians  hunt  the  bison  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner.  The  hunters  who  are  in  advance 
of  the  main  body  on  the  march,  employ  telegraphic 
signals  from  an  elevated  position,  to  convey  a 
knowledge  of  their  discoveries  to  the  people.  If 
they  see  bisons,  they  throw  lip  their  robes  in  a pe- 
culiar manner  as  a signal  for  a halt.  The  hunters 
then-  return  as  speedily  as  possible  to  camp,  and  are 
received  with  some  ceremony  on  their  approaclu 
The  chiefs  and  magicians  are  seated  in  front  of  the 
people,  puffing  smoke  from  their  pipes,  and  tlia.nk- 
ing  the  Master  of  life  with  such  expressions  as 
thanks  Master  of  life,  thank  you  Master  of  life, 
here  is  smoke,  I am  poor,  hungry,  and  want  to  eat/’ 
The  hunters  then  draw,  near  the  chiefs  and  magi  - 
cians,  and  in  a low  tone  of  voice  inform  them  of 


* See  Franklin’s  Exp.  p.  1 12. 

VoL.  HI. 3 


18 


THE  BISON. 


their  discovery;  when  questioned  as  to  the  number, 
they  reply  by  holding  up  some  small  _ sticks  in  a 
horizontal  direction,  and  compare  one  herd  at  a 
certain  distance  with  this  stick,  and  another  with 
that,  &c. 

An  old  man  or  crier  then  harangues  the  people, 
informing  them  of  the,  company,  exhorting  the  wo- 
men to  keep  a good  heart,  telling  them  that  they 
have  endured  many  hardships  with  fortitude,  and 
that  their  present  difficulties  are  ended,  as  on  the 
morrow  the  men  will  go  in  pursuit  of  the  bisons  and 
bring  them  certainly  a plenty  of  meat. 

Four  or  five  resolute  warriors  are  appointed  at 
the  council  of  chiefs,  held  the  evening  previous,  to 
preserve  order  among  the  hunters  on  the  following 
day.  It  is  their  business,  with  a whip  or  club,  to 
punish  those  who  misbehave,  on  the  spot,  or  whose 
movements  tend  to  frighten  the  game  before  all  are 
ready,  or  previously  to  their  arrival  at  the  place 
whence  they  are  to  sally  forth. 

The  next  morning  all  the  men,  not  superannuated, 
depart  at  an  early  hour,  generally  mounted  and 
armed  with  bows  and  arrows.  The  superintend- 
ants  or  officers  above  mentioned  accompany  the 
swiftly  moving  cavalcade,  on  foot,  armed  with  war 
clubs,  the  whole  preceded  by  a footman  bearing  a 
pipe.  When  they  come  in  sight  of  the  herd  the 
hunters  talk  kindly  to  their  horses,  using  the  en- 
dearing names  of  father,  brother,  uncle,  &c.,  beg- 
ging them  not  to  fear  the  bisons,  but  to  run  yvell 


THE  BISON.  19 

and  keep  close,  taking  care  at  the  same  time  not  to 
be  gored  by  them. 

Having  approached  the  herd  as  closely  as  they 
suppose  the  animal  will  permit  without  alarm,  they 
halt,  that  the  pipe  bearer  may  perform  the  cere- 
mony of  smoking,  which  is  thought  necessary  to 
success.  The  pipe  is  lighted,  and  he  remains  a short 
time  with  his  head  inclined,  and  the  stem  of  the 
pipe  extended  towards  the  herd.  He  then  puffs  the 
smoke  towards  the  bisons,  the  heavens,  the  earth, 
and  the  cardinal  points  successively.  These  latter 
are  distinguished  by  the  terms  sun-rise,  sun- set, 
cold  country,  and  w'arm  country. 

This  ceremony  ended,  the  chief  gives  the  order 
for  starting.  They  immediately  separate  into  two 
bands,  which  wheeling  to  the  right  and  left,  make 
a considerable  circuit  with  a view  to  enclose  the  herd 
at  a considerable  interval  between  them.  They  then 
close  upon  the  animals  and  every  man  endeavours 
to  signalize  himself  by  the  number  he  can  kill. 

It  is  now  that  the  Indian  exhibits  all  his  skill  in 
horsemanship  and  archery,  and  when  the  horse  is 
going  at  full  speed,  the  arrow  is  sent  with  a deadly 
aim  and  great  velocity  into  the  body  of  the  animal 
behind  the  shoulder,  where,  should  it  not  bury  itself 
to  a suflBcient  depth,  he  rides  up  and  withdraw  s it 
from  the  side  of  the  wounded  and  furious  animal. 
He  judges  by  the  direction  and  depth  of  the  wound, 
whether  it  be  mortal,  and  when  the  deadly  blow  is 
inflicted,  he  raises  a triumphant  shout  to  prevent 


ao 


THE  BISON. 


others  from  engaging  in  the  pursuit,  and  dashes  off 
to  seek  new  objects  for  destruction,  until  his  quiver 
is  exhausted  or  the  game  has  fled  too  far. 

Although  there  is  au  appearance  of  much  confu- 
sion in  this  engagement,  and  the  saine  animal  re- 
ceives many  arrows  from  different  archers  before 
he  is  mortally  wounded  or  despatched,  yet  as  every 
man  knows  his  own  arrows,  and  can  estimate  the 
consecj[uences  of  the  wounds  he  has  inflicted,  few 
quarrels  ever  occur  as  to  the  right  of  property  in 
the  animal.  A fleet  horse  well  trained,  runs  paral- 
lel with  the  bison  at  the  proper  distance,  with  the 
reins  thrown  on  Ids  neck,  turns  as  he  turns,  and  does 
not  lessen  Ids  speed  until  the  shoulder  of  the  animal 
is  presented,  and  the  mortal  wound  has  been  given; 
then  by  inclining  to  one  side  the  rider  directs  him 
towards  another  bison.  Such  horses  are  preserved 
exclusively  for  the  chase  and  are  very  rarely  sub- 
jected to  the  labour  of  carrying  burdens.^ 

The  effect  of  training,  on  the  Indian  horses,  is 
well  shown  in  a circumstance  related  by  Lewis  and 
Clarke.  A serjeaut  had  been  sent  forward  with  a 
number  of  horses,  and  while  ©n  his  way,  came  up 
with  a herd  of  bisons.  As  soon  as  the  loose  horses 
discovered  the  herd,  they  immediately  set  off  in 
pursuit,  and  surrounded  the  bisons  with  almost  as 
much  skill  as  if  they  had  been  directed  by  riders. 
At  length  the  sergeant  was  obliged  to  send  two  men 


* Say,  Long’s  Exp.  to  Rocky  Mountdiiis,  v.  2. 


THE  BISON. 


2i 


forward  to  drive  the  bisons  from  the  route  before 
they  were  able  to  proceed. 

The  skins  of  the  bison  furnish  the  Indians 
and  Whites  with  excellent  robes,  for  bedding, 
clothing,  and  various  purposes.  These  are  most 
usually  the  skin  of  cows,  as  the  hide  of  the  bull  is 
too  thick  and  heavy  to  be  prepared  in  the  way  prac- 
tised by  the  squaws,  which  is  both  difficult  and  te- 
dious. This  consists  in  working  the  hide,  moisten- 
ed with  the  brains  of  the  animal,  between  the  hands, 
until  it  is  made  perfectly  supple,  or  till  the  thick 
texture  of  the  skin  is  reduced  to  a porous  and  cel- 
lular substance.  These  robes  form  an  excellent  pro- 
tection from  rain,  when  the  woolly  side  is  opposed 
to  it,  and  against  the  cold  when  the  woolly  surface 
is  worn  next  the  skin.  But  when  these  robes  are 
wet,  or  for  a considerable  time  exposed  to  moisture, 
they  are  apt  to  spoil  and  become  unpleasant,  as  the 
Indian  mode  of  dressing  has  no  other  effect  than  to 
give  a softness  and  a pliancy  to  the  leather.  On  these 
robes  the  Indians  frequently  make  drawings  of  their 
great  battles  and  victories;  a great  variety  of  such 
painted  robes  are  to  be  seen  in  the  Philadelphia 
Museum.  The  hair  of  the  bison  has  been  used  in 
the  manufacture  of  a coarse  cloth,  but  this  fabric 
has  never  been  extensively  employed. 

We  have  already  adverted  to  the  great  numbers 
of  these  animals  which  live  together.  They  have 
been  seen  in  herds  of  three,  four,  and  five  thousand, 
blackening  the  plains  as  far  as  the  eye  could  view. 


THE  BISON. 


S3 

Some  Iravellei’s  are  of  opinion  that  they  have  seen 
as  many  as  eight  or  ten  thousand  in  the  same  herd, 
but  this  is  merely  a conjecture.  At  night  it  is  im- 
possible for  persons  to  sleep  near  them  who  are  un- 
accustomed to  their  noise,  which  from  the  incessant 
lowing  and  roaring  of  the  bulls,  is  said  very  much 
to  resemble  distant  thunder.  Although  frequent 
battles  take  place  between  the  bulls,  as  among  do- 
mestic cattle,  the  habits  of  the  bison  are  peaceful 
and  inoffensive,  seldom  or  never  offering  to  attack 
man  or  other  animals,  unless  outraged  in  the  first 
instance.  They  sometimes,  when  wounded,  turn  on 
the  aggressor,  but  it  is  only  in  the  rutting  season 
that  any  danger  is  to  be  apprehended  from  the  fe- 
rocity and  strength  of  the  bison  bull.  At  all  other 
times,  whether  wounded  or  not,  their  efforts  are 
exclusively  directed  towards  effecting  their  escape 
from  their  pursuers,  and  at  this  time  it  does  not 
appear  that  their  rage  is  provoked  particularly,  by 
an  attack  on  themselves,  but  their  unusual  intre- 
pidity is  indiscriminately  directed  against  all  sus- 
picious objects. 

We  shall  conclude  this  account  of  bison,  by  in- 
troducing the  remarks  of  John  E.  Calhoun,  Esq.,* 
relative  to  the  extent  of  country  over  which  this 
animal  formerly  roved  and  which  it  at  present  in- 
habits. 


* Long’s  Exp.  to  the  source  of  the  St.  Peter’s  river,  ii. 


THE  BISON. 


23 


The  buffaloe  was  formerly  found  throughout  the 
whole  territory  of  the  United  States,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  that  part  which  lies  east  of  Hudson’s  river 
and  Lake  Champlain,  and  of  narrow  strips  of  coast 
on  the  Atlantic  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  These  were 
swampy  and  had  probably  low  thick  woods.  That 
it  did  not  exist  on  the  Atlantic  coast  is  rendered 
probable,  from  the  circumstance  that  all  the  early 
writers  whom  Mr.  Calhoun  has  consulted  on  the 
subject,  and  they  are  numerous,  do  not  mention 
them  as  existing  then,  but  further  back.  Thomas 
Alorton,  one  of  the  first  settlers  of  New  England, 
says,  that  the  Indians  “ have  also  made  description 
of  great  hoards  of  well  growne  beasts,  that  live 
about  the  parts  of  this  lake,”  Erocoise,  now  Lake 
Ontario,  such  as  the  Christian  world,  (untile  this 
discovery,)  hath  not  bin  made  acquainted  ivitb. 
These  beasts  are  of  the  biguesse  of  a cowe,  their 
flesh  being  very  good  foode,  their  hides  good  le- 
ther,  their  fleeces  very  useful,  being  a kind  of  wolle, 
as  fine  almost  as  the  wolle  of  the  beaver,  and  the 
salvages  do  make  garments  thereof;”  he  adds,  It 
is  tenne  yeares  since  first  the  relation  of  these  things 
c^me  to  the  eares  of  the  English.”*  We  have  in- 
troduced this  quotation,  partly  with  a view  to  show 
that  the  fineness  of  the  buffalo  wool,  which  has 
caused  it  within  a few  years,  to  become  an  object  of 


* New  English  Canaan,  by  Thomas  Morton,  Amsterdam, 
1637,  p.  98. 


24 


THE  BISON. 


commerce,  was  known  as  far  back  as  Morton’s 
time;  he  compares  it  with  that  of  t!ie  beaver  and 
with  some  truth;  we  were  shown  lower  down  on 
Red  river,  hats  that  appeared  to  be  of  a very  good 
quality;  they  had  been  made  in  London  with  the 
wool  of  the  bulfaloe.  An  acquaintance  on  the  part 
of  Europeans  with  the  animal  itself,  can  be  referred 
to  nearly  a century  before  that:  forin  1532,  Guzman 
met  with  bulfalo  in  the  province  of  Cinaloa.^  De 
Laet  says,  upon  the  authority  of  Gomara,  when 
speaking  of  the  bulfalo  in  Quivira,  that  they  are 
almost  black,  and  seldom  diversified  with  white 
spots.f  In  his  history  written  subsequently  to  1684, 
Hubbard  does  not  enumerate  this  animal  among 
those  of  New  England.  Purchas  informs,  us  that 
in  1613  the  adventurers  discovered  in  Virginia,  a 
slow  kinde  of  cattell  as  bigge  as  kine,  which  were 
good  meate.”J  From  Lawson,  we  find  that  great 
plenty  of  buffaloes,  elks,  &c.,  existed  near  Cape 
Fear  river  and  its  tributaries;^  and  we  know  that 
some  of  those  who  first  settled  the  Abbeville  dis- 
ti  ict  in  South  Carolina,  in  1756,  found  the  buflfaloe 
there.  De  Soto’s  party,  who  traversed  East  Florida, 
Georgia,  Alabama,  Mississippi,  Arkansa  Territory, 
and  Louisiana,  from  1539  to  1543,  saw  no  buffaloe. 


* De  Laet,  Americae  utriusque  Descriptio,  Lugd.  Batav, 
anno  1633,  lib,  6.  cap.  6. 

t Idem,  lib.  6,  cap.  17.  t Purchas  ut  supra,  p.  759. 

§ Lawson  ut  supra,  p.  48,  115  &c. 


THE  BISON. 


25 


they  were  told  that  the  aoioial  was  north  of  them; 
however,  they  frequently  met  with  buffalo  hides, 
particularly  when  west  of  the  Mississippi;  and  Du 
Pratz,  who  published  in  i758,  informs  us  that  at 
that  time  the  animal  did  not  exist  in  lower  Louisiana. 
We  know  however  of  one  author,  Bernard  Romans, 
who  wrote  in  1774,  and  who  speaks  of  the  buf- 
falo as  a benefit  of  nature  bestowed  upon  Florida. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  animal  approached 
the  Grulf  of  Mexico,  near  the  Bay  of  St.  Bernard; 
for  Alvar  Nunez,  about  the  year  1535,  saw  ihem 
not  far  from  the  coast;  and  Joater,  one  hundred  and 
fifty  years  afterw'ards,  saw  them  at  the  Bay  of  St. 
Bernard.  It  is  probable  that  this  Bay  is  the  lowest 
point  of  latitude  at  which  this  animal  has  been 
found  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.  There  can 
be  no  doubt  of  their  existence  west  of  those  moun- 
tains, though  Father  Venegas  does  not  include  them 
among  the  animals  of  California,  and  although  they 
•were  not  seen  west  of  the  mountains  by  Lewis  and 
Clarke,  nor  mentioned  by  Harmon  and  Mackenzie 
as  existing  in  New  Caledonia,  a country  of  immense 
extent,  which  is  included  betw’een  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
the  Rocky  *Mountains,  the  territory  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  Russian  possessions,  on  the  north- 
west coast  of  America.  Yet  their  existence  at  present 
on  the  Columbia,  appears  to  be  well  ascertained, 
and  we  are  told  that  there  is  a tradition  amons;  the 
natives,  that  shortly  before  the  visit  of  our  enter- 
prising explorers,  destructive  fires  had  raged  over 
VoL.  in. 4 


£5 


THE  BISON. 


the  prairies  and  driven  the  buffalo  east  of  the 
mountains.  Mr.  Dougherty,  the  very  able  and 
intelligent  sub-agent,  who  accompanied  the  expe- 
dition to  the  llocky  MotUntaius,  and  who  communi- 
cated so  much  valuable  matter  to  Mr.  Say,  asserted 
that  he  had  seen  a few  of  them  in  the  mountains, 
but  not  west  of  them.  It  is  highly  probable  that 
the  buffalo  ranged  on  the  western  side  of  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  to  as  low  a latitude  as  on  the 
eastern  side.  De  Laet  says,  on  the  authority  of 
Henera,  that  they  grazed  as  far  south  as  the  banks 
of  the  river  Yaquimi.^  In  the  same  chapter  this 
author  states,  that  Martin  Perez  had,  in  1591,  es- 
timated the  province  of  Cihaloa,  in  which  this  river 
runs,  to  be  three  hundred  leagues  from  the  city  of 
Mexico.  This  river  is  supposed  to  be  the  same, 
which,  on  Mr.  Tanner’s  map  of  North  America, 
(Philadelphia,  1833,)  is  named  Hiaqui,  and  situated 
between  the  £7^h  and  28th  degrees  of  north  lati- 
tude. Perhaps,  however,  it  may  be  the  Rio  G-ila, 
which  empties  itself  in  latitude  32°.  Although  we 
may  not  be  able  to  determine  with  precision,  the 
southern  limit  of  the  roamings  of  the  buffalo  west 
of  the  mountains,  the  fact  of  their  existence  there  in 
great  abundance,  is  amply  settled  by  the  testimony 
of  De  Laet,  on  the  authority  of  Gomara,  1.  6,  c.  17, 
and  of  Purchas,  p.  778-  Its  limits  to  the  north  are 


* “ Juxta  Vaquimi  fluminis  ripas  tauri  vaccjeque  et  prae- 
grandes  cervi  pascuntur,”  ut  supra  lib.  6 cap.  6, 


THE  BISON. 


not  easier  to  Atermine.  In  Hakluyts’  collection 
we  have  an  e^ract  of  a letter  from  Mr.  Anthonie 
Parkhurst,  in  jo78,  in  which  he  uses  these  words; 
in  the  Island  a Newfoundland  there  are  raightie 
beastes,  like  td  camels  in  greatnesse,  and  their  feete 
cloven.  I di(|  see  them  farre  off,  not  able  to  dis- 
cerne  them  p rfectly,  hut  their  steps  shewed  that 
their  feete  wele  cloven  and  bigger  than  the  feete  of 
camels.  I suppose  them  to  be  a kind  of  buffes, 
which  I read|to  bee  in  the  country s adjacent  and 
very  many  in  the  firme  land.”^'  In  the  same  col- 
lection, p.  639,  we  find,  in  the  account  of  Sir 
Humphrey  Gilbert’s  voyages,  which  commenced  in 
1583,  that  tliere  are  said  to  be  in  Newfoundland, 
buttoltles,  I'or  a beast,  it  seemeth  by  the  tract  and 
foote,  very  ]b,rge  in  the  manner  of  an  oxe.”  It  may, 
however,  bfc  questioned  whether  these  were  not 
musk  oxen,  instead  of  the  common  buffalo  or  bison 
of  our  prairiis.  W e have  no  authority  of  any  weight, 
which  warrtints  us  in  admitting  that  the  buffalo 
existed  nortii  of  Lakes  Ontario,  Erie,  &c.  and  east 
of  Lake  Superior.  From  what  w'e  know  of  the 
country  between  Nelson’s  Hiver,  Hudson’s  Bay, 
and  the  lower  Lakes,  including  New  South  Wales 
and  Upper  Canada,  we  are  inclined  to  believe  that 
the  buffalo  never  abounded  there,  if  indeed  any  were 


* The  principal  navigations,  voyages,  and  discoveries  of 
the  English  nation,  &c,  by  Richard  Hakluyt,  London,  1589, 
p.  676. 


THE  BISON. 


28 

ever  found  north  of  the  lakes.  Bit  west  of  Lake 
Winnepeck,  we  know  that  they  a*e  found  as  far 
north  as  the  62nd  degree  of  north  ktitude.  Capt. 
Franklin’s  party  killed  one  on  Saltriver,  about  the 
60th  degree.  Probably  they  are  foiud  all  over  the 
prairies  which  are  bounded  on  the  lorth  by  a line 
commencing  at  the  point  at  which  tje  62nd  degree 
meets  the  base  of  the  Rocky  Mountaiis,  and  running 
in  a south  easterly  direction,  to  the  sjuthern  extre- 
mity of  Lake  Winnepeck,  which  is  'mt  very  little 
north  of  the  50tli  degree;  on  the  Sxrdatchawan, 
buffalo  are  very  abundant.  It  may  be  proper  to 
mention  here,  that  the  small  white  biif  alo,  of  which 
Mackenzie  makes  frequent  mention,  onthe  authority 
of  the  Indians,  who  told  him  that  thej  lived  in  the 
mountains,  is  probably  not  the  bison;  for  Lewis  and 
Clarke  inform  us,  that  the  Indians  designated  by 
that  name  the  mountain  sheep.*  It  is  jirobable  that 
west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  the  buff ilo  does  not 
extend  far  north  of  the  Columbia.  At  present  it  is 
scarcely  seen  east  of  the  Mississippi,  ind  south  of 
the  St.  Lawrence.  Governor  Cass’s  party  found  in 
1819,  buffalo  on  the  east  side  of  the  Mississippi, 
above  the  falls  of  St.  Anthony:  every  rear  this  ani- 
mal’s rovings  are  restricted.  In  1822,  the  limit  of 
its  wanderings  down  the  St.  Peter,  was  Great  Swan 
Lake  (near  Camp  Crescent.) 


* Vol.  ii.  p,  325. 


j^-4s-''''^9-  *'V’ 


wiT-:- ' 


''4^r~- 


'.'  I'T’ 


/Jrmyii  hv  /\A  J.i 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


29 


Species  II.— TAe  Musk  Ox. 

Bos  Moschatus  Gmel. 

Mush  Ox:  Pejtst.  Quad.  i.  31.  Ibid,  Arct.  Zool.  3 vol.  i.  8. 

Musk  Ox:  Heaene,  Journey  &c.  8vo.  135. 

Basuf  Musque:  Burr.  Hist.  Natiu-elle  Suppl.  «. 

Ov.bos*  Musqui:  Blainv.  Nouv.  Bullet,  de  la  Soc.  Philom. 

Mush  Ox:  PaiTy’s  Voyage,  i.  202. 

\Called  Mathek-Mongsoo,  or  Ugly  Moose,  hy  the  Crees, 
Uming  Mak,  by  the  Esquimaux. 

To  civilized  man,  the  extreme  northern  regions 
may  appear  cheerless  and  uninviting,  because  they 
are  subjected  to  the  almost  unrelenting  influ- 


* Mr.  De  Blainville  proposed  to  establish  a new  genus,  to 
be  called  Ovibos  or  Sheep-ox,  of  which  the  Musk-ox  is  the 
first  species.  His  generic  distinctions  are  drawn  from  the 
resemblance  between  the  outline  of  the  front  of  the  musk-ox 
and  that  of  the  sheep,  and  from  the  absence  of  the  muzzle  or 
smooth  naked  surface,  between  the  nostrils,  and  upon  the 
upper  lip.  This  division,  though  as  well  founded  as  that 
which  separates  Capra  from  Ovis,  we  conceive  to  be  alto- 
gether unnecessary,  as  the  characters  are  not  more  than 
sufficient  to  establish  a specific  difference.  In  regard  to  the 
muzzle,  nothing  is  said  in  the  text  of  Parry’s  work,  though 
it  is  very  distinctly  represented  in  the  plate,  which  is  said  to 
be  very  accurate,  and  which  we  have  copied;  as  the  com- 
mon descriptions  of  the  musk-ox,  have  mostly  been  taken 
from  dridd  skins,  it  is  possible,  that  the  absence  of  the  muz- 
zle has  been  stated  too  hastily. 


30 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


ence  of  wintry  sides.  Yet  we  have  already  seen 
that  they  are  the  favourite  resorts  of  multitudes  of 
animals,  varying  in  size,  characters  and  habits,  from 
the  Lemming  to  the  Moose.  A species  remains  to 
be  described,  which,  of  these  forbidding  regions 
prefers  the  most  barren  and  desolate  parts,  and  is 
found  in  the  greatest  abundance  in  the  rugged  and 
scarcely  accessible  districts  lying  nearest  the  North 
Pole.  This  species,  so  far  from  being  condemned  to  a 
life  of  extreme  privation  and  suffering,  appears  to 
derive  as  much  enjoyment  from  existence,  as  those 
which  feed  in  more  luxuriant  pastures,  or  bask  in 
the  genial  rays  of  a summer  sun. 

In  destining  the  musk  ox  to  inhabit  the  domains 
of  frost  and  storm,  nature  has  paid  especial  atten- 
tion to  its  security  against  the  effects  of  both;  first, 
by  covering  its  body  with  a coat  of  long,  dense  hair, 
and  then,  by  the  shortness  of  its  Ijmbs,  avoiding  the 
exposure  that  would  result  from  a greater  elevation 
of  the  trunk.  The  projection  of  the  orbits  of  the 
eyes,  which  is  very  reraaiicable  in  this  species,  is 
thought  by  Pauiiy  to  be  intended  to  carry  the  eye 
clear  of  the  large  rpiantity  of  hair  required  to  pre- 
serve the  warmth  of  the  head. 

Although  some  few  items  relative  to  this  animal 
are  to  be  gathered  from  the  works  of  the  recent  ex- 
plorers of  the  Northern  Regions,  it  is  to  Hbarne, 
that  we  are  almost  exclusively  indebted  for  the 
Natural  History  of  the  musk  ox,  as  we  have  already 
been  for  that  of  most  of  the  animals  inhabiting  the 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


31 


same  parts  of  this  continent.  This  excellent  and 
accurate  observer  travelled,  in  the  years  ^69,  ’70,71j 
and  ’72,  and  it  is  only  to  be  regretted  that  he  did 
did  not  write  down  all  he  Icnew  in  relation  to  the 
northern  animals.  He  appears  to  have  frequently 
thought  that  what  was  so  familiarly  known  to  him, 
would  not  be  of  much  interest  to  others,  and  has 
thus  withheld  knowledge  that  few  individuals  can 
have  a similar  opportunity  of  gaining.  Notwith- 
standing this,  he  has  anticipated  all  the  recent  ex- 
plorers in  every  essential  observation. 

Hearne  states  that  he  has  seen  many  herds  of 
musk  oxen  in  the  high  northern  latitudes,  during  a 
single  day’s  journey,  and  some  of  these  herds  con- 
tained from  eighty  to  a hundred  individuals,  of 
which  number  a very  small  proportion  were  bulls, 
and  it  was  quite  uncommon  to  see  more  than  two 
or  three  full  grown  males,  even  w’ith  the  largest 
herds.  The  Indians  had  a notion  that  the  males 
destroyed  each  other  in  combating  for  the  females, 
and  this  idea  is  somewhat  supported  by  the  warlike 
disposition  manifested  by  these  animals  during  their 
sexual  season.  The  bulls  are  then  so  jealous  of 
every  thing  that  approaches  their  favourites,  that 
they  will  not  only  attack  men  or  quadrupeds,  but 
will  run  bellowing  after  ravens  or  other  large  birds 
that  venture  too  near  the  cows. 

Musk  oxen  are  found  in  the  greatest  numbers 
within  the  arctic  circle;  considerable  herds  are  oc- 
casionally seen  near  the  coast  of  Hudson’s  bay, 


33 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


tbrougliout  the  distance  from  Knapp’s  Bay  to 
Wager  Water.  They  have. in  a few  instances  been 
seen  as  low  down  as  lat.  60°  N.  Capt.  Parry’s 
people  killed  some  individuals  on  Melville  Island, 
which  were  remarkably  well  fed  and  fat.  They 
are  not  commonly  found  at  a great  distance  from  the 
woods,  and  when  they  feed  on  open  grounds  they 
prefer  the  most  rocky  and  precipitous  situations. 
Yet,  notwithstanding  their  bulk  and  apparent  un- 
wieldiness, they  climb  among  the  rocks  with  all  the 
ease  and  agility  of  the  goat,  to  which  they  are  quite 
equal  in  sureness  of  foot.  Their  favourite  food  is 
grass,  but  when  this  is  not  to  be  had,  they  readily 
feed  upon  moss,  the  twigs  of  willow,  or  tender 
shoots  of  pine.* 

The  appearance  of  the  musk  ox  is  singular  and 
imposing,  owing  to  the  shortness  of  the  limbs,  its 
broad  flattened  crooked  horns,  and  the  long  dense 
hair  which  envelopes  the  whole  of  its  trunk,  and 
hangs  down  nearly  to  the  ground.  When  full 


* It  is  singular  and  well  worthy  of  observation,  that  the 
dung  of  the  mu.sk  os,  though  so  large  an  animal,  is  not  lar- 
ger than,  and,  at  the  same  time,  is  so  nearly  of  the  shape  and 
colour  of  that  of  the  Alpine  Hare,  that  the  difference  is  not 
easily  distinguished  except  by  the  Indians,  though  the 
quantity  generally  indicates  the  animal  to  which  it  belonged. 
In  the  country  adjacent  to  the.  Coppermine  river,  long  ridg- 
es of  this  dung,  together  with  that  of  deer  and  other  animals 
were  seen  by  Hearne.  Similar  appearances  were  observed 
by  Parry  on  several  of  the  North  Georgian  Islands. 


THE  MUSK  ,0\'. 


33 


grown,  the  musk  ox  is  ten  hands  and  a half  high, 
according  to  Parry,  and  as  large  as  the  generality, 
or  at  least  the  middling  size  of  English  black  cat- 
tle; but  their  legs,  though  large,  are  not  so  long;  nor 
is  their  tail  longer  than  that  of  a l)ear,  and  like  the 
tail  of  that  animal  it  always  bends  downwards  and 
inwards,  so  that  it  is  entirely  hid  by  the  long  hair  of 
the  rump  and  bind  quarters.  The  hunch  on  their 
shoulders  is  not  large,  being  little  more  in  propor- 
tion than  that  of  a deer.  Their  hair  is  in  some  parts 
very  long,  particularly  on  the  belly,  sides  and 
hind  quarters;  but  the  longest  hair  about  them,  par- 
ticularly the  bulls,  is  under  the  throat,  extending  from 
the  chin  to  the  lower  part  of  the  chest,  between 
the  forelegs;  it  there  hangs  down  like  a horse’s 
mane  inverted,  and  is  full  as  long.* 


* “ Mr.  Dragge  says  in  his  voyage,  vol.  2,  p.  260,  that  the 
musk  ox  is  lower  than  a deer,  but  larger  as  to  belly  and 
quarters;  which  is  very  far  from  the  truth.  They  are  of 
the  size  I have  here  described  them,  and  the  Indians  always 
estimate  the  flesh  of  a full  grown  cow  to  be  equal  to  three 
deer.  I am  sorry  also  to  be  obliged  to  contradict  my  friend 
Mr.  Graham,  who  says  that  tho  flesh  of  this  animal  is  car- 
ried on  sledges  to  Prince  of  Wales’  Fort,  to  the  amount  of 
three  or  four  thousand  pounds  annually.  To  the  amount  of 
near  one  thousand  pounds  may  have  been  purchased  from  the 
natives  in  some  particular  years,  but  it  more  frequently 
happens  that  not  an  ounce  is  brought  one  year  out  of  five, 
and  in  fact,  all  that  has  ever  been  carried  to  Prince  of 
Wales’  Fort,  has  most  assuredly  been  killed  out  of  a herd 

VoL.  ITT.— 5 


34 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


The  winter  coat  of  the  musk  ox  is  formed  of  two 
sorts  of  hair,  which  is  generally  of  a brownish  red, 
and  in  some  places  of  a blackish  brown  colour;  the 
external  being  long,  coarse,  and  straight,  and  the 
internal,  fine,  soft  and  woolly.  The  outer  hair  is  so 
long  that  it  hides  the  greater  part  of  the  limbs,  caus- 
ing them  to  look  disproportionately  short.  As  the 
summer  comes  on,  the  short  woolly  hair  is  gradually 
shed,  but  the  summers  are  so  short  in  these  high 
latitudes,  that  the  woolly  coat  commences  growing 
almost  immediately  after  the  old  coat  is  shed,  so  that 
the  entire  winter  coat  is  completed  by  the  return  of 
the  cold  weather. 

From  the  shortness  of  the  limbs  and  the  weight  of 
the  body,  it  might  be  inferred  that  the  musk  ox  could 
not  run  with  any  speed,  but  it  is  stated  by  Parry, 
that  although  they  run  in  a hobbling  sort  of  canter 
that  makes  them  appear  as  if  every  now  and  then 
about  to  fall,  yet  the  slow^est  of  these  musk  oxen 
can  far  outstrip  a man.  When  disturbed  and  hum 
ed,  they  frequently  tore  up  the  ground  with  their 
horns,  and  turned  round  to  look  at  their  pursuers, 
but  never  attempted  to  make  an  attack. 

The  month  of  August  is  the  season  in  which  the 
musk  bulls  are  the  most  disposed  to  combat,  as  they 


that  has  been  accidentally  found  within  a moderate  distance 
of  the  settlement,  perhaps  within  a hundred  miles;  which  is 
only  thought  a step  by  an  Indian.”  Hearne,  136.  (The  fort 
he  mentions,  was  destroyed  by  the  French  in  1782.) 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


35 


then  fight  furiously  with  each  other  for  the  females, 
and  are  jealous  of  the  approach  of  every  thing,  as 
already  stated.  The  cows  calve  about  the  end  of 
May  or  the  beginning  of  June;  the  calves  are  fre- 
quently whitish,  but  more  commonly  marked  by  a 
W’hite  patch  or  saddle  upon  the  back. 

The  musk  oxen  killed  on  Melville  island  during 
Parry’s  visit,  were  very  fat,  and  their  flesh,  espe- 
cially the  heart,  although  highly  scented  with  musk, 
was  considered  very  good  food.  When  cut  up  it  had 
all  the  appearance  of  beef  for  the  market.  Hearxe 
says  that  the  flesh  of  the  musk  ox  does  not  at  all  re- 
semble that  of  the  bison,  f Bos  Americanus J but  is 
more  like  that  of  the  moose,  and  the  fat  is  of  a clear 
white  tinged  with  light  azure.  The  young  cows  and 
calves  furnish  a very  palatable  beef,  but  that  of  the 
old  bulls  is  so  intolerably  musky,  as  to  be  exces- 
sively disagreeable.  A knife  used  in  cutting  up 
such  meat,  becomes  so  strongly  scented  with  this 
substance,  as  to  require  much  washing  and  scouring 
before  it  is  removed.*  Musk  ox  flesh  when  dried, 
is  considered  by  hunters  and  Indians  to  be  very 
good.  “ In  most  parts  of  Hudson’s  Bay  it  is  known 
by  the  name  of  Kew-hagon,  but  amongst  the  North- 
ern Indians  it  is  called  Achees.”  The  weight  of 


*Moschusiste  glandulis  juxtaprseputiumpositis  efformari 
videtur;  ibi  materia  fusca,  concreta,  fortissime  moschi  odo- 
rans  inventa  est. 


36 


THE  MUSK  OX. 


the  musk  ox,  according  to  Parry,  is  about  700  lbs. 
that  of  the  head  and  hide  is  ISOlbs. 

The  horns  of  the  musk  ox  are  employed  for  va- 
rious purposes  by  the  Indians  and  Esquimaux,  es- 
pecially for  making  cups  and  spoons.  From  the  long 
hair  growing  on  the  neck  and  chest,  the  Esquimaux 
make  their  musquitoe  wigs,  to  defend  their  faces 
from  those  troublesome  insects.  The  hide  of  the 
musk  ox  makes  good  soles  for  shoes,  and  is  much 
used  by  the  natives  for  this  purpose. 

During  the  months  of  August  and  September 
the  musk  oxen  extend  their  migrations  to  the  North 
Georgian  and  other  islands  bordering  the  northern 
shores  of  the  continent.  By  the  first  of  October 
they  have  all  left  the  islands  and  moved  towards 
the  south.  By  Franklin’s  Expedition,  they  were 
not  seen  lower  than  66°  N.  though,  as  we  have  be- 
fore stated  from  Hearne,  they  are  occasionally  seen 
as  low  as  60°. 


CHAPTER  II. 


Order  VIII.  Cete;  Cetaceous  Animals. 

Cetaceous  animals  in  general  appearance  and  in 
mode  of  living,  bear  a considerable  resemblance 
to  fish,  with  which  they  are  popularly  confounded; 
but  by  all  the  details  of  their  conformation,  their  man- 
ner of  respiration  and  the  nourishment  of  their  off- 
spring, they  are  entitled  to  rank  in  the  first  class  of 
animals,  although  at  the  inferior  extremity  of  the 
scale. 

In  these  creatures  the  head  is  joined  to  the  trunk 
by  so  short  and  thick  a neck,  as  to  appear  continuous 
with  the  body,  and  this  large  neck  is  in  the  greater 
number  capable  of  very  little,  if  any  motion,  owing 
to  the  consolidation  of  several  of  the  slender  cervi- 
cal vertebrae.  The  trunk  of  the  body  gradually  de- 
creases until  it  terminates  in  a thick  tail,  which 
ends  in  a horizontal  cartilaginous  fin,  and  when 
used  by  the  animal  in  effecting  its  forward  motion, 
is  moved  up  and  down,  never  laterally. 

The  anterior  extremities  or  arms,  although  in  all 
respects  analogous  to  those  of  the  higher  orders  of 
animals,  have  the  bones  shortened,  flattened  and  en> 


3S 


CETACEOUS  ANIMALS. 


veloped  in  a tendinous  membrane,  so  as  to  be  effec- 
tually converted  into  fins.  The  posterior  extremi- 
ties or  limbs  are  entirely  wanting. 

The  brain  is  large  and  well  developed.  The 
bone  containing  the  organ  of  hearing,  or  internal 
ear,  is  separated  from  the  rest  of  the  head,  being 
attached  thereto  by  ligament  alone.  The  orifice  of 
the  external  ear  is  very  small  and  destitute  of  exter- 
nal appendage.  The  teats,  two  in  number,  are  either 
pectoral  or  abdominal. 


<1 


CHAPTER  III. 


Family  I.  Sirbnia;  Herbivorous  Cetacea. 

This  family  is  distinguished  especially  by  tlie  ve- 
getable diet  of  the  animals  belonging  to  it,  which 
is  indicated  by  their  flat  grinding  teeth.  The  bead 
is  not  very  large,  and  has  always  a short  and  obtuse 
snout,  at  the  extremity  of  which,  the  external  open- 
ings of  the  nostrils  are  situated,  notwithstanding 
they  pass  through  the  bones  of  the  head  from  the 
superior  part.  The  mouth  is  garnished  with  long 
bristles  or  whiskers,  and  the  teats  are  situated  upon 
the  chest. 

The  anterior  extremities,  though  compressed,  are 
still  sufficiently  free  to  allow  them  to  be  used  for  the 
purpose  of  carrying  any  thing  by  holding  it  against 
the  body,  the  young,  for  instance,  being  thusjheld  by 
the  mother.  The  tail  is  not  very  large,  but  is  pow- 
erful. These  animals  swim  with  great  facility,  and 
as  they  are  able  to  raise  the  anterior  parts  from  the 
water,  so  as  to  form  a considerable  angle  with  the 
trunk,  it  is  considered  as  highly  probable  that  the 
various  fables  of  sirens,  tritons  and  mermaids  may 


40 


HERBIVOROUS  CETACEA. 


have  originated  from  an  imperfect  oliservation  of 
their  actions. 

It  must  he  admitted  that  tlie  members  of  this  fa- 
mily, present  little  in  their  general  appearance  to 
excite  attention,  unless  it  I)e  their  huge  and  almost 
shapeless  bodies;  but  their  internal  structure,  actions 
and  habitudes,  afford  very  ample  scope  for  interesting 
' observations,  and  philosophical  inquiry;  as  it  would 
not  be  easy,  from  any  previous  knowledge,  to  be- 
lieve that  merely  herbivorous  animals  would  be 
found  inhabiting  the  ocean,  conformed  in  all  re- 
spects, so  as  closely  to  approach  in  external  appear- 
ance to  fish,  and  yet  in  all  the  characters  of  teeth, 
mode  of  feeding  and  digestive  organs,  to  bear  a very 
marked  resemblance  to  herbivorous  land  quadru- 
peds. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


Genus  I. — Lamantin;  Manatus,  C. 

GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 

The  head  is  small  and  conical  with  a broad  snout, 
and  rather  small  mouth;  the  eyes  are  placed  high 
up  between  the  extremity  of  the  snout  and  the  open- 
ings leading  to  the  ears,  which  are  very  small  and 
hardly  visible.  The  spine  is  composed  of  seven 
very  short  cervical,  seventeen  dorsal,  two  lumbar, 
and  twenty-two  caudal  vertebrae.  The  ribs  are 
seventeen  in  number.  In  addition  to  the  shoulder 
blade,  arm  and  forearm,  the  lamantins  have  all  the 
wrist  or  carpal  bones,  with  the  single  exception  of 
the  pisiform,  the  phalanges  of  the  thumb  are  wanting, 
and  the  corresponding  metacarpal  bone  terminates 
in  a point.  All  the  other  digits  have  three  pha- 
langes. The  stomach  has  several  cavities,  the  coecum 
two  branches,  and  the  colon  is  very  large;  in  all 
which  circumstances  they  strongly  resemble  the 
pachydermatous  land  animals,  along  with  which 
VoL.  IIL—^B 


42 


THE  LAMANTIN. 


they  have  been  considered  by  some  naturalists.^ 
The  surface  of  the  body  is  entirely  destitute  of  hair. 


In  the  upper  jaw;  in  young  individuals  two 
small  pointed  incisive  teeth  are  found,  somewhat 
similar  to  those  of  the  morse.  There  are  no  ca- 
nines. The  eight  molars  resemble  each  other;  they 
have  a general  square  form,  and  all  present  two 
transverse  eminences,  formed  of  three  tubercles, 
separated  from  each  other  by  a deep  groove:  they 
all  have  three  divergent  roots,  one  internal,  the 
other  two  external.  They  increase  gradually,  but 
almost  imjjerceptibly,  in  size  from  the  first  to  the 
last. 

In  the  lower  jaw,  neither  incisive  nor  canine 
teeth  are  ever  found,  and  the  molars  resemble  those 
of  the  upper  jaw,  except  in  having  a spur  posterior- 
ly, or  a third  eminence  much  smaller  than  the 
others.  These  teeth  have  two  roots,  one  in  front, 


* Blainville  at  first  arranged  them  with  the  unguligrada, 
and  subsequently  with  the  gravigrada,  as  the  Elephants,  &c. 
See  Ranzani,  Elem.  di  Zoologia,  ii.  parte  iii.  p.  670, 


Dental  System. 


J'm.  I . 


, ILrli'  . Mnival,  ot  7 mvom 


l.'ifl.  in  hiuiih. 


Ju<f.  2. 


I'nihr  si(7('  rii'ii'  of tJi!"  simtc' 


Fill.  3. 


J.iuiumlin . 


THE  LAMANTIN, 


43 


the  other  behind,  at  first  simple,  but  enlarged,  and 
are  bifurcated  at  their  extremity. 

In  their  reciprocal  position,  the  eminences  on  one 
side,  correspond  to  the  grooves  and  intervals  of  the 
teeth  on  the  opposite  side,  and  to  judge  by  the  pre- 
servation of  the  crests  of  the  eminences,  it  appears 
that  these  teeth  are  used  more  for  triturating,  than 
for  crushing  or  bruising  the  food. 


• Species  1.— American  Lamantin. 


Manatus  Americanus. 


Trichecus  Manatus,  L.  Systema  Natura:. 

Manate  ou  Vache  Marine:  Dampier,  voyage  i.  46.  Sloane,  Jamaica,  ii. 

329,  La  Condamine,  voyage,  154. 

Manati  Phocce  genus,  Cius.  exot:  132.. 

Lamantin  mi  Manaty:  Du  Tebtre,  Hist.  gen.  des.  Antilles. 

Grand  Lamantin  des  Antilles,  Bute.  Hist.  Naturelle  xiii.  377,  C.  Ann, 
du  Museum  xviii.  282.  pi.  19.  Ibid.  Ossem.  Foss  iv;  Desm.  Nouv. 
Diet.  d’Hist.  Nat.  xviii.  213  pi.  G.  9. 

Manatee,  or  Sea  Coiu:  Babtbam,  Travels  in  Florida,  231. 


If  the  reader  infer  from  the  number  of  authorities 
prefixed  to  this  article,  that  the  history  of  the  spe- 
cies is  amply  or  satisfactorily  known,  he  will  fall 
into  an  error,  which  a very  little  experience  in 
books  of  travels,  or  systematic  works  of  natural 
history  would  sen^e  to  correct.  Indeed,  as  a gene- 
ral rule,  the  number  of  references  affixed,  is  in  an 
inverse  proportion  to  the  amount  of  knowledge  con- 


THE  LAMAN'ITN. 


44 

( 

cerning  the  animal  treated  of,  and  it  not  unfrequent- 
ly  happens  that  the  mere  mention  of  the  name  of  a 
species,  is  all  that  occurs  in  a book  quoted  with  all 
the  formality  of  title  and  page.  Bartram,  for  in- 
stance, who  travelled  in  the  country  where  the 
lamantin  is  most  commonly  found,  gives  the  whole 
amount  of  his  observation  in  nine  unsatisfying  lines. 
Other  observers,  who  have  enjoyed  equally  good 
opportunities,  have  contented  themselves  with  a 
mention  of  the  animal,  taking  it  for  granted  that  no 
other  information  was  desirable. 

Of  this  species  we  know  little  or  nothing,  but 
what  is  given  by  Cuvier  in  the  scientific  works 
above  quoted,  and  from  the  observations  made  by 
Du  Tertre  in  his  history  of  the  Antilles. 

The  general  figure  of  the  lamantin  is  rather  el- 
liptical and  elongated.  Its  head  is  shaped  like  a 
simple  truncated  cone,  and  terminates  in  a thick 
and  fleshy  snout,  semi-circular  at  its  extremity,  and 
pierced  at  its  upper  part,  by  two  small  semilunar  nos- 
trils, directed  forwards.  The  edge  of  the  upper 
lip  is  tumid,  furrowed  in  the  middle,  and  provided 
with  thick  and  stiff  whiskers.  The  lower  lip  is 
narrower  and  shorter  than  the  upper,  and  the  open- 
ing of  the  mouth  is  small.  The  eyes  arc  situated 
towards  the  upper  part  of  the  head,  at  the  same  dis- 
tance from  the  snout,  as  the  angle  of  the  lips.  The 
ears  are  very  small,  scarcely  perceptible,  and  plac- 
ed at  the  same  distance  from  the  eyes,  that  the  lat- 
ter are  from  the  snout. 


THE  LAMANTIN. 


45 


The  neck  is  not  distinguishable  by  any  diminu- 
tion or  difference  in  size  from  the  head  and  trunk, 
and  the  latter  does  not  diminish  except  from  the 
umbilicus,  whence  it  rapidly  decreases,  until  it 
spreads  out  and  becomes  flattened,  forming  an  ob- 
long tail  with  a broad,  thin,  and  seemingly  trun- 
cated extremity.  The  tail  forms  about  a fourth  of 
the  length  of  the  animal. 

The  arm  bones  which  sustain  the  fins  are  more 
separated  from  the  body,  than  those  of  the  Delphi- 
nus,  and  have  digits  more  distinguishable  through 
the  integuments.  The  edges  of  this  fin  have  four 
flat  and  rounded  nails,  which  do  not  extend  beyond 
the  membrane,  the  nail  of  the  thumb  being  defi- 
cient. The  skin  is  of  a gray  colour,  is  slightly 
shagreened,  and  has  upon  it  a few  scattered  hairs, 
which  are  more  numerous  than  elsewhere  about  the 
angles  of  the  lips,  and  the  palmar  surface  of  the 
fins. 

The  full  grown  lamantin  is  from  fifteen  to  twen- 
ty feet  in  length,  by  eight  in  circumference,  and 
weighs  several  thousand  pounds. 

Du  Terthe  states  that  the  sight  of  the  lamantin 
is  very  feeble,  but  this  defect  is  compensated  by 
the  extreme  acuteness  of  its  hearing.  In  these  re- 
spects it  closely  resembles  the  seal.  After  having 
satisfied  its  hunger  by  feeding  on  the  sea  grass  or 
fucus,  which  constitute  its  principal  nourishment, 
it  delights  to  sleep  upon  the  marshy  grounds  in 


46 


THK  LAMAiNTIN. 


shallow  water,  where  it  lies  with  the  snout  elevated 
above  the  water. 

When  the  lamantin  is  discovered  in  this  situa- 
tion, the  follov/ing  mode  of  securing  it,  is  resorted 
to;  three,  or  at  most,  four  persons  get  into  a canoe, 
Avhich  is  managed  by  the  man  in  the  bow,  who 
moves  his  paddle  from  right  to  left,  without  lifting 
it  from  the  water,  so  as  to  impel  the  canoe  swiftly 
and  without  noise.  The  harpooner  sits  on  a board 
placed  across  the  canoe  in  th/A  forward  part,  and  the 
third  person  is  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  boat  to 
manage  the  line  attached  to  the  end  of  the  harpoon. 

The  canoe  is  then  swiftly  paddled  tow^ards  the 
sleeping  animal,  the  men  observing  the  most  pro- 
found silence.  When  within  three  or  four  paces  of 
the  lamantin,  the  harpoon  is  suddenly  struck  into 
its  body.  The  most  violent  efforts  are  then  made 
by  the  wounded  animal,  which  leaps  up  and  springs 
forward  with  great  force,  making  the  sea  foam,  by 
the  celerity  of  its  movements.  Tired,  at  length, 
with  fruitless  efforts  to  escape,  and  weakened  by 
loss  of  blood,  the  lamantin  stops  short,  is  again 
wounded  by  other  harpoons,  and  after  a few  more 
unavailing  struggles,  yields  its  liberty  and  life  to- 
gether. 

The  female  lamantin  brings  forth  her  two  young, 
Avhich  follow  her  closely,  and  are  very  certainly 
captured,  if  the  mother  be  killed.  The  flesh  of  the 
lamantin  is  considered  an  excellent  article  of  diet, 
aiul  has,  at  former  periods,  furnished  a large  part  of 


THE  EAMANTIN. 


47 


the  subsistence  of  the  inhabitants  of  tSt.  Cliristo- 
phers,  Griiadaloupe,  and  Martinique.  This  flesh 
has  the  taste  of  veal,  but  is  more  solid,  and  covered 
in  various  parts  with  two  or  three  inches  of  fat, 
which  is  used  for  the  same  purposes  that  lard  is 
commonly  employed  for.  It  is  so  good  that  many 
persons  melt  the  fat,  and  eat  the  oil  upon  bread  in- 
stead of  butter.  When  salted,  the  flesh  of  the  la- 
mantin  loses  its  flavour  and  becomes  very  dry  and 
hard. 

The  name  of  manati,  (subsequently  changed  to 
lamantin,)  is  said  to  have  been  originally  given  to 
this  animal  by  the  Spaniards,  in  consequence  of  its 
short  anterior  extremities,  which  were  regarded  as 
hands. 


CHAPTER  V, 


Genus? — Steller;  Stellerus,  C. 


Bytina,  111.  Trichecits,  Gmel.  Manatus,  Stell. 


GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 


The  head  is  blunt,  joined  to  the  body  by  a short 
indistinct  neck,  and  has  no  external  ears;  the  eyes 
are  defended  by  a sort  of  cartilaginous  membrane 
instead  of  lids;  the  nostrils  are  situated  at  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  snout;  both  upper  and  lower  lips  are 
vertically  divided.  The  anterior  extremities  end 
in  flippers  similar  to  those  of  the  sea-turtle.  The 
caudal  fin  is  very  broad,  crescent  shaped,  and  ter- 
minates on  each  side  by  a large  point.  The  skin 
is  hairless,  but  is  defended  by  an  uncommonly  tliick 
epidermis,  composed  of  fibres  perpendicular  to  the 
true  skin.  The  stomach  is  simple;  the  intestines 
upwards  of  400  feet  in  length;  the  coecum  of  vast 
size,  and  divided  into  huge  pouches. 


Dental  System. 


THE  STELLER. 


49 


These  teeth  are  not  set  in  the  jaw  by  roots^  but 
are  affixed  by  nervous  and  vascular  connexions.^ 
The  grinding  surface  is  very  rough;  being  hollowed 
so  as  form  many  tortuous  canals. 


Species  I. — Boreal  Steller.  \ 

Stellerus  Borealis;  Desm. 

Manatus;  Stell.  Act.  Petrop.  Com.  Nov.  ii.  294. 

Trichecus  Manaius:  V.  Borealis,  Gmel. 

Whak-tailed  Manati:  Penis'.  Arct.  Zool. 

Whak-taikd  Trichecus:  Shaw.  Gem  Zool. 

Rytina  Stelkri:  Desm.  N.  Diet.  D’Hist.  Nat.  xxix.  575. 

Stellerus  Borealis:  Ibid.  Mammalogie  sp.  752,  p.  510. 

The  only  detailed  account  of  the  manners  and 
habits  of  this  singular  animal^  is  that  originally 
given  by  Steller  in  the  transactions  of  the  Imperial 
Academy  of  Sciences  of  St.  Petersburg,  in  1749. 
From  his  valuable  paper,  which  contains  numerous 
highly  interesting  observations  on  other  animals,  we 
have  translated  the  following  faithfully  observed 
facts.J 


* Resembling  in  this  respect  the  duckbill  animal  of  New 
Zealand  &c. 

t Cuvier  named  the  genus  formed  for  this  species,  in 
honour  of  Steller;  we  use  his  name  for  the  common  appella- 
tion, because  we  wish  to  avoid  confounding  this  animal  w ith 
the  Manati  by  using  Pennant’s  term. 

t This  paper  is  entitled  “ De  Bestiis  marinis  auctore 

Yol.  III.  7 


^0 


THE  ST  ELLER. 


An  nnfortmiale  accident  gave  me  an  oppoiiuuily 
of  observing  the  manners  and  liabits  of  these  ani- 
mals, daily,  before  the  door  of  our  hut.  They  de- 
light in  the  shallow  sandy  places,  near  the  shores 
of  the  sea,  and  are  very  fond  of  frequenting  the 
mouths  of  brooks  and  little  rivers,  being  allured  by 
the  sweetness  of  the  running  water;  they  always  go 
in  troops,  the  half  grown  and  young  occupy  the 
front  in  feeding,  but  are  solicitously  enclosed  on 
the  flanks  and  rear,  so  as  to  be  always  kept  in  the 
midst  of  the  troop.  When  the  tide  is  high,  they 
come  so  close  to  the  shore,  that  I have  not  only  fre- 
quently touched  them  with  a staff  or  lance,  but  have 
placed  my  hand  upon  their  backs.  If  struck  with 
some  force,  they  did  nothing  more  than  move  a lit- 
tle farther  off,  and  in  a short  time  forgetting  the  in- 
jury, they  would  return.  Entire  families  common- 
ly live  together,  a male  with  a single  female,  and  a 
small  quite  young  cub.  They  appeared  to  me  to 
be  monogamous,  bringing  forth  at  any  time  of  the 
year,  but  most  generally  in  the  autumn,  as  I should 
judge  from  the  young  about  that  time;  hence  as  I 
have  observed  them,  most  especially  to  couple  in 
the  spring.  I have  concluded,  that  they  bear  their 
young  for  more  than  a year,  and  do  not  bring  forth 
but  one  cub  at  a birth.  I never  observed  more  than 
one  cub  in  company  with  the  mother. 


Georgio  Wilhelmo^  Stellero.”  Vide  Nov.  Comm.  Acad. 
Scien.  Imper.  Petropolitance,  tom.  2,  p.  289,  294,  et  seq. 


THE  STELLER. 


51 


These  most  voracious  animals  are  almost  inces- 
santly feeding,  and  on  account  of  this  greediness, 
have  their  heads  nearly  always  under  water,  being 
very  little  solicitous  concerning  life  and  safety.  A 
boat  or  a man  may  go  into  the  midst  of  a troop,  and 
one  may  be  selected  and  secured  by  a hook  with- 
out difficulty.  All  this  must  be  done  while  they 
are  feeding,  as  at  the  end  of  every  four  or  five 
minutes,  they  raise  their  nostrils  above  water,  and 
blow  out  the  air  with  a small  quantity  of  water, 
making  a noise  like  the  snorting  of  a horse.  While 
grazing,  they  move  slowly  forwards,  one  foot  after 
the  other,  and  thus  in  part  placidly  swim,  and 
partly  walk,  like  oxen  or  sheep  browsing.  The 
half  of  the  body,  that  is,  the  back  and  sides,  always 
project  above  the  water  while  they  are  feeding,  and 
the  gulls  alight  thereon  for  the  purpose  of  picking 
up  the  parasite  animals  with  which  their  hides  are 
much  infested,  just  as  the  ravens  alight  on  the 
backs  of  hogs  to  catch  their  lice. 

They  do  not  devour  all  the  sea- weeds  iudififer- 
ently,  but  chiefly  two  or  three  species  of  Fucus  or 
Kelp,  of  which,  when  these  animals  have  remained 
a day  or  so  in  one  vicinity,  large  heaps  of  the  roots 
and  stalks  are  thrown  ashore  by  the  waves.  Hav- 
ing gorged  themselves  fully,  some  of  them  sleep 
upon  their  backs,  at  some  distance  from  the  shore, 
lest  they  be  left  aground  by  the  tide.  They 
are  frequently  killed  by  the  floatijig  ice  in  winter, 
which  especially  occurs  if  the  waves  are  blown 


5S  r»E  STELliE^. 

forcibly  upon  the  rocks,  among  which  these  beasts 
are  entangled  and  killed.  In  the  winter  they  be- 
come so  thin,  that  in  addition  to  the  back  bones,  all 
the  ribs  may  be  counted  through  the  skin.* 

They  are  caught  with  a large  iron  hook,  whose 
extremity  resembles  the  fluke  of  an  anchor;  the  other 
end  has  a ring  to  which  a strong  rope  is  secured.  A 
strong  man  takes  this  hook,  and  in  company  with 
four  or  five  others  goes  into  a boat,  which  is  slowly 
rowed  towards  the  herd.  The  bearer  of  the  hook 
stands  in  the  prow  of  the  boat,  and  as  soon  as  he  comes 
near  enough,  strikes  it  into  one  of  the  animals. 
Thirty  or  more  persons  on  shore  then  get  hold  of 
the  rope  and  drag  the  struggling  victim  towards  the 
land.  Those  in  the  boat  make  themselves  fast  to 
the  beast  with  another  rope;  and  so  fatigue  it  by 
repeated  blows,  until  it  becomes  quiet,  and  then  is 
despatched  by  spears,  knives,  and  other  weapons, 
and  drawn  on  shore.  Some  cut  huge  pieces  out  of 
the  living  animal,  which  only  provoked  it  to  vibrate 
its  tail,  and  struggle  with  its  fore  limbs  so  violent- 


**  “ Vernali  tempore  more  humane  coeunt,  ac  prascipue 
circa  vesperam  tranquillo  marij  antequam  vero  congrediun- 
tur  prseludia  multa  venerea  pr^mittunt;  foemella  placide 
natat  hinc  et  inde  in  mari,  mas  vero  semper  sequitur;  hunc 
fcemella  tarn  diu  multis  gyrps  et  meandris  eludit,  donee 
TOorae  ulterioris  ipsa  inpatiens,  velut  delassata  ac  coacta,  se 
in  dorsum  resupinet,  quo  facto  mas  furiose  superveniens 
libidinis  tributum  solvit,  ac  arnbo  in  mutuos  amplexus  ru- 
unt.”  Steller  ut  supra. 


THE  STELLER. 


53 


ly,  as  to  cause  large  pieces  of  the  cuticle  to  fly  off; 
it  breathed  strongly,  and  as  if  sighing.  When 
wounded  in  the  back,  the  blood  spirts  as  high 
as  if  from  a fountain;  but  this  did  not  occur  as  long 
as  the  head  was  retained  under  water,  but  as  soon 
as  it  was  raised  for  the  purpose  of  breathing,  the 
blood-  gushed  forth,  because  the  lungs,  lying  next 
the  back,  being  wounded,  whenever  the  air  was  in- 
haled, it  forced  out  the  blood  more  freely. 

When  one  of  these  animals  is  hooked,  he  begins 
to  move  more  impetuously,  whereupon  the  herd  and 
those  which  are  near  are  set  in  motion,  and  endeavour 
to  assist  the  captive.  Some  of  them  strive  to  upset 
the  boat,  others  endeavour  to  break  the  rope,  or  by 
blows  with  their  tails,  try  to  disengage  the  hook, 
which  they  sometimes  successfully  accomplish.  It 
is  a very  curious  trait  in  their  character,  that  their 
conjugal  love  is  exceedingly  great:  when  the  male 
is  hooked,  the  female,  after  having  in  vain  struggled 
to  set  him  free,  and  been  herself  struck  frequently, 
would  nevertheless  follow  her  companion  to  the 
shore,  and  would  sometimes  unexpectedly  approach 
the  dead  body,  by  darting  forwards  like  an  arrow. 
One  morning,  when  we  came  down  very  early  to 
cut  up  the  flesh  and  carry  it  home,  we  found  the 
male  near  the  body  of  his  mate,  and  he  remained 
near,  even  until  the  third  day  afterwards,  when  I 
went  down  to  the  shore  alone,  for  the  purpose  of 
cleaning  some  of  the  intestines. 


THE  STELLER. 


d-1 

This  animal  has  no  voice,  nor  utters  any  sound, 
merely  breathing  forcibly,  and  when  wounded,  as  if 
by  sighs.  Its  organs  of  sight  and  hearing  are  of 
slight  power,  as  they  are  almost  always  submerged 
and  appear  to  be  little  employed. 

We  have  stated  in  the  specific  description,  as 
well  as  the  generic  characters,  the  peculiar  structure 
of  the  skin  of  the  steller.  It  will  perhaps  be  still 
more  satisfactory  to  the  reader  to  have  the  more  de- 
tailed description  of  it  from  the  original  observer, 
whose  statement  we  subjoin. 

The  hide  of  this  animal  is  black,  rough,  wrinkled, 
knotty,  hard,  tough,  and  destitute  of  hair,  the  epi- 
dermis being  an  inch  thick,  and  scarcely  to  be 
penetrated  by  an  axe  or  an  iron  hook.  When  cut 
transversely,  this  cuticle  resembles  ebony,  both  in 
polish  and  colour.  The  skin  is  smooth  on  the  back; 
from  the  neck,  to  the  tail  fin,  it  has  nothing  but  su- 
perficial circular  wrinkles:  the  sides,  however,  are 
exceedingly  knotty,  having  many  prominent  ace- 
tabula,  especially  about  the  head,  bearing  an  un- 
pleasant resemblance  to  mushrooms. 

The  cuticle  above  described,  is  like  a crust  sur- 
rounding the  body,  and  appears  to  be  composed  of 
mere  tubes.  These  tubes  are  placed  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  true  skin,  and  may  be  separated  from 
each  other  in  their  length.  The  inferior  part  of 
each  tube  which  is  implanted  in  the  skin,  is  round- 
ed, convex  and  bulbous;  hence,  a portion  of  cuticle 
torn  off,  appears  tuberculous  like  Spanish  hide, 
while  the  subjacent  skin  presents  the  appearance  of 


THE  STELLER. 


5.^ 


numerous  little  pits,  which  the  cuticular  bulbs  had 
occupied.  As  these  tubuli  lie  very  closely  together, 
are  tough,  moist  and  tumid,  when  the  skin  is  cut 
horizontally  they  do  not  appear,  but  present  a 
smooth  surface  like  the  pared  hoof  of  an  animal; 
if  pieces  be  dried  in  the  sun,  they  crack  perpendicu- 
larly and  may  be  broken  like  bark,  at  wiiich  time, 
this  tubular  structure,  is  perfectly  obvious.  Through 
these  tubes  a mucous  matter  flows,  especially  upon 
the  sides,  and  about  the  head,  and  in  smaller  quan- 
tities upon  the  back.  When  this  beast  lies  upon 
the  shore  for  some  hours,  the  back  becomes  dry,  but 
the  head  and  sides  remain  moist.  The  use  of  this 
singular  cutiole  appears  to  be,  1st.  to.  preserve  them 
from  being  destroyed  by  being  thrown  against  the 
ice  in  winter,  or  the  rocks  at  all  times,  and  Sdly, 
that  the  vital  heat  may  not  be  too  much  dissipated 
in  summer,  by  excessive  transpiration,  or  altogether 
extinguished  by  the  cold  of  winter.  They  do  not, 
like  other  animals  and  fish,  retreat  to  the  depths  of 
the  sea,  but  always  expose  half  of  their  bodies  to 
the  air,  while  feeding. 

The  cuticle  about  the  head,  eyes,  ears,  and 
mammae,  and  under  the  arms,  wherever  it  is  knotty, 
is  attacked  and  infested  by  insects.  It  often  hap- 
pens that  they  perforate  the  cuticle  and  wound  the 
true  skin,  in  which  case,  large  and  thick  warts  ai  e 
formed. 

The  true  skin  is  about  the  sixth  of  an  inch  thick, 
is  soft,  white,  very  strong,  and  similar  to  the  skin  of 
the  whale. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Family  II.' — -GETiE;  Piscivorous  Cetaceous 
Animals. 

This  family  is  distinguished  from  the  preceding, 
by  the  construction  which  has  procured  for  all  its 
members  the  name  of  blowers,  in  reference  to  the 
manner  in  which  they  expel  the  water  taken  in 
along  with  their  food  from  the  nasal  openings.  The 
membrane  lining  the  nostrils  being  thus  continually- 
exposed  to  torrents  of  salt  water,  has  very  little,  if 
any  sensibility  as  an  organ  of  smelling. 

They  have  a pyramidal  larynx,  or  windpipe, 
which  is  extended  to  the  posterior  opening  of  the 
nostrils,  through  which  the  air  is  admitted  to  the 
lungs  without  requiring  the  head  and  mouth  to  be 
raised  above  the  water.  Their  glottis  is  altogether 
plain,  and  their  vpice  is  reduced  to  a simple  bellow- 
ing. The  body  is  destitute  of  hair,  but  is  covered 
by  a thick,  smooth  skin,  beneath  which  is  a great 
thicktiess  of  strong  cellular  substance  containing  a 
large  quantity  of  oil. 

The  teats  are  situated  near  the  anus;  the  fins  are 
of  no  use  except  in  swimming.  Two  small  bones 


DOLPHIN  PROPER. 


situated  in  the  flesh  near  the  extremity  of  the  diges- 
tive canalj  are  the  only  vestiges  of  inferior  extremi- 
ties. Some  have  a dorsal  fin,  which  is  tendinous 
and  not  connected  with  the  skeleton. 

Some  of  these  animals  have  conical  teeth,  all  of 
the  same  sort,  arranged  along  the  edges  of  the  jaws; 
others  have  only  horny  layers,  projecting  from  the 
roof  of  the  mouth,  well  known  by  the  name  of  ba- 
leen, though  generally  and  inaccurately  called 
whalebone. 

The  eyes,  which  are  flat  anteriorly,  have  a very 
thick  and  solid  sclerotica  or  external  coat.  The 
tongue  is  covered  by  soft  and  thick  integument. 
The  stomach  has  from  five  to.  seven  distinct  pouch- 
es, and  instead  of  one  spleen,  there  are  several, 
which  are  small  and  lobular. 


Tribe  I. — Delphinus;  L.  Dolphin  Proper;  C. 

Having  teeth  in  both  jaws,  always  simple  and 
almost  always  conical.  Tliey  have  the  mouth  form- 
ed in  advance  of  the  head,  by  a sort  of  beak,  small- 
er than  the  rest  of  the  head.  They  are  destitute 
of  Goecum. 


VoL.  HI. 


■8 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Section  I, — Size  of  the  head  bearing  the  ordinary 
jjroportion  to  that  of  the  body. 

Genus? — Dolphin;  Delphiniis;  L. 

GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 

The  form  of  the  head  is  very  various;  there  is 
but  one,  semilunar,  external  orifice  to  the  nostrils, 
which  is  situated  upon  the  crown  of  the  head;  the 
trunk  of  the  body  is  elongated;  the  tail  fin  is  large, 
bifurcated  and  horizontal. 

Dental  System. 

The  teeth  of  the  pisciverous  cet®  scarcely  differ 
from  each  other,  except  in  number,  all  appearing 
to  have  the  same  form.  They  are  conical  and 
slightly  hooked;  only  the  larger  species  have  larger 
teeth  than  the  smaller,  and  when  their  series  are 
numerous,  the  anterior  and  posterior  are  smaller 
than  those  in  the  middle.  None  of  them  have  the 
alveolar  processes  divided,  nor  multiplex  roots;  the 
dental  capsule  remains  for  a long  time  free  at  the 
base;  but  these  teeth  are  not  always  growing,  as  the 


THK  TRUE  DOLPHIX.  * 59 

capsule  is  eventually  obliterated.  Then  another 
event  occurs;  ossification  of  the  jaws  takes  place 
within  the  alveoles,  and  as  the  teeth  are  not  opposed 
to  each  other,  and  no  force  retains  them  in  their 
places,  they  are  soon  thrust  out  and  disappear.  This 
explains  the  very  variable  number  of  teeth  we  find 
in  dolphins  of  the  same  species,  and  still  more  so 
in  those  of  different  species.  Thus,  not  having  ob- 
served between  the  teeth  of  dolphins  any  essential 
difference  of  form,  and  their  differences  of  number 
not  being  determinate,  we  liave  nothing  but  the 
form  of  their  heads  from  which  to  establish  the 
generic  differences. 


Species  I. — The  true  Dolphin.* 

Delphinus  Delphis;  L. 

Le  Dauphin;  Bois-jrATERHE;  Cetol.  20,  pi.  x,  fig;.  2. 

Dauphin  Vulgaire;  Desm.  Mammal,  sp.  "58,  p.  514, 

\Called  Grampus,  Porpess,  Herrmghog,  Dolphin.} 

Hitherto  the  subjects  of  our  study  have  been 
inhabitants  of  grassy  plains,  or  shady  forests;  the 
margins  of  gentle  streams,  or  the  outlets  of  mighty 


* We  call  this  the  true  Dolphin  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
fish  called  dolphin  by  sailors,  (the  coryphana  purpuris)  and 
because  this  species  is  the  dolphin  so  celebrated  in  various 
ancient  poems  and  fables,  to  which  Ave  shall  hereafter  refer. 


60 


THE  TRUE  DOLPHIN. 


rivers:  we  now  tuin  our  attention  to  creatures  whose 
most  congenial  dwelling  is  in  the  bosom  of  the 
ocean. 

So  admirably  are  the  beings,  of  which  we  are 
now  to  treat,  adapted  to  an  aquatic  life,  that  they 
present  a similarity  of  appearance  to,  and  are  most 
commonly  confounded  with  fish,  though  this  resem- 
blance extends  no  farther  than  to  the  general  figure 
of  their  bodies,  and  the  modification  of  structure 
which  fits  their  extremities  for  swimming.  Lan- 
guage can  scarcely  convey  an  idea  of  the  velocity 
with  which  they  dart  through  the  water,  seeming 
rather  to  fly  than  to  swim;  resembling  an  arrow  im- 
pelled by  a powerful  bow,  barely  long  enough  in 
sight  to  allow  a conviction  of  its  having  passed. 
Of  their  wonderful  celerity  of  movement,  and  re- 
markably playful  disposition,  we  have  recently  en- 
joyed many  excellent  opportunities  of  observation. 
Once  in  particular,  on  a beautifully  clear  day,  when 
the  sea  was  so  strongly  illuminated  by  the  sun  as  to 
render  objects  visible  at  almost  any  depth,  and  our 
vessel  was  sailing  swiftly  before  a strong  breeze,  se- 
veral of  these  animals  appeared  to  vie  with  each  other 
in  showing  how  poor  was  her  speed,  compared  with 
their  own.  As  the  little  troop  were  merrily  gamboling 
at  a short  distance  from  the  vessel’s  side,  one  of  the 
number  would  dart  immediately  in  advance  of  her 
bow,  and  swimming  with  his  utmost  velocity,  would 
disappear  in  a straight  line  before  her,  and  (as  the 
depth  at  which  he  swam  was  not  more  than  three 


THE  TRUE  DOLPHIN. 


61 


feet,)  would  in  a minute  or  two  be  seen  returniug  to 
the  crew  of  his  comrades,  as  if  iu  triumph.  This 
was  repeated  many  times,  and  most  probably  by 
different  individuals.  These  dolphins  accompanied 
us  for  a considerable  distance,  and  all  their  actions 
appeared  indicative  of  the  most  playful  and  frolic- 
some disposition.^ 

They  frequently,  however,  are  seen  sailing  along 
with  a slow  and  measured  motion,  just  appearing 
at  the  surface,  by  elevating  the  crown  of  the  head 
and  then  diving  short,  so  as  to  make  their  bodies 
describe  the  arch  of  a small  circle,  exposing  them- 
selves to  view  only  from  the  crown  of  the  head,  to 
a short  distance  behind  the  dorsal  fin.  Occasionally 


* “ On  the  20th  of  October,  1763,  a hundred  of  these  ani- 
mals approached  within  pistol  shot  of  our  vessel,  and  ap- 
peared to  have  come  expressly  for  our  diversion.  They 
made  singular  bounds  into  the  air;  several  of  them  in  their 
caperings  leaped  three  or  four  feet  above  the  water,  and  turned 
over  and  over  several  times,  like  professed  tumblers.  They 
go  almost  always  in  troops,  and  swim  as  if  arranged  in  bat- 
tle array;  they  appear  to  move  in  search  of  the  wind.  We 
have  always  remarked  that  they  swim  towards  the  point 
whence  the  wind  arises.”  Dom.  Pernethy,  Hist,  d’un  voyage 
aux  lies  Malouines,  i.  p.  97,  See. 

“ I have  seen  one  playing  around  the  vessel  while  she  was 
going  at  the  rate  of  two  leagues  an  hour:  the  sailors  said 
that  it  foretold  a squall;  in  fact,  one  came  on  at  midnight.” 
St,  Pierre^  voyage  a File  de  France,  p.  52. 

In  the  instance  above  mentioned,  witnessed  by  the  author, 
the  vessel  was  moving  at  the  rate  of  eight  miles  an  hour. 


6a 


THE  TRUE  DOLPHIN. 


a troop  ol'  them  may  be  seen  scudding  along,  rising 
in  this  manner  in  quick  succession,  as  if  anxious 
each  to  get  in  advance  of  the  other:  while  again,  a 
single  individual  may  be  observed  successively  ris- 
ing and  falling  in  the  same  way,  as  if  engaged  in 
the  act  of  catching  a prey. 

In  this  way,  shoals  of  dolphins  may  be  seen  al- 
most every  day,  and  at  any  hour  feeding  or  sport- 
ing in  the  bay  and  rivers  near  the  city  of  New 
York,  where  we  have  sometimes  enjoyed  an  oppor- 
tunity of  observing  from  the  wharf,  a large  shoal  of 
them  moving  down  the  Hudson  river  with  the  tide. 
Some  plunging  along  as  if  in  haste,  others  appa- 
rently at  play,  and  others  very  slowing  rising  to  the 
surface  for  breath,  and  as  gradually  disappearing, 
allowing  their  dorsal  fin  to  remain  for  a considerable 
time  above  the  surface. 

From  the  month  of  May  until  towards  the  end 
of  Autumn,  the  true  dolphins  frequent  the  bays  and 
salt-water  rivers  of  our  country,  in  great  numbers. 
They  are  most  numerous,  and  are  best  observed, 
during  the  run  of  the  herring  and  shad,  upon  which 
they  doubtless  feast  abundantly;  they  appear  gra- 
dually to  diminish  in  number,  as  these  fish  retire 
from  the  rivers  and  coast,  though  a small  party  may 
be  occasionally  seen  very  late  in  the  season. 

During  the  month  of  June,  the  actions  of  this  ani* 
mal  appeared  very  different  from  what  we  have  no- 
ticed at  any  other  time.  They  swam  in  pairs,  re- 
mained for  a longer  time  at  the  surface,  and  seemed 


THE  TRUE  DOLPHIN. 


63 


to  be  borne  along  by  the  tide  rather  than  urged  for- 
wards by  their  own,  volition.  They  moved  in  half 
circles,  lying  rather  upon  their  sides,  and  occa- 
sionally lashing  the  water  into  foam  with  their  tails 
— then  both  disappearing,  one  in  a few  seconds 
would  rise  at  a little  distance  as  if  pursued — make 
a short  leap  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  on 
falling,  again  commence  the  same  kind  of  semicircu- 
lar movement  above  described,  accompanied  by  the 
other.  .We  never  observed  them  to  show  the  beau- 
ful  inferior  surface  of  their  bodies  at  any  other  peri- 
od, or  to  raise  the  tail  fin  above  the  water.  But  at 
this  season,  the  whole  inferior  surface  of  the  body 
on  one  side  was  frequently  visible,  and  the  tail  occa- 
sionally whirled  in  air,  and  brought  down  with 
great  force. 

We  wmuld  have  inferred  that  these  movements 
belonged  to  their  ordinary  gambols,  was  it  not  for 
the  fact  that  they  all  appeared  to  be  paired  off,  and 
almost  all  the  pairs  seen  at  this  time  w’ere  similarly 
occupied.  With  the  exception  of  a lapse  of  about 
three  weeks  in  the  month  above  mentioned,  we 
have  never  observed  them  to  act  in  the  same  man- 
ner. During  the  period  referred  to,  we  spent  a part 
of  every  day  in  observing  them,  and  have  repeated- 
ly been  within  eight  or  ten  feet  of  the  spot  where 
they  were  sporting.  Occasionally  we  have  watch- 
ed them  for  hours,  until  the  force  of  the  tide  swept 
them  far  beyond  our  view. 


04 


THE  TRUE  DOLPHIN. 


The  appearance  of  a shoal  of  these  animals,  at 
sea,  moving  in  the  same  direction,  is  considered  by 
experienced  mariners  as  an  indication  of  an  approach-: 
ing  storm,  which  very  certainly  follows  their  appear- 
ance. Falconer,  in  his  beautiful  poem  of  the  Shipr 
Avreck,  thus  describes  such  a circumstance: 

“ Now  to  the  north  fi’om  burning  Afric’s  shore, 

A troop  of  porpoises  their  course  explore; 

In  curling  wreaths  they  gambol  on  the  tide, 

Now  bound  aloft,  now  down  the  billow  glide; 

Their  tracks  awhile  the  hoary  waves  retain 
That  burn  in  sparkling  trails  along  the  main — 

These  fleetest  coursers  of  the  finny  race, 

When  threatening  clouds  th’  ethereal  vault  deface, 

Their  route  to  leeward  still  sagacious  form, 

To  shun  the  fury  of  the  approaching  storm.” 

Canto  II.  § II. 

Relative  to  the  breeding  season  of  the  dolphin, 
we  have  no  information  sufficiently  exact  to  be  re- 
lied on.  We  have  seen  them  in  Long  Island  Sound 
during  the  month  of  August,  and  the  first  part  of 
September,  accompanied  by  suckers,  varying  in  size, 
and  from  eighteen  inches  to  two  feet  or  more  in 
length.  In  swimming,  or  rather  in  plunging,  as 
heretofore  described,  the  sucker  apparently  rested 
on  the  lateral  or  humeral  fin  of  the  parent,  as  it  al- 
ways was  seen  as  if  adhering  to  the  same  place  by 
the  side  of  the  parent,  in  all  the  movements  made 
in  ascending  or  descending. 


THE  TRUE  DOLPHIN. 


65 


A full  grown  dolphin  measures  about  six  feet  six 
inches  in  length,  from  the  tip  of  the  mouth  to  the 
end  of  the  tail,  and  from  the  end  of  the  beak  to  the 
angles  of  the  mouth  the  distance  is  ten  and  a half 
inches;  and  measuring  from  the  same  point  to  the 
breathing-hole,  thirteen  inches.  The  eyes  are 
placed  almost  precisely  on  the  same  line  with  the 
angle  of  the  mouth,  and  are  ten  and  a half  inches 
distant  from  each  other.  The  lateral  or  humeral 
fins  are  nine  and  a half  inches  long,  and  four  broad. 
The  dorsal  fin,  measured  along  its  anterior  edge,  is 
ten  inches  high;  measured  along  its  base  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  back,  it  is  eight  inches.  The  tail, 
measured  at  the  extremity  of  its  two  lobes,  is  four- 
teen inches  broad. 

The  body  of  the  true  dolphin  is  nearly  oval,  hav- 
ing the  dorsal  fiii  to  curve  backwards  at  its  summit: 
the  beak  being  flattened  and  pointed,  and  contain- 
ing in  both  jaws  a range  of  rounded,  rather  pointed 
teeth,  which  project  from  the  sockets  about  three 
twelfths  of  an  inch.  These  teeth  nre  all  arranged 
so  as  to  interlock;  and  appear  to  vary  according  to 
the  sex  and  age  of  the  animal. The  head  of  this 
animal  does  not  project  over  the  beak,  but  is  gra- 
dually enlarged  backwards  until  in  a line  with  the 
back.  The  line  from  the  under  surface  of  the 
lower  jaw,  is  continued  with  very  little  change  of 


*From  84  to  95  upper,  from  84  to  95  lower  teeth,  all  of 
which  are  regarded  as  molars. 

VoL.  III.— =9 


66 


Tllb  rUUE  UOLPJIIN. 


direction  till  opposite  the  dorsal  fioj  where  the  body 
is  tliickesL  From  a hand’s  breadth  or  more  behind 
the  dorsal  lin,  the  body  rapidly  diminishes  to  the 
tail,  and  on  the  lower  surface,  the  same  rapid  di- 
minution takes  place  from  beyond  the  anus.  The 
tail  is  composed  of  two  strong  lobes  terminating  in 
points,  which  give  a beautiful  crescent  shape,  to 
the  extremity  of  this  powerful  instrument  for 
swimming. 

In  examining  the  anatomical  details  of  this  ani- 
mal, one  can  not  fail  to  be  struck  with  the  singular 
appearance  of  the  bones  forming  the  lateral  fins. 
We  find  a shoulder  blade,  an  arm  bone,  bones  of 
the  forearm,  wrist  and  fingers,  all  so  modified  as, 
when  covered  by  the  skin,  to  resemble  nothing  so 
much  as  a fin,  yet  so  obviously  analogous  to  the 
same  bones  in  the  human  subject,  or  in  other  ani- 
mals, as  to  be  recognised  almost  at  a glance.  The 
construction  of  the  blow-hole,  or  breathing  ap- 
paratus, is  also  well  worthy  the  peculiar  attention 
of  the  observer  who  may  have  an  opportunity  of 
examination,  on  account  of  its  remarkable  excel- 
lence of  adaptation,  and  the  delicacy  of  its  con- 
struction. 

The  colour  of  the  true  dolphin,  is  of  a black  or 
blackish  green  on  the  upper  surface,  and  on  the 
inferior  parts,  of  a light  gray  or  whitish.  There  is 
below  the  eye,  on  each  side,  a whitish  ray  or  blaze 
extending  towards  the  humeral  fins. 


GLADIATOR  DOLPHIN. 


07 


Species  W.— Gladiator  DolpJiio. 


Delphinus  Gladiator. 


Sckwerdt  Jisch:  Andekson,  Island,  p.  155. 

Poisson  d Sahre;  Pages  voyage  au  Pole  nord,  ii.  p.  142. 

Delphinus  dorsi  pinna  altissima,  & Muieer,  Zool.  Dan.  Prod.  p. 

8.  n.  57. 

Delphinus  Maxim/us:  Olafsen,  Voy.  en  Islande. 

Dauphin  Epee  deMer:  Bonwat.  Cetol,  sp.  5.  p.  23. 

Dauphin  Gladiateur:  Lacep.  Hist.  Nat.  des  Cetaces,  302.  pi.  5,  fig.  3. 
Dauphin  Espadon:  Desm.  Mammal,  sp.  773.  p.  517. 

This  dolphin  was  first  described  by  Anderson  in 
the  work  above  quoted,  and  we  liave  very  little 
knowledge  of  it,  except  what  is  derived  from  him. 
The  head  of  the  gladiator  is  not  highly  arched 
above,  but  is  gradually  tapering  towards  the  snout, 
which  is  short  and  as  if  truncated.  Its  mouth  is 
furnished  with  small  pointed  teeth.  Its  most  re- 
markable characteristic  is  a dorsal  fin,  which  is 
three  or  four  feet  Iiigh,  by  eighteen  inches  wide  at 
its  base,  slender  towards  its  summit,  and  recurved 
towards  the  tail.  Mariners  believe  that  this  fin  is 
employed  by  this  dolphin  in  attacking  the  whale: 
but  Anderson  states  “ that  it  is  rather  the  mouth  of 
the  animal  that  is  dangerous.  As  they  commonly 
swim  in  small  troops,  they  attack  the  whale  in  a 
body,  and  tear  off  great  pieces  of  his  flesh,  until 
becoming  excited  to  a certain  degree,  he  thrusts  out 
his  tongue,  when  they  immediately  fasten  on  this 


68 


GLADIATOR  DOLPHIN. 


organ  and  devour  it,  and  finally,  gaining  access  to  liis 
mouth,  they  destroy  the  life  of  the  animal.”  Bonna- 
terre  remarks,  that  the  same  author  thinks  with 
reason  that  the  cetaceous  animals  called  Millers,  on 
the  coasts  of  New  England,  are  of  this  species.  In 
fact,  they  have  both  jaws  furnished  with  teeth  which 
interlock,  have  on  their  backs  a fin  four  or  five  feet 
high;  swim  in  troops,  and  attack  in  a body  young 
whales,  just  as  a pack  of  dogs  attack  a bull.  Some 
seize  the  whale  by  the  tail  to  prevent  him  from 
using  this  weapon  of  defence,  while  the  others  at- 
tack and  bite  him  about  the  head,  until  the  un- 
wieldy creature  becomes  fatigued,  and  thrusts  forth 
the  tongue  as  already  stated. 

The  gladiator  dolphin  is  found  on  the  coasts  of 
Spitzbergen,  in  Davis’s  straits,  and  on  the  New 
England  coasts.  The  Chevalier  Pages,  on  his  voy- 
age towards  the  north  pole,  found  them  about  the 
79th  degree  of  latitude.  The  sabre-fish,”  says 
he,  are  also  found  among  the  ice,  but  they  rarely 
quit  the  frozen  climate  near  the  pole.  They  are 
from  twenty-three  to  twenty-five  feet  long;  they  are 
black,  and  carry  their  sabre  perpendicularly  upon 
the  back;  this  sabre  is  curved  backwards,  and  is 
about  four  feet  long.  I have  seen  whales  fly  from 
them  with  the  utmost  celerity,  and  I have  seen 
others  deeply  scarred  by  the  weapon  of  this  war- 
like animal.”^ 


* Op,  cit.  apud  Bonnaterre  Cetologie  ut  supra. 


THE  SEA-SWINE. 


69 


Species  III. — The  Sea-swine, 

Delphinus  Phocoenaj  L. 

Delphinus  Phocoena:  Bniss.  Eegne  An.  371,  No.  2. 

Dauphin  Marsoiiin;  Lacep.  Get.  284,  pi.  13,  fig.  2. 

Dauphin  Mar souin;  Bonnaterbe,  C^tol,  p.  18,  sp.  1. 

\Called  hy  the  English 'Porous:  hy  the  Dutch  Bruinvisch; 
in  German  Meerschwein;  hy  the  French  Marsouin.] 

We  give  an  account  of  this  species  in  this  place, 
because  authors  are  in  the  habit  of  ranking  it  among 
those  which  frequent  our  coasts.  But  we  have  not 
been  able  at  any  time  to  learn  that  the  sea-swine 
has  been  seen  in  our  waters,  or  that  any  other  spe- 
cies than  those  already  mentioned  are  known  to  our 
fishermen.  The  dolphin  first  described,  or  true 
dolphin,  is  the  species  universally  known  by  the 
name  of  porpus^  in  this  country,  and  is  at  once  dis- 
tinguishable from  the  European  porpus,  or  sea- 
swine,  by  its  elongated  flattened  beak;  the  latter 
having  a blunt  snout,  without  any  beak.  If  it  ever 
is  seen  on  our  coasts,  it  must  be  very  rare,  as  we 
have  been  thus  far  unable  to  find  any  one  who  has 
seen  it,  except  in  the  seas  bordering  the  shores  of 
Europe.  We  therefore  introduce  the  description  of 


* Porpus  is  a corruption  of  pore-poisso?i,  as  the  French 
marsouin  is  of  the  German  meerschivein. 


70 


THE  SEA-SWINE. 


the,  species  from  Bomiaterre,  in  order  lliat  those 
who  Jiavc  opportunities  of  observation,  may  he  able 
to  compare  the  animals  and  settle  the  question. 

The  body  of  the  sea-swine  is  conical,  having  a tri- 
angular liu  on  the  back.  The  snout  is  pointed,  and 
the  teeth  rounded,  trenchant,  and  enlarged  at  their 
summits.  The  body  of  this  animal  is  round,  thick, 
and  tapering  towards  the  tail.  The  head  represents 
an  obtuse  cone,  which  is  much  arched  above  the  orbits 
of  the  eyes:  it  thence  gradually  tapers  down  to  the 
snout.  The  eyes  are  situated  opposite  the  opening 
of  the  mouth:  the  pupil  is  black,  surrounded  with  a 
white  iris.  Both  jaws  are  nearly  of  the  same 
length;  the  lower  one  being  armed  on  each  side 
with  a range  of  small  teeth,  which  are  slender  at 
the  base,  flattened,  trenchant,  and  rounded  at  the 
summit;  varying  in  number  from  fifty  to  fifty. five. 
Behind  the  eye  is  a small  round  hole,  an  inch  in 
diameter;  this  is  the  ear.  The  blow-hole  is  situated 
upon  the  summit  of  the  head,  in  the  centre  of  the 
interval  between  the  eyes  and  angle  of  the  mouth. 
The  nostrils  are  placed  between  the  blow-holes 
and  the  extremity  of  the  muzzle.  Tlie  lateral  fins 
are  placed  upon  the  borders  of  the  lower  surface  of 
the  body:  the  dorsal  fin  occupies  the  middle  of  the 
back.  Behind  this  fin  the  back  is  flattened  anu 
raised  in  the  middle  by  a projection  which  extends 
entirely  to  the  caudal  fin.  On  the  part  of  the 
l)elly  corresponding  to  the  dorsal  fin,  there  is  a de- 
pression which  conceals  the  sexual  organs.  The 


THE  SEA-SWINE. 


71 


vent  is  equi- distant  from  the  <Iepiessioii  and  the 
caudal  fill.  The  caudal  fill  is  formed  of  two  lobes 
roimded  at  the  points^  and  slightly  grooved.  The 
colour  of  the  whole  superior  surface  is  of  a black- 
ish blue:  the  belly  whitish.  The  length  from  six 
to  eight  feet. 

This  animal,  which  is  considered  an  excellent 
swimmer,  habitually  carries  the  head  and  tail  curv- 
ed downwards,  and  in  consequence,  shows  nothing 
but  the  back  when  it  comes  to  the  surface  to  breathe; 
but  as  soon  as  it  is  dead,  it  extends  itself  in  a 
straight  line.  They  feed  on  small  fish,  which  they 
pursue  with  inconceivable  swiftness.  The  sea- 
swine  are  almost  always  seen  in  troops,  especially 
in  their  sexual  season,  which  is  in  the  month  of 
August.  It  is  then  common  to  see  ten  or  fifteen 
males  in  pursuit  of  a single  female,  and  they  press 
on  with  so  much  ardour,  that  they  are  often  strand- 
ed on  the  beach  before  they  are  aware  of  their 
situation.  The  young  are  carried  ten  months;  only 
one  is  brought  forth  at  a time.  An  embrion,  extract- 
ed from  the  mother  by  Klein,  w^as  about  twenty- 
one  inches  long.  The  young  one  constantly  fol- 
lows the  mother  until  weaned. 

The  flesh  of  this  animal  is  oily  and  disagreeable. 
The  Laplanders,  Greenlanders,  and  others  eat  it. 
In  some  parts  of  the  world  they  are  killed  for  the 
sake  of  their  oil  and  skins. 


72 


FABULOUS  HISTORY 


Fabulous  History  of  the  Dolphin. 

Few  animals  have  occupied  a more  distinguished 
place  in  the  writings  of  historians  and  poets,  than 
the  dolphin,  whose  actual  habits  and  manners  we 
have  just  examined.  From  Herodotus,  the  father 
of  Greek  historians,  down  to  a comparatively  recent 
period,  we  find  a succession  of  wonderful  incidents 
related,  originating  either  from  the  most  inaccurate 
observation  of  fact,  or  from  the  wildest  extravagance 
of  fancy. 

It  will  be  an  amusing,  and  we  hope  not  an  unin- 
structive  lesson,  to  trace  some  of  the  most  remarka- 
ble of  these  stories,  both  to  show  how  far  the  human 
mind  may  permit  itself  to  be  misled,  and  to  set  at 
rest,  by  exposing  their  futility,  such  recitals  as  the 
beauty  and  excellence  of  poetry  tend  to  perpetuate 
as  probable  or  true.  Investigations  of  this  kind  may 
in  some  degree  lessen  the  pleasure  derived  from 
works  of  fiction,  but  the  advantage  of  being  pos- 
sessed of  the  truth,  far  outweighs  the  temporary 
gratification  arising  from  an  indulged  imagination. 

The  most  ancient  of  the  accounts  given  of  the  do- 
cility and  friendly  disposition  of  the  dolphin,  is  that 
related  of  Arion,  by  Herodotus  in  his  first  book. 
As  this  may  be  considered  the  source  from  which 
most  of  the  others  have  sprung,  we  subjoin  a free 
translation  from  the  venerable  historian. 


OF  THE  DOLPHIN. 


73 


Periander  was  king  of  Corinth.  The  Corin- 
thians  relate^  (and  the  Lesbians  agree  with  them,) 
that  during  his  life-time,  a great  prodigy  occurred. 
They  say  that  Arion  was  carried  from  Methymna 
to  Tasnarus  upon  the  back  of  a dolphin:  as  a musi- 
cian, he  was  second  to  none,  as  a dithyrambist,  we 
know  he  was  the  first,  composing,  giving  rules  and 
teaching  at  Corinth.  Having  spent  much  of  his 
time  with  Periander,  he  desired  to  visit  Sicily;  hav- 
ing acquired  much  wealth  there  he  wished  to  go  back 
to  Corinth,  for  which  purpose  he  hired  a vessel  from 
some  Corinthians  at  Tarentum.  When  at  sea,  they 
conspired  to  throw  him  overboard,  that  they  might 
share  his  money;  which  having  learned,  he  earnest- 
ly besought  them  to  take  his  wealth,  but  spare  his 
life.  But.  they,  unmoved  by  his  entreaties,  ordered 
him  either  to  kill  himself,  and  perchance  obtain  a 
burial  on  shore,  or  to  cast  himself  instantly  into  the 
sea. 

Driven  to  despair,  Arion  besought  them,  since 
it  was  thus  determined,  that  they  Would  allow  him 
to  sing,  standing  completely  arrayed  on  the  deck. 
They  promised  him  that  he  might  die  singing,  and 
pleased  that  they  should  hear  the  most  excellent  of 
musicians,  they  removed  from  the  poop  towards  the 
middle  of  the  ship.  Arion,  clad  in  his  professional 
robes,^  took  his  lyre,  and,  standing  on  the  deck,  ran 


*Ev  fri  ixtv/i  TtaoYi  is  rendered  by  Dalzell,  “ completely  ar- 
rayed,” as  we  have  given  the  phrase  in  the  second  para- 

VoL.  in._io 


FABULOUS  HISTORY 


74 

through  the  Orthian  measure.* *  Having  concluded, 
he  threw  himself  into  the  sea,  and  they  sailed  on  from 
Corinth.  But  Arion,  sitting  on  a dolphin’s  back, 
was  conveyed  to  Taenarus,  &c.  &c. , These  things 
are  still  told  by  the  Corinthians  and  Lesbians. 
I'here  is  a small  brazen  votive  tablet  of  Arion  near 
Tsenarus,  of  a man  mounted  upon  a dolphin’s 
back.f 


graph.  Murphy  says  it  was  not  his  ordinary  dress  he.  wish- 
ed to  die  in,  but  one  peculiar  to  him  as  a musician. 

* So  called,  because  sung  at  the  highest  and  strongest  pitch 
of  the  voice.  “ OpOiov  enim  Grseci  dicunt  quod  arduum  est, 
et  quam  altissima  voce  elevatum. — Oesnerus. 

t Herodotus,  ix  i?;a  — This  story  did  not  escape  the 

biting  irony  of  Lucian,  whose  talent  for  ridicule  has  rarely 
been  surpassed.  He  has  a dialogue  between  Neptune  and 
the  very  dolphin  who  bore  Arion  in  safety  to  Taenarus,  and 
makes  him  repeat  Herodotus’s  story,  as  “ having  heard 
the  whole  of  it  while  swimming  round  the  ship.”  Lucian 
also  accounts  for  the  fabled  attachment  of  the  Dolphin  to 
the  human  race,  by  making  this  one  remind  Neptune  that 
they  were  changed  from  men  to  dolphins  by  Bacchus.  Ovid 
relates  the  transformation  in  his  third  book  of  Metamor- 
phoses, where  Bacchus  himself,  in  the  semblance  of  his 
companion  Acsetes,  is  the  speaker: — 

“ At  Lybis  obstantes  dum  vult  obvertere  remos, 

In  spatium  resilire  manus  breve  vidit;  etillas 
Jam  non  esse  manus  jarti  primas  posse  vocari. 

Alter  ad  intortos  cupiens  dare  brachia  funes 
Corpore  desiliiit;  fulcata  novissima  cauda  est 
Qualia  dimidias  sinuantur  cornua  lunse.” 


OP  THE  DOLPHIN. 


75 


The  sagacious  and  judicious  Plutarch  not  only  re- 
peats  this  story,  but  introduces  Gorgias  in  the  conver- 
sation of  the  seven  wise  men,  as  saying,  that  he  knew 
Arion,  before  he  landed  from  off  the  dolphin’s 
back,  because  be  had  on  the  dress  he  had  worn  at 
the  public  games.  Aulus  Gellius  repeats  the  story 
from  Herodotus,  as  it  was  originally  told,  and  Ovid 
perpetuates  it  in  verse.*^ 

Numerous  examples,  (says  Aristotle,)  of  the 
gentleness  and  mild  manners  of  dolphins  are  relat- 
ed. About  Tarentiira,  Caria  and  other  places,  they 
tell  of  their  love  and  regard  for  boys.  A dolphin 
having  been  wounded  near  Caria,  a troop  of  doh 
phins,  it  is  said,  gathered  in  the  port,  until  the  fish- 


* Ille  metu  vacuus,  mortem  non  deprecor  inquit; 

Sed  liceat  sumta  pauca  referre  lyra. 

Dant  veniam,  ridentque  moram:  capit  ille  coronam, 
Quas  possit  crines,  Phoebe,  decere  tuos, 

Induerat  Tyrio  bis  tinctam  murice  pallam: 
Reddidit  icta  suos  pollice  chorda  sonos; 

Flebilibus  veluti  numeris  canentia  dura 
Trajectus  penna  tempora  cantat  olor. 

Protinus  in  medias  ornatus  desilit  uiidas, 

Spargitur  impulsa  cserula  puppis  aqua. 

Inde,  fide  majus  tergo  Delphina  recurvo 
Se  memorant  oneri  supposuisse  novo. 

Ille  sedens.  citharamque  tenet,  pretiumque  vehendi 
Cantat,  et  aequoreas  carmine  mulcet  aquas, 

Di  pia  facta  vident:  astris  Delphina  recepit 
Jupiter,  et  stellasjussit  habere  novem. 


76 


FABULOUS  HISTORY 


erman  set  his  prisoner  at  libertyj  when  they  all 
went  off.  A larger  dolphin  likewise  always  ac- 
companies them  as  a guard.  A troop  of  dolphins 
of  larger  and  smaller  size,  were  once  seen,  and,  at 
no  great  distance  behind  them,  two  dolphins  ap- 
peared,  bearing  up  the  body  of  a young  dead  dolphin 
on  their  backs,  by  swimming  beneath  it,  as  if  iu“ 
duced  by  pity  lest  it  should  be  devoured  by  some 
beast.* 

(Elian  relates  in  the  third  chapter  of  his  eighth 
book,  that  Ceranus,  the  Parian,  purchased  the  free- 
dom of  some  dolphins  caught  by  Byzantine  fisher- 
men, and  afterwards  sailed  towards  his  own  coun- 
try in  a Milesian  vessel  of  fifty  oars.  His  vessel 
was  cast  away  in  the  strait  of  Paros,  but  these  dol- 
phins which  he  had  set  at  liberty,  came  in  time  to 
save  their  deliverer,  and  landed  him  on  a promonto= 
ry,  subsequently  called  Cerania,  in  honour  of  hiraj 
at  his  death,  he  requested  to  be  interred  at  that  placej 
thither  the  dolphins  went  to  pay  their  benefactor 
merited  funeral  honours. 

Leonidas  of  Byzantium,  narrates  (in  (Elian’s  2d 
book,  ch.  6.)  that  a man  and  his  wife  of  Ple- 
roselene,  taught  a dolphin  to  eat  from  their  hands, 
and  accustomed  their  sou  to  be  very  familiar  with 
the  animal,  which  very  regularly  frequented  the  bar- 
hour  of  the  town,  appearing  to  regard  it  as  his  home. 
When  old  enough  to  take  care  of  himself,  he  sought 


* Aristoteles  d*e  Animalibus  Historiae,  lib.  ix.  cap.  35. 


OF  THE  DOLPHIN. 


77 


his  subsistence  at  sea,  and  brought  a share  of  his 
success  in  fishing  daily  to  his  friends.  The  pa= 
rents  had  given  the  same  name  to  the  dolphin  and 
their  son.  When  the  boy  sat  upon  a projecting 
rock,  and  called  his  friend,  the  dolphin  immediately 
hastened  towards  him,  testifying  his  pleasure  by 
his  frolicsome  movements.  This  connection  be- 
tween the  boy  and  dolphin,  occasioned  a great 
deal  of  rumour,  and  was  very  profitable  to  the 
parents.* 

The  younger  Pliny,  however,  exceeds  all  these 
wonders,  by  the  following  recital.  A scholar,  named 
Hippus,  in  the  time  of  Augustus,  who  attended  a 
class  at  Puzzoli,  was  in  the  habit  of  going  daily 
along  the  shores  of  Eaia,  and  about  mid-day,  of 
stopping  and  throwing  pieces  of  bread  into  the  water 
to  a dolphin.  If  the  youth  called  the  dolphin  at 
any  time,  he  would  immediately  come,  and  after 
eating  his  bread,  would  offer  his  back  for  the  use 
of  his  friend  who  would  mount  thereon,  and  he 
would  swim  with  him  to  Puzzoli,  and  afterwards 
carry  him  back  in  the  same  manner.  This  friendly 
intercourse  was  maintained  for  several  years;  but 


* There  is  nothing  improbable  in  the  dolphin’s  obedience 
to  a certain  call  from  one  accustomed  to  supply  it  with  food. 
Animals  of  very  inferior  rank  to  the  dolphin,  may  be  taught 
as  much.  I’he  improbability,  is  in  the  gratitude  of  the  ani- 
mal, evinced  by  the  offer  of  part  of  his  fish. 


FABULOUS  HISTORY 


78 

t!ie  boy  dying,  the  afflicted  animal  came  frequently 
to  the  accustomed  place,  remained  there  sorrowful 
and  wretched,  and  finally  died  of  grief!* 

The  reasons  for  believing  the  present  species  to  he 
the  dolphin  of  the  poets,  are  the  following;  first,  it 
is  the  only  dolphin  which  is  known  habitually  to  fre- 
quent the  coasts,  or  to  visit  the  deep  bays  Which 
extend  far  inland.  The  sea-swine  (meerschwein, 
marsouin,  Delplimiis  Phocmna,)  have  no  beak  ex- 
tending beyond  the  arched  part  of  the  head,  and  as 
they  are  seldom  seen  except  in  the  full  sea,  are  not 
likely  to  have  afforded  much  opportunity  to  the  an- 
cients for  examination.  That  they  were  well  ac- 
quainted Mutli  our  dolphin,  we  have  the  most  ex- 
cellent evidence,  in  the  figure  of  the  one  which 
accompanies  the  statue  of  the  Venus  de  Medieis. 
Although  the  usual  poetical  licence  has  been  taken 
by  the  sculptor,  of  placing  the  animal  resting 
on  the  underjaw  and  neck,  with  its  body  and  tail 
raised  in  fanciful  undulations,  from  the  great  re- 
semblance of  the  head  and  beak  to  those  of  the  dol- 
phin we  have  been  examining,  in  conjunction  with 
the  circumstances  of  its  habits,  numbers  and  fami- 
liarity with  the  bays  and  rivers  of  almost  all  the 
world,  we  are  persuaded  of  the  identity  of  the  spe- 
cies frequenting  our  waters,  with  that  to  which  all 
the  ancient  fables  relate. 


* See  Pliny,  lib.  ix,  cap.  viii. 


OF  THE  DOLPHIN. 


79 


We  have  thought  it  unnecessary  to  bring  the  fa- 
bulous history  of  the  dolphin  down  to  a later  period 
than  that  of  Pliny,  as  all  the  subsequent  stories 
appear  to  be  variations  of  the  same.  , It  is  impos- 
sible, however,  not  to  feel  sorry  that  some  modem 
works  of  great  authority  and  usefulness,  continue  to 
interweave  so  much  of  what  is  haxelj  possible,  with 
the  little  that  is  attested  in  regard  to  this  and  other 
animals,  as  to  give  an  air  of  fable  to  the  whole. 
The  following  from  the  “ Nouveau  Dictionnaire 
d’Histoire  Naturelle,’^  may  serve  as  an  instance. 

‘‘  The  dolphins  form  among  themselves  a sort  of 
society;  they  defend  those  of  the  troop  that  may  be 
attacked,  and  utter  frightful  cries,  in  order  to  induce 
the  aggressors  to  release  them.  The  little  dolphins 
are  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  troop;  the  large  and 
most  robust  at  its  head:  they  all  preserve  their  or- 
der like  a battalion  of  soldiers;  they  swim  each  in 
their  ranks;  the  females  compose  the  rear  guard, 
and  urge  on  the  stragglers.”* 

This  is  not  the  only  passage  of  the  kind,  that 
might  be  selected  from  the  article  on  the  dolphin, 
in  the  same  work.  If  the  time  shall  ever  arrive, 
when  the  facts  of  natural  history  are  given,  without 
admixture  with  fable,  the  world  will  be  more  rapid- 
ly and  satisfactorily  advanced  in  improvement  than 
can  possibly  be  hoped  for,  so  long  as  imagination 


* Virey  op.  citato. 


FABULOUS  HISTORY  &C. 


is  permitted  to  usurp  the  place  of  truth.  The  latter^ 
like  perfect  beauty,  is  unsusceptible  of  adornment, 
and  is  always  more  admirable  in  its  simplicity  than 
any  fiction,  however  ingeniously  contrived  or  gorge- 
ously ornamented. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


Genus  Naraval;  Monodori',  L. 

GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 

General  form  of  the  body  similar  to  that  of  the 
dolphin;  a single  spiracle  or  blowhole  on  the  supe- 
rior part  of  the  head;  mouth  small;  no  teeth  within 
the  mouth,  one  long  spiral  tusk  growing  from  the 
intermaxillary  bone;  dorsal  crest  or  spine,  instead 
of  a fin.  The  eyes  and  ears  small.^ 


Species  I. — The  JVarwal. 

Monodon  Monoceros;  L. 

Monodon  Narwhal:  FABRicrtJs,  Faun.  Greenl.  29. 

Narwhal  oder  tinhorn:  Akdersoit,  Island.  225. 

Narwhal:  Bonnat.  Cetol:  10, 

Narwhal  Vulgairt:  Lacep.  Hist.  Nat.  des  Cdtac^s.  142. 

Narwhal,  or  Unicom  of  the  Whalei-s:  Scohesbt,  Arct.  Regions,  i.  486. 
Ibib.  Vo3»age  to  Greenland,  129. 

\Commonly  called  Sea-  Unicorn.'] 

The  narwal  is  an  inhabitant  of  the  arctic  seas, 
and  consequently  is  seldom  seen,  except  by  the  ad- 


* “ Penis  vaginatus;  mammae  lactantes  binae  et  genitalia 
feminarum  sub  abdomine;  pone  ilia  anus.”  Bonnat. 

Yol.  in.— 11 


82 


THE  NARWAL. 


venturous  mariners,  who  seek  the  spoils  of  the 
whale  amid  the  perils  of  polar  ice  and  storms. 
Fortunately,  however,  some  few  of  these,  incited  by 
hopes  of  gain  to  visit  those  forbidding  regions,  have 
been  well  qualified  to  make  accurate  scientific  obser- 
vations, and  owing  to  their  zealous  industry,  we  have 
actually  less  to  desire  concerning  the  animals  found 
in  the  icy  seas,  than  in  relation  to  many  others,  al- 
most within  the  reach  of  every  observer. 

Among  the  individuals  to  whom  science  is  most 
deeply  indebted,  the  name  of  Scoresby  must  ever 
stand  conspicuous;  few  persons  have  contributed  so 
largely  to  the  advancement  of  natural  history,  while 
engaged  in  ordinary  commercial  pursuits,  and  still 
fewer  have  eflected  the  object  so  well  under  any 
circumstances.  His  mind  appears  to  have  been 
one  of  that  rare,  but  amiable  composition,  in  which 
genius,  talent,  energy  and  sound  common  sense,  are 
blended  in  such  just  proportion,  as  to  be  capable  of 
operating  at  all  times,  and  upon  all  materials,  to  the 
greatest  possible  advantage.  From  his  valuable 
researches  we  shall  derive  almost  all  the  observa- 
tions which  remain  to  be  made  upon  the  cetaceous 
animals,  claiming  for  ourselves  no  other  merit  than 
that  of  having  collected  and  arranged  them. 

The  vertebral  column  of  the  narwal  is  about 
twelve  feet  long;  there  are  seven  cervical,  twelve 
dorsal,  and  thirty-five  lumbar  and  caudal  vertebrae, 
being  in  all  fifty-four;  twelve  of  which  enter  the  tail 
and  extend  to  within  an  inch  of  its  extremity.  The 


THE  NAIIWAL. 


83 


spina  marrow  runs  through  all  the  vertebrae,  from 
the  head  of  the  fortieth,  but  does  not  penetrate  the 
forty-first.  The  spinous  processes  diminish  in 
length  from  the  fifteenth  lumbar  vertebrae,  until  it  is 
scarcely  perceptible  at  the  nineteenth.  Large  pro- 
cesses, attached  to  two  adjoining  vertebrae,  and  aris- 
ing from  the  inferior  surface  of  the  bodies  of  the 
vertebrae,  commence  between  the  thirtieth  and  thir- 
ty-first, and  terminate  between  the  forty-second  and 
forty-third.  There  are  twelve  ribs,  six  true  and 
six  false,  on  each  side,  which  are  slender  for  the 
size  of  the  animal.  The  sternum  is  heart-shaped, 
with  the  broadest  part  anteriorly.  Two  of  the 
false  ribs,  on  each  side,  are  joined  by  cartilages  to 
the  sixth  true  rib,  the  others  are  detached. 

The  narwal,  when  full  grown,  measures  from 
thirteen  to  sixteen  feet  in  length,  exclusive  of  the 
tusk,  and  at  the  thickest  part,  which  is  two  feet  be- 
hind the  fins,  the  circumference  is  about  eight  or 
nine  feet.  The  part  of  the  body  anterior  to  the  fins 
and  head,  are  paraboloidal;  the  middle  portion  of 
body  is  almost  cylindrical,  the  posterior  portion,  to 
within  three  orfour  feet  of  the  tail,  is  somewhat  coni- 
cal; thence,  aridge  commencing  both  at  the  back  and 
belly,  the  section  becomes  first  an  ellipse,  and  then 
a rhombus  at  the  junction  of  the  tail.  The  perpen- 
dicular diameter,  at  a distance  of  twelve  or  fourteen 
inches  from  the  tail,  is  about  one  foot,  the  transverse 
diameter  is  about  seven  inches.  The  back  and 
belly  ridges,  run  half  way  or  more  across  the  tail; 


81 


THE  MAKWAL. 


the  edges  of  the  tail  run  in  the  same  way  along  the 
body,  and  form  ridges  on  the  sides  of  the  rump. 
Posterior  to  a very  slight  elevation  at  the  spiracle, 
the  outline  of  the  back  forms  a regular  curve;  the 
belly  appears  to  rise,  or  is  contracted  near  the  vent, 
and  expands  to  an  obvious  bump,  about  two  feet  an- 
terior to  the  genitals.  The  back  appears  depressed 
and  flat  three  or  four  feet  posterior  to  the  neck. 

The  head  forms  about  one  seventh  of  the  whole 
length  of  the  animal,  being  small,  blunt,  and  round. 
The  mouth  is  small,  and  incapable  of  much  exten- 
sion, having  a wedge-shaped  underlip.  The  eyes 
are  only  one  inch  in  their  largest  diameter,  and  are 
placed  on  a line  with  the  opening  of  the  mouth,  at 
about  thirteen  inches  from  the  snout.  The  opening 
of  the  ear,  situated  six  inches  behind  the  eye,  on 
the  same  horizontal  line,  is  of  the  diameter  of  a 
small  knitting  needle.  The  scull  of  the  narvval, 
like  the  dolphin,  &c.  is  concave  above,  and  sends 
forth  a large,  flat,  wedge  shaped  process  in  front, 
which  affords  sockets  for  the  tusks.  There  is  upon 
this  process  a bed  of  fat  extending  horizontally  to 
the  thickness  of  ten  or  twelve  inches,  and  eight  or 
ten  perpendicularly.  To  this  fat,  the  roundness  of 
the  head  is  owing,  and  according  to  the  quantity 
present,  is  tiie  prominence  of  the  front,  and  the  va- 
riation of  the  facial  angle,  from  60  to  90  degrees. 

The  spiracle  or  blowitole  is  situated  immediately 
over  the  eyes,  and  is  a single  semicircular  opening 
about  three  and  a half  inches  in  diameter  and  one 


t 


THE  NARWAL. 


85 


inch  and  a half  in  length.  It  expands  immediate- 
ly within  the  shin  into  a sac  or  air  vessel,  six  or 
eight  inches  wide,  and  extending  laterally  and  for- 
ward, into  two  cavities,  one  on  each  side;  the  ex- 
tremities of  which,  are  about  twelve  inches  apart. 
These  contain  some  mucous  matter;  the  lining  of 
the  whole  sac  is  a thin,  greenish,  black  membrane. 
At  the  posterior  extremity  of  the  sac,  the  blowholes 
are  seen,  divided  there,  into  two  distinct  canals 
in  the  skull.  They  are  closed  by  a valve  resem- 
bling a hare  lip,  one  lobe  of  which  covers  each 
canal.  This  valve  in  the  narwal,  does  not,  (as  in 
the  whale),  enter  the  canal  in  the  skull,  but  merely 
closes  down  upon  it.  It,  however,  effectually  ex- 
cludes the  sea*  water  from  the  lungs,  whatever  be  the 
pressure;  it  becomes,  in  fact,  firmer  and  closer,  in 
proportion  as  the  weight  of  water  is  increased.  The 
valve  is  about  six  inches  wide  and  is  closed  and 
opened  by  two  radiated  muscles.  It  is  detach- 
ed from  the  skull  beneath,  about  six  inches  to- 
wards the  snout.  In  consequence  of  this  separa- 
tion, the  valve  is  sufficiently  free,  and  has  room 
enough  in  the  adjoining  sac  to  be  drawn  upward 
and  forward,  so  as  to  expose  the  breathing  canals, 
or  falling  upon  them  like  the  valve  of  a pump-box, 
to  secure  them  against  the  entrance  of  water.  The 
two  lobes  of  the  valve  are  connected  by  a fleshy 
septum,  slightly  attached  to  the  cartilaginous  part  of 
the  bony  partition  between  the  blow-holes  in  the 
skull. 


80 


THE  NARWAL. 


Tlie  tins  are  twelve  or  fourteen  inches  long,  and 
six  or  eight  broad,  and  placed  at  one  fifth  of  the 
length  of  the  animal  from  the  snout.  Where  fixed 
to  the  body,  the  fin  is  elliptical,  its  longest  axis 
lying  longitudinally,  so  that  when  the  fin  is  elevated 
to  the  swimming  position,  it  is  horizontal,  the  point 
or  tip  is  bent  upwards  or  towards  the  back,  conse- 
quently, when  the  fin  is  in  the  swimming  position,  it 
is  concave  above,  and  convex  below,  the  thick  edge 
forward  and  the  thin  edge  towards  the  tail.  The 
fin  being  horizontal,  is  evidently  designed  to  bal- 
ance the  animal,  while  the  tail,  which  is  from  fifteen 
to  twenty  inches  long,  and  three  or  four  feet  broad, 
is  the  chief  organ  of  motion,  and  is  also  used  in 
turning.  That  the  fins  are  not  commonly  used 
either  for  swimming  or  turning,  appears  probable 
from  repeated  observations  made  with  a teleseope 
from  the  mast  head.  The  fins  were  always  seen, 
steadily  extended,  and  when  the  animal  changed 
its  direction,  the  tail  was  bent  suddenly  and  oblique- 
ly to  one  side,  and  then  slowly  brought  back,  so 
that  the  progressive  motion  and  change  of  direction 
were  produced  by  the  same  effort;  the  fin  at  the 
same  time  remaining  motionless. 

The  general  colour  of  the  young  narwal  is  black- 
^ ish  gray  on  the  back,  variegated  with  numerous 
darker  spots  running  into  each  other  and  forming  a 
dusky  black  surface,  paler  and  more  open  spots  of 
gray  on  a white  ground  at  the  sides,  disappearing 
altogether  about  the  middle  of  the  belly.  In  the 


THE  NAIIWAL. 


87 


elder  animals,  the  ground  is  wholly  white,  or  yel- 
lowish wliite,  with  dark  gray  or  blackish  spots  of 
ditferent  degrees  of  intensity.  These  spots  are  of 
a roundish  or  oblong  form:  on  the  back,  where  they 
seldom  exceed  two  inches  in  diameter,  they  are  the 
darkest  and  most  crowded  together,  yet  with  intervals 
of  pure  white  among  them.  On  the  sides,  the  spots 
are  fainter,  smaller  and  more  open.  On  the  belly 
they  are  extremely  faint  and  few,  and  being  in  con- 
siderable surfaces,  are  not  distinguishable.  A close 
patch  of  brownish  black,  without  any  white,  is  often 
found  on  the  upper  part  of  the  neck,  just  behind  the 
blowhole:  the  external  part  of  the  fins  is  also  gene- 
rally black  at  the  edges,  but  grayish  about  the  mid- 
dle. The  superior  side  of  the  tail  is  also  blackish 
around  the  edges:  but  in  the  middle,  gray  with  black 
curvilinear  streaks,  on  a white  ground,  forming 
semicircular  figures  on  each  lobe.  The  inferior  sur- 
faces of  the  fins  and  tail  are  similar  to  the  upper, 
only  much  paler  coloured,  the  middle  of  the  fins 
being  white,  and  of  tlie  tail  a pale  gray.  The 
sucker  narwals  are  almost  uniformly  of  a bluish 
gray  or  slate  colour.  Very  old  individuals  be- 
come almost  white. 

The  skin  of  the  narwal,  resembles  that  of  the 
whale,  except  that  it  is  thinner.  The  cuticle  is 
about  as  thick  as  writing  paper;  the  rete  mueosum 
three  eighths  or  three  tenths  of  an  inch  thick;  the 
cutis  thin,  but  strong  and  compact  on  the  outer  side. 


88 


THE  NARWAL, 


We  may  next  consider  the  most  remarkable  pe- 
culiarity which  distinguishes  this  animal;  the  long 
spiral  tooth  or  tusk,  which  has  obtained  for  it  the 
name  of  Unicorn.  This  tusk  grows  from  the  left 
side  of  the  head,  and  is  sometimes  nine  or  ten  feet 
long.  Egede,  in  his  description  of  Greenland,  de- 
scribes this  tusk  as  being  fourteen  or  fifteen  feet 
long.  It  projects  from  the  inferior  part  of  the  up- 
per jaw,  and  points  forward  and  slightly  down- 
ward, being  parallel  in  direction  to  the  roof  of  the 
mouth.  It  is  spirally  striated  from  right  to  left, 
nearly  straight,  and  tapers  to  a round  blunt  point. 
It  is  of  a yellowish  white  colour,  and  consists  of  a 
compact  kind  of  ivory,  and  is  usually  hollow  from 
the  base  to  within  a few  inches  of  the  point.  A 
tusk  of  the  average  length,  five  feet,  is  about  two  inch- 
es and  a half  in  diameter  at  the  base;  one  inch  and 
three  fourths  in  the  middle,  and  about  three  eighths 
within  an  inch  of  the  end.  In  such  a tusk  there 
are  five  or  six  turns  of  the  spiral,  extending  from 
the  base  to  within  six  or  seven  inches  of  the  point. 
Beyond  this,  the  end  is  not  striated,  but  smooth, 
clean,  and  white;  the  striated  part  is  usually  gray 
and  dirty.  The  tusk  is  commonly  covered  with  a 
greasy  blackish  brown  incrustation  over  the  great- 
est part  of  its  surface;  the  under  part  and  a few 
inches  of  the  point,  are  kept  quite  clear  and  polish- 
ed by  some  use  which  prevents  the  adherence  of 
the  matter  just  mentioned.  A horn  externally  of 
seven  feet  in  length,  is  bedded  about  fifteen  or 


THE  >fARWAL. 


89 


sixteen  inches  in  the  skull.  All  the  male  narwals^ 
killed  by  Scoresby,  excepting  one,  had  tusks  of  from 
three  to  seven  feet  in  length,  projecting  from  the  left 
side  of  the  head. 

In  addition  to  this  external  tusk,  peculiar  to  the 
male,*  there  is  another  on  the  right  side  of  the  head 
about  nine  inches  long,  imbedded  in  the  skull.  In 
females  as  well  as  in  young  males,  in  which  the 
tooth  does  not  appear  externally,  the  rudiments  of 
two  tusks  are  generally  found  in  the  upper  jaw. 
Tliese  are  entirely  solid,  and  are  placed  back  in 
the  substance  of  the  skull,  about  six  inches  from  its 
most  prominent  part.  These  rudiments  of  tusks 
are  eiglit  or  nine  inches  long,  both  in  the  male  and 
female;  in  the  former  they  are  smooth,  tapering,  and 
terminate  at  the  root  wdth  an  oblique  truncation;  in 
the  latter  they  have  an  extremely  rough  surface,  and 
finish  at  the  base  with  a large  irregular  knob  plac- 
ed towards  one  side,  which  gives  tlie  tusks  some- 
thing of  the  form  of  pocket-pistols.  Two  or  three 
instances  have  occurred  of  male  narwals  having 


* Scoresby,  in  his  Greenland  voyage,  killed  a female  nar* 
wal,  having  an  external  horn,  four  feet  three  inches  longj 
twelve  inches  of  which  were  imbedded  in  the  skull.  It  had 
also  a milk  tusk,  as  is  usual,  nine  Inches  long,  which  was  of 
a conical  form  and  obliquely  truncated  at  the  thicker  end, 
and  without  the  knob  found  in  many  of  the  milk  tusks.  The 
horn  was  on  the  left  side  of  the  head,  and  the  spiral  was 
dexlrorsai. 

VoL.  III. 


90 


THE  NARWAL. 


been  taken,  which  had  two  external  tusks.  This 
is  a rare  circumstance,  and  it  rarely  or  never  occurs 
that  an  external  horn  is  found  on  the  right  side. 

What  purpose  this  singular  and  formidal)le  tusk 
can  serve,  is  not  easily  to  be  determined.  It  is  not 
essential  to  the  defence  of  the  animal,  or  else  the 
young  and  a vast  majority  of  the  females  would  be 
left  unprotected.  It  has  been  suggested,  that  it  is 
employed  by  the  animal  in  piercing  thin  ice  for  the 
convenience  of  rising  to  respire,  and  that  it  is  oc- 
casionally employed  in  killing  prey.  But  nothing 
has  yet  been  observed,  sufficient  to  enable  us  to 
draw  any  positive  conclusion  on  the  subject. 

The  food  of  the  narwal  appears  to  be  principally 
molluscous  animals,  such  as  the  cuttle-fish  &c.,  but 
judging  by  the  materials  occasionally  found  in  their 
stomachs,  more  substantial  food  is  frequently  de- 
voured by  them.  In  the  stomach  of  one  examined 
by  Scoresby,  besides  the  beaks  and  other  remains 
of  cuttle-fish,  there  was  part  of  the  spine  of  a jpleu- 
ronectes,  or  fiat-fish,  probably  a small  turbot;  frag- 
ments of  the  spine  of  a gadus;  the  backbone  of  a 
raia,  with  nearly  a whole  skate,  raia-halis,  which 
was  two  feet  three  inches  long,  and  one  foot  eight 
inches  broad.  That  an  animal  having  no  teeth  ex- 
cept the  external  tusk,  a small  mouth,  and  a tongue 
incapable  of  protrusion,  should  be  able  to  swallow 
a fish  nearly  three  times  as  great  as  the  width  of 
its  own  mouth,  is  really  surprising.  Scoresby  in- 
clines to  the  opinion,  tliat  the  skates  had  been 


THE  NAIIWAL. 


91 


pierced  with  the  horn,  and  killed  before  they  were 
swallowed  by  the  narwal,  as  it  is  otherwise  very 
diflBcult  to  conceive  how  an  animal  so  large  as  the 
skate,  would  allow  itself  to  be  sucked  down  the 
throat  of  a smooth-mouthed  animal,  having  no 
means  of  crushing  or  detaining  it. 

The  narwal  is  a harmless  animal,  of  an  active 
disposition,  and  swims  with  considerable  swiftness. 
When  at  the  surface,  for  the  sake  of  respiring,  these 
animals  frequently  lie  motionless  for  several  mi- 
nutes, with  their  beads  and  backs  just  appearing 
above  water.  Occasionally,  numerous  small  herds 
are  seen  together,  each  herd  generally  consisting  of 
individuals  of  the  same  sex. 

The  narwal  is  sometimes  shot  wuth  a rifle,  kept 
for  that  purpose  in  the  crow’s-nest  of  the  w^haling- 
ships.  When  harpooned,  the  narwal  dives  as 
swiftly,  but  not  so  deeply  as  the  common  whale.  It 
commonly  descends  about  two  hundred  fathoms, 
and  then  returns  to  the  surface,  where  it  is  soon 
killed  with  lances. 

The  whole  body  of  the  narwal  is  covered  by  a 
layer  of  blubber  immediately  beneath  the  skin, 
which  is  from  two  to  three  inches  thick,  and  yields 
a considerable  quantity  of  fine  oil.  The  Green- 
landers and  Esquimaux  employ  the  whole  animal  to 
various  uses.  The  flesh  is  eaten,  the  oil  burned 
in  their  lamps,  the  intestines  wrought  into  lines  and 
dresses,  and  the  tusks  are  used  for  spears  &c.  It 


93 


THE  NARWAL. 


is  said  that  the  king  of  Denmark  has  a magnificent 
and  valuable  throne  made  entirely  of  narwal  tusks. 

The  following  are  the  dimensions  of  a male  nar- 
wal, killed  by  Scoresby  near  Spitzbergen  in  I8I7. 

Feet  Inches. 


Length,  exclusive  of  the  tusk,  - - - 15  0 

from  the  snout  to  the  eyes,  - - 1 

fins,  - - 3 1 

backridge,  6 0 

vent,  - 9 9 

Circumference  4|  inches  from  snout,  - 3 5 

at  the  eyes  and  blowhole,  5 3§ 

just  before  the  fins,  - - 7 5 

at  the  forepart  of  backridge,  8 5 

at  the  vent 5 8 

Tusk,  length  externally, 5 Of 

diameter  at  base,  - - - 0 

Blowhole  length  li  inch,  breadth,  - - 0 3|; 

Tail  do  14  do  - - - 3 Of 

Fins  do  13  do  . _ . 0 7§ 


Heart  weighed  11  pounds.  Temperature  of  the 
blood  an  hour  after  death,  97°. 

A fine  specimen  of  the  tusk  or  horn  of  the  nar- 
wal may  be  seen  in  the  Philadelphia  Museum. 


CHAPTER  X. 


Section  II. — ^Size  nf  the  head  disprojiortioned  to 
that  of  the  body. 

Genus  Cachalot;  Physeter:  L. 

GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 

Tlie  head  in  these  animals  is  of  huge  size,  form- 
ing a third,  or  even  half  of  their  entire  length. 
The  upper  is  broad,  high,  destitute  of  corneous 
fringes  and  teeth,  or  having  short  teeth,  almost  en- 
tirely concealed  within  the  gums.  The  lower  jaw 
is  elongated,  narrow,  and  armed  with  thick  conical 
teeth,  which  fit  into  corresponding  depressions  in 
the  upper  jaw.  Tlie  spiracles  are  placed  at  or  near 
the  extremity  of  the  superior  part  of  the  snout. 
There  is  a dorsal  fin  in  some  species,  in  others  mere- 
ly an  eminence.  In  the  superior  parts  of  the  head 
there  are  large  cavities,  circumscribed  by  cartilagi- 
nous partitions,  and  communicating  with  difterent 
parts  of  the  body  by  particular  canals.  These  are 
filled  with  an  oil  that  becomes  fixed  and  crystallized 
on  cooling,  and  is  the  well  known  substance  sper- 
maceti. 

The  teeth  are  ovoid  and  recurved;  externally  they 
somewhat  resemble  ivory,  internally  they  are  softer, 
and  ash  coloured.  They  are  commonly  about  six 


91 


THE  SPERMACETI  CACHALOT. 


inches  long,  and  three  in  circumference  at  the  base, 
and  are  thought  to  become  larger  and  more  recurv- 
ed as  the  animal  grows.  The  upper  jaw  has  as 
many  alveolar  depressions  as  there  are  teeth  in  the. 
lower,  but  what  is  most  remarkable,  is,  that  in  the 
interstices  separating  these  depressions,  are  to  he 
found  about  twenty  small  teeth,  horizontally  placed, 
and  raised  about  one-twentieth  of  an  inch  above  the 
gum.  These  teeth  are  acutely  pointed,  and  present 
a flat,  even,  and  oblique  surface,  filling  the  intervals 
separating  the  alveoles.  This  oblique  surface  is  all 
that  is  seen  of  them,  the  other  parts  of  these  teeth 
being  imbedded  in  the  gum.*- 


Species  I. — The  Spermaceti  Cachalot. 

Physeter  Macrocephalus. 

Le  Grand  Cachalot;  Bostnat.  Cetol.  12. 

Cachalot  Macroc^phalc;  Desm.  Mam.  524,  p.  790. 

Cachalot  MacrocSphale,  Lacep.  Hist.  Nat.  des  Cetac6s,  pi.  10. 

The  spermaceti  cachalot  is  found  in  greatest 
abundance  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  where  large  num- 
bers of  them  are  annually  killed  by  the  American 
and  other  whalers,  for  the  sake  of  their  oil  and  sper- 
maceti. 

The  spermaceti  cachalot  is  gregarious,  and  herds 

• See  Desmarest’s  Manunalogie;  Bonnaterre  Cetologie; 
Sibbald  Phalainologia  nova. 


THE  SPERMACETI  CACHALOT.  95 

are  frequently  seen  containing  two  hundred  or  more 
individuals.  Such  herds,  with  the  exception  of  two 
or  three  old  males,  are  composed  of  females,  who 
appear  to  be  under  the  direction  of  the  males.  The 
males  are  distinguished  by  the  whalers  as  bullsj  the 
females  they  call  cows.  The  bulls  attack  with  great 
violence,  and  inflict  dreadful  injuries  upon  other 
males  of  the  species,  which  attempt  to  join  their  herd. 
These  animals  live  separately,  while  young,  accord- 
ing to  their  age  and  sex.  The  young  and  half 
grown  males  are  found  by  themselves;  the  old  coics 
protect  the  young  females.  When  the  young  bulls 
attain  sufficient  strength,  they  venture  into  a herd 
under  the  protection  of  some  old  bulls,  an  intrusion 
that  is  said  to  produce  a severe  contest,  by  which 
they  succeed  in  gaining  admittance  to,  or  are  driven 
from  the  herd. 

The  mode  of  attacking  these  animals  is  as  fol- 
lows:— Whenever  a number  of  them  are  seen, 
four  boats,  each  provided  with  two  or  three  lines, 
two  harpoons,  four  lances  and  a crew  of  six  men, 
proceed  in  pursuit,  and,  if  possible,  each  boat  strikes 
or  “ fastens  to”  a distinct  animal,  and  each  crew 
kill  their  own.  When  engaged  in  distant  pursuit,  the 
harpooner  generally  steers  the  boat,  and  in  such 
cases  the  proper  boat  steerer  occasionally  strikes, 
but  the  harpooner  mostly  kills  it.  If  one  cacha- 
lot of  a herd  is  struck,  it  commonly  takes  the  lead 
and  is  followed  by  the  rest.  The  one  which  is 
struck,  seldom  descends  far  underwater,  but  gene- 


96 


THE  SPERMACETI  CACHALOT. 


rally  swims  off  with  great  rapiility,  stopping  after  a 
short  course,  so  that  the  boat  can  be  drawn  up  to  it 
by  the  line,  or  be  rowed  sufficiently  near  to  lance  it. 
In  the  agonies  of  deatli,  the  struggles  of  the  animal 
are  truly  tremendous,  and  the  surface  of  the  ocean 
is  lashed  into  foam  by  the  motions  of  the  fins  and 
tail.  Tall  jets  of  blood  are  discharged  from  the 
blowholes,  which  show  that  the  wounds  have  taken 
mortal  effect,  and  seeing  this,  the  boats  are  kept 
aloof,  lest  they  should  be  dashed  to  pieces  by  the 
violent  efforts  of  the  victim. 

When  a herd  is  attacked  in  this  way,  ten  or 
twelve  of  the  number  are  killed;  those  which  are 
only  wounded  are  rarely  captured.  After  the  ca- 
chalot is  killed,  tlie  boats  tow  it  to  the  side  of  the 
ship,  and  if  the  weather  be  fine,  and  other  objects 
of  diase  in  view,  they  are  again  sent  to  the  attack. 

The  separation  of  the  blubber  from  the  animal, 
or  ‘‘  flensing,’^  is  sometimes  done  differently  from 
tlie  manner  used  in  the  polar  whaling.  A strap  of 
blubber  is  cut  in  a spiral  direction,  and  being  raised 
by  tackles,  turns  the  cachalot  round  as  on  an  axis, 
until  nearly  all  the  blubber  is  stripped  off.  The 
material  contained  within  the  head,  consisting  of 
spermaceti  mixed  with  oil,  being  in  a fluid  state 
while  warm,  is  taken  out  of  large  cachalots  in 
buckets,  while  the  animal  remains  in  the  water;  but 
in  smaller  ones,  the  part  of  the  head  containing  the 
spermaceti,  is  hoisted  upon  deck  before  the  cavity  is 
opened. 


THE  SPERMACETI  CACHALOT.  97 

The  substances  taken  from  the  head^  congealing  as 
soon  as  cold,  the  compound  is  thrown  in  its  crude  state 
into  casks,  and  is  purified  at  the  end  of  the  voyage 
on  shore.  The  oil  is  reduced  from  the  blubber  short- 
ly after  it  is  on  board,  in  try  works,”  with  which 
the  ships  engaged  in  this  business  are  always  pro- 
vided. There  are  two  coppers  in  the  try  works, 
placed  side  by  side,  near  the  fore  hatch.  These, 
with  their  furnaces  and  casing  of  brickwork,  occupy 
a space  of  five  or  six  feet  in  length,  by  eight  or  nine 
in  breadth,  (or  fore  and  aft — and  athwart  ship,)  and 
four  or  five  feet  in  height.  The  cavity  of  the  brick 
arches  sustaining  the  coppers  and  furnaces,  forms  a 
water  cistern,  so  that  while  the  fire  is  burning,  the 
deck  is  secured  from  injury  by  the  changing  of  the 
water  in  the  cistern  twice  or  thrice  in  every  watch. 
As  the  oil  is  extracted  it  is  thrown  into  coolers, 
whence,  after  about  twenty-four  hours,  it  is  trans- 
ferred to  casks.  At  first  the  coppers  are  heat- 
ed with  wood,  but  afterwards  the  cracklings  or  frit- 
ters of  the  blubber,  which  still  contain  some  oil,  are 
employed  as  fuel,  and  produce  a fierce  fire.  About 
three  tons  of  oil  are  commonly  obtained  from  a large 
cachalot  of  this  species;  from  one  to  two  tons  are 
procured  from  a small  one.  A cargo,  produced 
from  one  hundred  cachalots,  may  be  from  150  to  200 
tons  of  oil,  besides  the  spermaceti,  &c. 

VoL.  III. -13 


CHAPTER  IX. 


Genus — Whale;  Balcena;  L. 

GENERIC  CHARACTERS. 

Whales  possess  no  true  teeth;  the  upper  jaw 
resembles  the  keel  of  a vessel,  or  the  roof  of  a house 
reversed.  It  is  furnished  on  each  side  with  trans- 
verse horny  layers  of  a peculiar  substance,  called 
Baleen,  which  at  the  edges  are  split  into  long 
slender  fringes.  The  spiracles  or  blowholes  are 
separated,  and  placed  about  the  middle  of  the  su- 
perior part  of  the  head.  Some  species  have  a dor- 
sal tin;  others  merely  a prominence. 


Species  I. — The  Whale. 

Balaena  Mysticetus.  L. 

Arirt.  An.  1.  c.  v,  HI.  c.  xvi-  MueTtMimtr,  ib.  III.  c.  x.  Xt, 
Hist.  an.  v.  c.  iv. 

Hvalfisch;  Egede  Greenland,  48. 

La  jBaleine  Franche;  Bonnat.  C^tol.  1. 

The  Common  or  Greenland  Whale;  Scobesbx  Arct.  Regions,  i.  449. 

In  attempting  to  describe  a creature  so  gigantic 
and  surpassing  in  strength  as  the  whale,  we  deeply 
feel  the  want  of  expressions  suitable  to  our  pur- 
pose, and  vainly  endeavour  to  remove  this  difficulty 


Si'u/e.  07u-tent7i  oi'lm'li  to  o toot. 


-ff»>;  ;,',v> . 

rf'^-  ■'-■  ■ 


THE  WHALE. 


99 


by  resorting  to  comparisons  scarcely  less  inade- 
quate, or  conveying  at  best  but  vague  aud  unsatis- 
factory ideas.  The  sublime  in  magnitude  among 
organized  and  animated  beings,  the  whale  is 
adapted  in  all  his  attributes  to  the  fathomless  and 
illimitable  waters  he  is  destined  to  inhabit:  con- 
trasted with  other  animals,  his  strength  as  far  tran- 
scends their  greatest  exertions,  as  the  irresistible 
hearings  of  the  mighty  deep  exceed  the  harmless 
rippling  of  a sylvan  stream.  It  is  only  by  successive 
approaches  and  detailed  examination,  that  we  can 
arrive  at  a proper  conception  of  this  animal,  and, 
therefore,  the  statements  which  are  freest  from  at- 
tempts to  emulate  by  ambitious  style  the  magnitude 
of  the  subject,  will  lead  us  to  the  most  satisfactory 
conclusions. 

Having  never  personally  enjoyed  opportunities 
of  studying  the  whale  in  his  native  floods,  and  hav- 
ing derived  all  that  we  know  in  relation  thereto,  from 
ScouESBY,  we  should  deem  it  injustice  to  the  reader 
to  give  this  account  in  any  other  language  than  that 
of  the  original.  We  do  this  without  reluctance,  as 
our  object  is  to  convey  the  most  accurate  know- 
ledge, rather  than  to  produce  a work  exclusively 
of  our  own  composition,  and  because  we  believe 
that  where  an  original  observer  is  competent  to  ex- 
press what  he  has  seen,  his  remarks  must  have  a 
force  and  value  far  greater  than  can  be  imparted  by 
another,  however  great  may  be  his  command  of 
language,  or  his  felicity  of  expression.  All  that 


100 


THE  WHALE. 


follows  in  relation  to  the  whale,  is  selected  from 
the  different  works  of  the  accurate  and  philosophical 

SCORESBY. 


The  Whale, 

This  valuable  and  interesting  animal,  generally 
called  the  whale  by  way  of  eminence,  is  the  object  of 
our  most  important  commerce  to  the  polar  seas — is 
productive  of  more  oil  than  any  other  of  the  cetacea, 
and  being  less  active,  slower  in  its  motion,  and  more 
timid  than  any  other  of  the  kind,  of  similar  or  near- 
ly similar  magnitude,  is  more  easily  captured. 

Large  as  the  size  of  the  whale  certainly  is,  it  has 
been  much  over-rated;  for  such  is  the  avidity  with 
which  the  human  mind  receives  communications  of 
the  marvellous,  and  such  the  interest  attached  to  those 
researches,  which  describe  any  remote  and  extraordi- 
nary production  of  nature,  that  the  judgment  of  the 
traveller  receives  a bias,  which,  in  cases  of  doubt,  in- 
duces him  to  fix  upon  that  extreme  point  in  his 
opinion,  which  is  calculated  to  afford  the  greatest 
surprise  and  interest.  Hence,  if  he  perceives  an 
animal  remarkable  for  its  minuteness,  he  is  inclined 
to  compare  it  with  something  still  more  minute:  if 
remarkable  for  its  bigness,  with  something  fully 
larger.  When  the  animal  inhabits  an  element 
where  he  can  not  examine  it,  or  is  seen  under  any 
circumstance  which  prevent  the  possibility  of  his 
determining  its  dimensions,  liis  decision  will  cer- 
tainly be  in  that  extreme  wliich  excites  the  most 


THE  WHALE. 


101 


interest.  Thus  a mistake  in  the  size  of  the  whale 
would  .easily  be  made;  and  there  is  every  proba- 
bility of  such  an  error  having  been  committed  two 
or  three  centuries  back,  from  which  period  some  of 
our  present  dimensions  have  been  derived,  when 
we  know  that  whales  were  usually  viewed  with 
superstitious  dread,  and  their  magnitude  and  powers 
in  consequence,  highly  exaggerated.  Besides,  er- 
rors of  this  kind  having  a tendency  to  increase, 
rather  than  to  correct  one  another,  from  the  circum- 
stance of  each  writer  on  the  subject,  being  influenced 
by  a similar  bias;  the  most  gross  and  extravagant 
results  are  at  length  obtained.  Thus  authors,  we 
find,  of  the  first  respectability  in  the  present  day, 
give  a length  of  80  or  100  feet,  or  upwards,  to  the 
mysticetus,  and  remark  with  unqualified  assertion, 
that  when  the  captures  were  less  frequent,  and  the 
animals  had  suflBcient  time  to  attain  their  full 
growth,  specimens  were  found  of  150  to  200  feet  in 
length,  or  even  longer;  and  some  ancient  naturalists, 
indeed,  have  gone  so  far,  as  to  assert  that  whales 
had  been  seen  of  above  900  feet  in  length. 

But  whales  in  the  present  day  are  by  no  means 
so  bulky.  Of  332  individuals,  in  the  capture  of 
which,  I have  been  personally  concerned,  no  one 
I believe  exceeded  60  feet  in  length;  and  the  largest 
I ever  measured,  was  58  feet  from  one  extremity 
to  the  other,  being  one  of  the  longest  to  appearance, 
which  I ever  saw.  An  uncommon  whale,  which  was 
caught  near  Spitsbergen,  about  twenty  years  ago, 
the  whalebone  of  which  measured  almost  fifteen  feet, 


102 


THE  WHALE. 


was  not,  I understand,  so  much  as  70  feet  in  lengthy 
and  the  longest  actual  measurement  that  I have  met 
with,  or  heard  of,  is  given  by  Sir  Charles  Giesecke, 
who  informs  us,  that  in  the  Spring  of  1813,  a whale 
was  killed  at  Godharn,  of  the  length  of  67  feet;  these 
however  are  very  uncommon  instances.  I therefore 
conceive  that  60  feet  may  be  considered  as  the  size 
of  the  largest  animals  of  this  species,  and  65  feet  in 
length  as  a magnitude  which  very  rarely  occurs. 

Yet  I believe  that  whales  now  occur  of  as  large 
dimensions  as  at  any  former  period,  since  the  com- 
mencement of  the  whale  fishery.  This  point  I en- 
deavoured to  prove,  from  various  historical  records, 
in  a paper,  read  before  the  Wernerian  Society,  on 
the  19th  day  of  December,  1818,  and  since  inserted, 
in  the  Edinburgh  Philosophical  Journal,  No.  1. 
p.  83. 

In  this  paper,  I brought  forward  the  authorities 
of  Zorgdrager,  the  writer  of  an  account  of  the  whale 
fishery,  and  one  of  the  early  superintendents  of  the 
Dutch  northern  fisheries,  together  with  opinions  or 
remarks  of  Captain  Anderson,  Gray,  Heley,  and 
others,  who  were  among  the  earliest  of  the  English 
whalers,  which  satisfactorily  prove,  that  the  average 
and  largest  produce  of  a whale  in  oil,  was  not 
greater  near  two  hundred  years  ago,  than  it  is  at 
the  present  time;  and  to  these  are  added  the  testi- 
monies of  Captain  Jenkinson  and  Edge,  as  to  the 
length  of  the  whale,  which  likewise  corresponds 
pretty  nearly  with  the  measurements  I have  my- 
self made. 


THE  WHALE. 


lOB 


Jenkinson,  in  his  voyage  to  Russia,  performed  in 
1557j  saw  a number  of  whales,  some  of  which,  by 
estimation,  were  60  feet  long,  and  are  described  as 
being  very  monstrous,”  Etlgc,  who  was  one  of 
the  Russia  Company’s  chief  and  earliest  whale 
fishers,  having  been  ten  years  to  Spitsbergen,  prior 
to  the  year  1635,  calls  the  whale  a sea  beaste  of 
hughe  bigness,  about  65  foot  long,  and  35  foot 
thick,”  having  whalebone  ten  or  eleven  feet  long, 
(a  common  size  at  present),and  yielding  about  100 
hogsheads  of  oil;  and  in  a descriptive  plate,  accom- 
panying Captain  Edge’s  paper  on  the  fishery,  pub- 
lished by  Purchas  in  1635,  is  a sketch  of  a whale, 
with  this  remark  subjoined — “ a whale  is  ordinari- 
ly about  60  foot  long.” 

Hence,  I conceive,  w^e  may  satisfactorily  conclude 
that  whales  of  as  large  size  are  found  now,  as  at 
any  former  period,  since  the  Spitsbergen  fishery  was 
discovered;  and  I may  also  remark,  that  w'here  any 
respectable  authority  affords  actual  measurement  ex- 
ceeding70feet,  it  will  always  be  found  thatthespeci- 
men  referred  to,  w'as  not  one  of  the  mysticetus  kind, 
but  of  B.  Physalis  or  the  B.  Musculus  animals,  which 
considerably  exceed  in  length  any  of  the  common 
whales  that  I have  either  heard  of,  or  met  with. 

When  fully  grown,  therefore,  the  length  of  the 
whale  may  be  stated  as  varying  from  50  to  65, 
and  rarely,  if  ever,  reaching  70  feet;  and  its  greatest 
circumference  from  30  to  40  feet.  It  is  thickest 
a little  behind  the  fins,  or  in  the  middle  between 


104 


THE  WHALE. 


the  anterior  ami  posterior  extremes  of  the  animal; 
from  whence  it  gradually  tapers,  in  a conical 
form,  towards  the  tail,  and  slightly  towards  the 
head.  Its  form  is  cylindrical  from  the  neck  to 
within  ten  feet  of  the  tail,  beyond  which,  it  be- 
comes somewhat  quadrangular,  the  greatest  ridge 
being  upwards,  or  on  the  back,  and  running  back- 
ward nearly  across  the  middle  of  the  tail.  The 
head  has  somewhat  of  a triangular  shape.  The 
under  part,  the  arched  Qutline  of  Avhich  is  given  by 
the  jaw  bones,  is  flat,  and  measures  16  to  SO  feet 
in  length,  and  10  to  IS  feet  in  breadth.  The  lips, 
extending  15  or  SO  feet  in  length,  and  five  or  six  in 
height,  and  forming  the  cavity  of  the  mouth,  are 
attached  to  the  under  jaw,  and  rise  from  the  jaw- 
bones, at  an  angle  of  about  80  degrees,  having  the 
appearance,  when  viewed  in  front,  of  the  letter  U. 
The  upper  jaw,  including  the  crown  bone  or  skull, 
is  bent  down  at  the  extremity,  so  as  to  shut  the  front 
and  upper  parts  of  the  cavity  of  the  mouth,  and  is 
overlapped  by  the  lips  in  a squamous  manner  at  the 
sides. 

When  the  mouth  is  open,  it  presents  a cavi- 
ty as  large  as  a room,  and  capable  of  containing  a 
merchant  ship’s  jolly  boat,  full  of  men,  being  six 
or  eight  feet  wide,  ten  or  twelve  feet  high,  (in  front) 
and  fifteen  or  sixteen  feet  long. 

The  fins,  two  in  number,  are  placed  between  one 
third  and  two-fifths  of  the  animal,  from  the  snout, 
and  about  two  feet  behind  the  angle  of  the  mouth; 


THE  WHALE. 


105 


they  are  from  seven  to  nine  feet  in  length,  and  four 
or  five  in  breadth.  The  part  by  which  they  are 
attached  to  the  body  is  somewhat  elliptical,  and 
about  two  feet  in  diameter;  the  side  which  strikes 
the  water  is  nearly  flat.  The  articulation  being 
spherical,  the  fins  are  capable  of  motion  in  any 
direction;  but,  from  the  tension  of  the  flesh  and  skin 
below,  they  can  not  be  raised  above  the  horizontal 
position.  Hence,  the  account  given  by  some  natu- 
ralists, that  the  whale  supports  its  young  by  its  fin  on 
its  back,  must  be  erroneous.  The  fins  after  death  are 
always  hard  and  stiff;  but  in  the  living  animal,  it  is 
presumed,  from  the  nature  of  the  internal  structure, 
that  they  are  capable  of  considerable  flexion.  The 
whale  has  no  dorsal  fin.  The  tail,  comprising  in  a 
single  surface  80  or  100  square  feet,  is  a formidable 
instrument  of  motion  and  defence.  Its  length  is 
only  five  or  six  feet;  but  its  width  is  from  18  to  24* 
or  26  feet.  Its  position  is  horizontal.  In  its  form 
it  is  fiat  and  semilunar;  indented  in  the  middle;  the 
two  lobes  somewhat  pointed,  and  turned  a little 
backward.  Its  motions  are  rapid  and  universal; 
its  strength  immense. 

The  eyes  are  situated  in  the  sides  of  the  head, 
about  a foot,  obliquely,  above  and  behind  the  angle 
of  the  mouth.  They  are  remarkably  small,  in  pro- 
portion to  the  bulk  of  the  animal’s  bodj’’,  being  little 
larger  than  those  of  an  ox.  The  whale  has  no  ex- 
ternal ear;  nor  can  any  orifice  for  the  admission  of 
sound  be  discovered  until  the  skin  is  removed. 

VoL.  III. -14 


106 


THE  WHALE. 


On  the  most  elevated  part  of  the  head,  about  six- 
teen  feet  from  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  jaw,  are 
situated  two  blow-holes,  or  spiracles,  consisting  of 
two  longitudinal  apertures,  six  or  eight  inches  in 
length.  These  are  the  proper  nostrils  of  the  whale; 
a moist  vapour,  mixed  with  mucous,  is  discharged 
from  them  when  the  animal  breathes;  but  no  water 
accompanies  it,  unless  an  expiration  of  the  breath 
be  made  under  the  surface. 

The  mouth,  in  place  of  teeth,  contains  two  ex- 
tensive rows  of  fins  or  whalebone,  which  are  sus- 
pended from  the  sides  of  the  crown  bone.  These 
series  of  fins  are  generally  curved  longitudinally, 
although  they  are  sometimes  straight,  and  give  an 
arched  form  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth.  They  are 
covered  immediately  by  the  lips  attached  to  the 
lower  jaw,  and  enclose  the  tongue  between  their 
lower  extremities,  each  series,  or  side  of  bone,’* 
as  the  whale  fishers  term  it,  consists  of  upward  of 
300  laminse;*  the  longest  are  near  the  middle,  from 
whence  they  gradually  diminish  away  to  nothing, 
at  each  extremity;  fifteen  feet  is  the  greatest  length 
of  the  whalebone;  but  ten  or  eleven  feet  is  the  ave- 
rage size,  and  thirteen  feet  is  a magnitude  seldom 
met  with.  The  greatest  breadth,  which  is  at  the 
gum,  is  ten  or  twelve  inches.  The  laminse,  com- 
posing the  two  series  of  bone,  are  ranged  side  by 
side  two-thirds  of  an  inch  apart,  (thickness  of  the 


* In  a very  small  whale  the  number  was  316  or  320. 


THE  WHALE. 


107 


blade  included,)  and  resemble  a frame  of  saws  in 
a saw-mill,  the  interior  edges  are  covered  with  a 
fringe  of  hair,  and  the  exterior  edges  of  every  blade, 
excepting  a few  at  each  extremity  of  the  series,  is 
curved  and  flattened  down,  so  as  to  present  a smooth 
surface  to  the  lips.  In  some  whales  a curious  hol- 
low on  one  side,  and  ridge  on  the  other,  occurs  in 
many  of  the  central  blades  of  whalebone,  at  regular 
intervals  of  six  or  seven  inches.  May  not  this 
irregularity,  like  the  rings  in  the  horn  of  the  ox, 
which  they  resemble,  afford  an  intimation  of  the  age 
of  the  whale?  if  so,  twice  the  number  of  running 
feet  in  the  longest  lamina  of  whalebone,  in  the  head 
of  a whale  not  full  grown,  would  represent  its  age 
in  years.  In  the  youngest  whales,  called  suckers, 
the  whalebone  is  only  a few  inches  long;  when  the 
length  reaches  six  feet  or  upwards,  the  whale  is  said 
to  be  size.  The  colour  of  the  whalebone  is  brown- 
ish black,  or  bluish  black.  In  some  animals  it  is 
striped  longitudinally  with  white.  When  newly 
cleaned,  the  surface  exhibits  a fine  play  of  colour. 
A large  whale  sometimes  affords  a ton  and  a half 
of  whalebone.  If  the  ‘‘  sample  blade,”  that  is, 
the  largest  lamina  in  the  series,  weigh  seven  pounds, 
the  whole  produce  may  be  estimated  at  a ton;  and 
so  on  in  proportion.  The  whalebone  is  inserted 
into  the  crown  bone,  in  a sort  of  rabbit.  All  the 
blades  in  the  same  series  are  connected  together  by 
the  gum,  in  which  the  thick  ends  are  inserted.  This 
substance  (the  gums)  is  white,  fibrous,  tender,  and 


108 


THE  AVHALE. 


tasteless;  it  cuts  like  cheese.  It  has  the  appearance 
of  the  interior  or  kernel  of  the  cocoa  nut.  The 
tongue  occupies  a large  portion  of  the  cavity  of  the 
mouth:  and  the  arch  formed  by  the  Avhalebone,  is  ca- 
pable of  protrusion,  being  fixed  from  root  to  lip,  to 
the  fat  extending  between  the  jaw  bones. 

A slight  beard,  consisting  of  a few  short  scattered 
white  hairs,  surmounts  the  anterior  extremity  of 
both  jaws. 

The  throat  is  remarkably  straight. 

Two  paps  in  the  female,  afford  the  means  of 
rearing  the  young.  They  are  situated  on  the  ab- 
domen, one  on  each  side  of  the  pudendum,  and  are 
two  feet  apart.  They  appear  not  to  be  capable  of 
protrusion,  beyond  the  length  of  a few  inches.  In 
the  dead  animal  they  are  always  found  retracted. 

The  milk  of  a whale,  resembles  that  of  a quadru- 
ped, in  its  appearance.  It  is  said  to  be  rich  and 
well  flavoured.  The  vent  is  about  six  inches  be- 
hind the  pudendum  of  the  female;  but  in  the  male, 
it  is  further  back. 

The  colour  of  the  mysticetus  is  velvet  black,  gray, 
(composed  of  dots  of  blackish  brown  on  a white 
ground,)  and  white  with  a tinge  of  yellow.  The 
back,  most  of  the  upper  jaw,  and  part  of  the  lower 
jaw,  together  with  the  fins  and  tail,  are  black. 
The  tongue,  the  lower  part  of  the  under  jaw  and 
lips,  sometimes  a little  of  the  upper  jaw,  at  the  ex- 
tremity, and  a portion  of  the  belly  are  white;  and 
the  eye-lids,  the  junction  of  the  tail  with  the  body, 


THE  WHALE. 


109 


a portion  in  the  axillse  of  the  fins,  &e.  are  gray.  I 
have  seen  whales,  that  were  all  over  piebald.  The 
older  animals  contain  the  most  gray  and  white; 
under  size  whales,  are  altogether  of  a bluish  black, 
and  suckers  of  pale  bluish  or  bluish  gray  colour. 

The  skin  of  the  body  is  slightly  furrowed,  like 
the  water-lines  on  coarse  laid  paper.  On  the  tail- 
fins,  &c.  it  is  smooth.  The  cuticle,  or  that  part  of 
the  skin  which  can  be  pulled  off  in  sheets,  after  it 
has  been  a little  dried  in  the  air,  or  particularly  in 
frost,  is  not  thicker  than  parchment.  The  rete  mu- 
cosum  in  adults,  is  about  three  fourths  of  an  inch 
in  thickness  over  most  parts  of  the  body;  in  suckers 
nearly  two  inches;  but  on  the  under  side  of  the  fins, 
on  the  inside  of  the  lips,  and  on  the  surface  of  the 
tongue,  it  is  much  thinner.  This  part  of  the  integu- 
ments is  generally  of  the  same  colour  throughout  its 
thickness.  The  fibres,  of  which  it  is  composed,  are 
perpendicular  to  the  surface  of  the  body:  under  this 
lies  the  true  skin,  which  is  white  and  tough.  As 
it  imperceptibly  becomes  impregnated  with  oil,  and 
passes  gradually  into  the  form  of  blubber,  its  real 
thickness  can  not  easily  be  stated.  The  most  com- 
pact part,  perhaps,  may  be  a quarter  of  an  inch 
thick. 

Immediately  beneath  the  skin,  lies  the  blubber 
or  fat,  encompassing  the  whole  body  of  the  animal, 
together  with  the  fins  and  tail.  Its  colour  is  yellow- 
ish white,  yellow  or  red.  In  the  very  young  ani- 
mals, it  is  always  yellowish  white.  In  some  old 


1(0 


THE  WHALE. 


aoimals  it  resembles  in  colour  the  substance  of  the 
salmon.  It  swims  in  water.  Its  thickness  all 
round  the  body,  is  eight  or  ten  or  twenty  inches,  va- 
rying in  difl'erent  parts  as  well  as  in  different  indi- 
viduals. The  lips  are  composed  almost  entirely  of 
blubber,  and  yield  from  one  to  two  tons  of  pure  oil 
each.  The  tongue  is  chiefly  composed  of  a soft 
kind  of  fat,  that  affords  less  oil  than  any  other  blub- 
ber; in  the  centre  of  the  tongue,  and  towards  the 
root,  the  fat  is  intermixed  with  fibres  of  a muscular 
substance.  The  under  jaw,  excepting  the  two  jaw 
bones,  consists  almost  wholly  of  fat,  and  the  crown 
bone  possesses  a considerable  coating  of  it;  the  fins 
are  principally  blubber,  tendons  and  bones,  and  the 
tail  possesses  a thin  stratum  of  blubber.  The  oil 
appears  to  be  retained  in  the  blubber  in  minute  cells, 
connected  together  by  a strong  reticulated  combina- 
tion of  tendinous  fibres.  These  fibres  being  condens- 
ed at  the  surface,  appear  to  form  the  substance  of 
the  skin.  The  oil  is  expelled  when  heated,  and  in 
a great  measure  discharges  itself  out  of  the  henkSy 
whenever  putrefaction  in  the  fibrous  parts  of  the 
blubber  takes  place.  The  blubber  and  the  whale- 
bone are  the  parts  of  the  whale,  to  which  the  atten- 
tion of  the  fisher  is  directed.  The  flesh  and  bones, 
excepting  occasionally  the  jaw  bone,  are  rejected. 
The  blubber,  in  its  fresh  state,  is  without  any  un- 
pleasant smell,  and  it  is  not  until  after  the  termi- 
nation of  the  voyage,  when  the  cargo  is  unstowed, 
that  a Greenland  ship  becomes  disagreeable. 


THE  WHALE. 


1 i 1 

Four  tons  of  blubber,  by  measure,  generally  af- 
fords three  tons  of  oil,^  but  the  blubber  of  a sucker 
contains  a very  small  portion.  Whales  have  been 
caught  that  afforded  nearly  thirty  tons  of  pure  oil, 
and  whales  yielding  twenty  tons  of  oil,  are  by  no 
means  numerous.  The  quantity  of  oil,  yielded  by 
a whale,  generally  bears  a certain  proportion  to 
the  length  of  its  longest  blade  of  whalebone. 

The  average  quantity  is  expressed  in  the  follow- 
ing table,  t 


Length  of 
whalebone 
in  feet. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 . 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

Oil  yielded 
in  tons. 

li 

n 

1 ’ 
1 

3i 

4 

5 

8i 

11 

13i 

17 

21 

Though  this  statement,  on  the  average,  be  exceed- 
ingly near  the  truth,  yet  exceptions  sometimes  oc- 
cur. A whale  of  feet  bone,  for  instance,  has 
been  known  to  produce  near  ten  tons  of  oil,  and 
another  of  twelve  feet  bone  only  nine  tons.  Such 
instances,  however,  are  very  uncommon. 


• * The  ton  or  tun  of  oil,  is  252  gallons,  wine  measurei  it 
weighs,  at  temperature  60°,  19331b.  12oz.  14dr.  avoirdupois. 

t This  table  is  somewhat  different  from  that  given  in 
Wernerian  Memoirs,  (vol.  1.  p.  582,)  an  increased  number 
of  observations  having  enabled  me  to  improve  it. 


THE  WHALE. 


A stout  whale  of  sixty  feet  in  length,  is  of  the 
enormous  weight  of  seventy  tons;  the  blubber  weighs 
about  thirty  tons,  the  hones  of  the  head,  whalebone, 
fins,  and  tail,  eight  or  ten;  carcass  thirty  or  thirty-two. 

The  flesh  of  the  young  whale  is  of  a red  colour; 
and  Avhen  cleared  of  fat,  broiled  and  seasoned  with 
pepper  and  salt,  does  not  eat  unlike  coarse  beef; 
that  of  the  old  whale,  approaches  to  black,  and  is 
exceedingly  coarse.  An  immense  bed  of  muscles, 
surrounding  the  body,  is  appropriated  chiefly  to 
the  movements  of  the  tail.  The  tail  consists  princi- 
pally of  two  reticulated  beds  of  sinewy  fibres,  com- 
pactly interwoven,  and  containing  very  little  oil.  In 
the  central  bed,  the  fibres  run  in  all  directions;  in 
the  other,  which  encompasses  the  central  one  in  a 
thinner  stratum,  they  are  arranged  in  regular  order. 
These  substances  are  extensively  used,  particularly 
in  Holland,  in  the  manufacture  of  glue. 

Most  of  the  hones  of  the  whale  are  very  po- 
rous, and  contain  large  quantities  of  fine  oil.  The 
jaw  bones,  which  measure  twenty  to  twenty-five 
feet  in  length,  are  often  taken  care  of,  princi- 
pally on  account  of  the  oil  that  drains  out  of  them, 
when  they  come  into  a warm  climate.  When  ex- 
hausted of  oil,  they  readily  swim  in  water.  The  ex- 
ternal surface  of  the  most  porous  hones  is  compact 
and  hard;  the  ribs  are  pretty  nearly  solid;  but  the 
crown  bone  is  almost  as  much  honey-combed  as  the 
jaw  bones.  The  number  of  ribs,  according  to  Sir 
Charles  Giesecke,  is  thirteen  on  each  side.  The 


THE  WHALE. 


113 


bones  of  the  fins  are  analogous,  both  in  proportion 
and  number  to  those  of  the  fingers  of  the  human 
hand.  From  this  peculiarity  of  structure,  the  fins 
have  been  denominated  by  Dr.  Fleming,  swim- 
ming paws.’^  The  posterior  extremity  of  the  whale, 
however,  is  a real  tail;  the  termination  of  the  spine, 
or  os  coccygis,  running  through  the  middle  of  it,  al- 
most to  the  edge. 

As  the  whale  is  flensed  while  afloat,  with  nearly 
the  whole  of  the  carcass  under  water,  few  opportu- 
nities of  examining  its  anatomical  structure  occur. 
The  smallest  animals  of  the  species,  mere  cubs  or 

suckers,”  may  indeed  be  hoisted  on  deck;  and  it 
is  in  such  cases  only  that  I have  had  a chance  of 
inspecting  them  entirely  out  of  the  water.  One  of 
these  having  been  taken,  the  head  was  hoisted 
aboard  in  a mass,  and  the  body,  when  stripped  of  the 
fat,  was  so  small  as  to  be  quite  within  the  power  of 
the  tackles.  Some  new  facts,  respecting  the  anatomy 
of  the  whale,  arose  out  of  the  investigation  of  this, 
and  another  of  the  species,  killed  in  the  summer  of 
1821,  which  I shall  attempt  to  describe.  The  follow- 
ing measurements  and  weight,  it  must  be  observed, 
all  refer  to  a sucking  W'hale,  that  at  the  time  of  cap- 
ture, was  under  maternal  protection,  but  the  other 
details  in  general  may  be  considered  as  applying  to 
the  whole  species  of  the  Balsena  Mysticetus. 

This  whale,  though  a sucker,”  was  nineteen 
feet  in  length,  and  fourteen  feet  five  inches  in  cir- 
cumference, at  the  thickest  part  of  the  body.  The 

VoL.  III.^ =15 


114 


THE  WHALE. 


external  skin,  consisting  of  cuticle  and  rete  mucosum, 
was  on  the  body  an  inch  and  three  quarters  thick, 
being  about  twice  the  thickness  of  the  same  mem- 
branes in  a full  grown  animal.  The  blubber,  on  an 
average,  was  five  inches  in  thickness.  The  largest 
of  the  whalebone  measured  only  twelve  inches; 
about  one  half  of  which  was  imbedded  in  the  gum. 
The  external  part  of  these  fringes,  not  exceeding  six 
inches  in  length,  did  not  seem  sufficient  to  enable  the 
little  whale  yet  to  catch,  by  filtration  out  of  the  sea, 
the  shrimps  and  other  insects  on  which  the  animal, 
in  a more  advanced  stage,  is  dependent  for  its  nourish- 
ment: maternal  assistance  and  protection,  therefore, 
appeared  to  have  been  essential  for  its  support. 
The  muscles  about  the  neck,  appropriated  to  the 
movements  of  the  jaws,  formed  a bed,  if  extended,  of 
nearly  five  feet  broad,  and  a foot  thick.  The  cen- 
tral part  of  the  diaphragm  was  two  inches  in  thick- 
ness. The  two  principal  arteries  in  the  neck  (the 
carotid,)  were  so  large  as  to  admit  a man’s  hand  and 
arm. 

The  brain  lies  in  a small  cavity  in  the  upper  and 
back  part  of  the  skull.  The  cavity  included  with- 
in the  jpia  mater,  exclusive  of  the  foramen  magnum, 
measured  only  eight  inches  by  five.  The  upper  part 
of  the  brain  lies  very  near  the  surface  of  the  skull. 
The  convolutions  of  the  cortical  substance  lie  in 
beautiful  fringed  folds,  attached  to  the  medullary 
portion,  which  is  white,  as  in  the  human  brain.  The 
general  appearance  of  the  brain  is  not  unlike  that  of  ' 
the  other  mammalia,  but  its  smallness  is  remarka- 


THE  WHALE. 


115 


hie.  The  quantity  of  brain  in  a human  subject  of 
140  or  160  pounds  weight,  is,  according  to  Haller, 
4 pounds;  in  this  whale,  of  11,200  pounds,  or  se- 
venty  times  the  weight  of  a man,  the  brain  was 
only  3 pounds  12  ounces.  According  to  Cuvier,  the 
brain  in  man  varies  from  one  thirty-first  to  one 
twenty-second  part  of  his  weight;^  whereas,  in 
this  animal,  the  proportion  of  brain  was  only  a three 
thousandth  part. 

The  heart,  which  is  of  an  oblong  form,  much  com- 
pressed, resembles  in  colour  and  substance,  the 
heart  of  an  ox.  The  breadth  of  it,  in  this  specimen, 
was  29  inches,  the  height  12,  the  thickness  9?  and 
the  weight  of  it  641bs.  Diameter  of  the  aorta  about 
6 inches. 

Large  as  the  whale  is  in  bulk,  the  throat  is  but 
narrow.  In  this  animal  the  diameter  of  the  oesopha- 
gus,  when  fully  distended,  was  scarcely  2|  inches, 
with  difficulty  admitting  my  hand. 

The  epiglottis  is  a beautiful  valve,  formed  almost 
like  the  termination  of  the  proboscis  of  an  elephant. 
Though  the  larynx  in  the  whale  has  a free  commu- 
nication with  the  mouth,  as  in  quadrupeds,  yet  the 
mysticetus  does  not  appear  to  have  any  voice.  In 


*Le§ons  d’Anat.  Comp.  ii.  p.  149.  The  proportion  the 
human  brain  bears  to  the  weight  of  the  body,  appears  to  be, 
on  an  average,  less  than  is  stated  by  Cuvier.  According  to 
Haller,  the  proportion  in  a man  of  160lb.  weight  is  one-for- 
tieth; in  a man  of  140lbs.,  one-thirty-fifth,  in  a child  six 
years  old,  onc-twenty-second. 


116 


THE  WHALE, 


other  cetacea,  however,  this  is  not  always  the  case; 
some  of  the  dolphins,  in  particular,  having  been 
heard  to  emit  a shrill  sound,  which  in  the  beluga 
may  be  heard  before  the  animal  arises  to  the  surface 
of  the  water.* 

The  external  blowholes  or  spiracles,  were,  in  the 
sucking  whale,  four  inches  in  length;  in  the  full 
grown  animal,  they  form  two  curved  slits,  above 
ten  inches  long.  In  passing  downward  through  the 
blubber,  the  blowholes,  which  at  the  surface  are 
nearly  longitudinal,  as  in  the  annexed  figure,  a,  a. 


twist  into  a semicircular  and  transverse  position, 
in  the  form  of  the  dotted  line  b,  b,  then  penetrating 
the  skull,  they  proceed  backward  and  downward  in 
two  conical  parallel  canals,  until  they  open  near 
the  back  of  the  under  part  of  the  skull,  where  they 
inosculate  and  form  a single  membranous  sac,  with- 
in a few  inches  of  the  epiglottis.  The  first  impres- 
sion of  each  blowhole  on  the  upper  part  of  the  skull, 
is  marked  as  in  the  following  cut,  (representing  the 
upper  surface  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  whale’s 
skull,  the  skin  and  fat  being  removed,)  by  an  ob- 
long cavity,  h,  h, 


* Captain  Parry’s  Voyage  for  the  discovery  of  a North 
West  passage,  p.  35. 


Posterior. 


Anterior. 


THE  WHALE. 


117 


which  is  tiie  seat  of  a muscular  substance  attached 
by  its  anterior  extremity  to  the  surface  of  the  skull, 
and  also  attached,  by  its  posterior  and  inferior  ex- 
tremity, to  the  interior  of  the  skull,  at  some  depth 
in  the  blowing  canal,  a,  a.  The  part  of  this  mus- 
cle that  penetrates  the  bony  canal,  is  of  a conical 
form,  the  apex  downward,  or  within,  represented  at 
h,  in  the  annexed  figure  of  a vertical  section  of  the 
skull; 


<?■ 


Anterior  portion. 


SO  that,  when  this  interior  portion  contracts,  the 
muscular  cone  b,  is  drawn  tight  into  the  orifice,  and 
completely  closes  the  breathing  canal  a,  a;  while, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  actioii  of  the  external  part  of 
the  muscle  draws  the  conical  plug  forward  and  up- 
ward, and  affords  a free  passage  for  the  air  in  respi- 
ration. This  beautiful  structure  it  is,  (aided,  per- 
haps, by  the  epiglottis,)  that  enables  the  animal. 


118 


THE  WHALE. 


Hiuler  the  immense  pressure  to  which  it  is  sometimes 
exposed,  to  exclude  the  sea-water  from  its  lungs. 
This  pressure,  under  some  depths  to  which  the 
whale  is  known  to  descend,  is  upwards  of  a ton  upon 
every  square  inch;  yet,  so  far  from  the  water  being 
forced  down  the  spiracles,  the  enormous.load  serves 
only  more  effectually  to  press  down,  and  close  the 
valves  that  defend  the  passages  to  the  lungs. 

The  whale  has  no  external  ear,  and  the  opening 
of  the  passage  to  this  organ  is  so  small  as  not  to  be 
easily  discovered.  In  the  sucking  whale,  it  was 
only  one- sixth  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  An  elegant 
contrivance  appears  in  the  meatus  auditorius  exter- 
nusfor  protecting  the  ear  against  pressure  from  with- 
out. It  consists  of  a little  plug,  like  the  end  of  the 
finger,  inserted  into  a corresponding  cavity,  in  the 
midst  of  the  canal,  by  a slight  motion  of  which  the 
opening  can  either  be  effectually  shut  for  the  exclu- 
sion of  the  sea-water,  or  opened  for  the  admission 
of  sound. 

In  the  sucking  whale,  the  skull  or  crown  bone 
was  six  feet  in  length,  from  the  anterior  extremity 
to  the  condyles.  In  a full  grown  animal,  in  which 
the  whalebone  was  ten  feet  four  inches,  the  length 
of  the  skull,  measured  along  the  upper  and  convex 
side  of  the  curve,  was  twenty  feet  eight  inches,  the  ' 
cavity  on  the  crown  of  the  same,  occupied  by  the 
muscular  valve  of  the  blow-holes,  was  14  inches 
wide,  and  SI  inches  long. 


THE  WHALE. 


119 


The  whale  being  very  nearly  of  the  same  specific 
gravity  as  sea- water,  (some  few  individuals  sinking, 
and  others  barely  floating  when  dead)  the  weight 
may  be  calculated  with  considerable  precision. 
The  body  of  the  whale  may  be  divided  into  three 
segments,  forming  tolerably  regular  geometric  solids. 
First;  the  head  a parabolic  conoid,  which  in  the 
sucking- whale  is  four  feet  in  diameter,  and  five  and 
a half  feet  in  height;  its  solid  contents  about  thirty- 
four  and  a half  cubic  feet.  Secondly;  the  middle 
segment,  extending  from  the  head  to  the  thickest 
part  of  the  body:  this  is  a frustum  of  a cone  in  the 
sucking-whale,  three  feet  in  length,  and  four  to 
five  feet  in  diameter,  producing  a solid  content  of 
forty-eight  cubic  feet.  Thirdly;  the  posterior  seg- 
ment, extending  from  the  greatest  circumference^ to 
the  tail:  this  segment  is  a paraboloid  or  parabolic 
conoid,  with  its  smaller  end  truncated.  Its  length 
in  the  sucking-whale  is  eight  feet;  its  diameters  one 
and  five  feet;  and  its  solid  contents  eighty-one  and  a 
half  cubic  feet.  And  to  these  products  may  be  add- 
ed about  ten  cubic  feet,  the  estimated  bulk  of  the 
fins  and  tail,  which  make  an  amount  of  174'  cubic 
feet;  this  sum,  divided  by  35,  the  number  of  cubic 
feet  of  sea-water  in  the  Greenland  ocean,  in  a ton 
weight,  gives  the  weight  of  the  animal  five  tons 
within  a cubic  foot. 

One  of  the  largest  mysticete,  of  sixty  feet  in 
length,  the  head  twenty  feet  in  length,  by  twelve 
feet  in  diameter,  the  middle  section  six  feet  by  thir- 


120 


THE  WHALE. 


teen  diameter,  the  third  section  twenty-six  feet  in 
length,  by  twelve  and  two  feet  diameter,  will  appear 
(if  calculated  the  same  way  with  an  allowance  of 
five  tons  for  the  fins  and  tail)  to  be  of  the  pro- 
digious weight  of  lldi  tons!  But  as  the  last  sec- 
tion is  somewhat  more  slender  than  the  body  to 
which  it  is  referred,  this  calculation  may  be  a little 
in  excess. 

The  largest  animals  of  this  species  may,  however, 
I conceive,  be  safely  stated  at  a hundred  tons  in 
weight;  and  an  ordinary  full  grown  animal  at  se- 
venty tons. 

The  most  useful  and  ennobling  view  of  natural 
history  is,  unquestionably,  that  which  gives  us  the 
most  exalted  conceptions  of  the  wisdom,  power,  and 
goodness  of  the  Creator.  And  the  branch  of  this 
science,  that  is  in  the  highest  degree  calculated  to 
assist  us  in  tracing  ^^the  works  of  Nature  up  to 
Nature’s  God,”  is  probably  the  physiology  of  ani- 
mals. In  every  genus  of  animals  we  discover  pe- 
culiar marks  of  adaptation  for  their  economy  or 
mode  of  life,  and  an  endless  variety  of  inimitable 
contrivances  for  accomplishing  this  adaptation. 

The  whale,  which  is  a mammiferous  animal,  and 
closely  allied,  in  its  anatomical  structure  to  the 
class  of  quadrupeds,  affords,  in  the  modification  of 
the  parts  and  principles  of  land  animals,  for  apply- 
ing them  to  a tribe  inhabiting  the  sea,  a great  num- 
ber of  those  striking  displays  of  wisdom  and  power, 
the  very  contemplation  of  which  is  calculated  to 


THE  WHALE. 


121 


elevate  in  no  inconsiderable  degree,  our  concep- 
tions of  the  Great  Supreme.  The  raysticetus  feeds 
on  the  smallest  insects;  its  capacious  mouth,  with 
the  vast  fringes  of  whalebone,  which  is  a most  ad- 
mirable filter,  enables  it  to  receive  some  tons  of 
water  at  a mouthful,  and  to  separate  every  substance 
from  it,  of  the  size  of  a pin’s  head  and  upwards. 
The  pliysalis  feeds  on  herrings,  mackarel  and  other 
fishes  of  a similar  kind;  its  whalebone  therefore  is 
shorter,  stronger,  and  less  compact  than  that  of  the 
mysticetus,  and  the  filter  formed  by  it  less  perfect. 

As  the  whale  must  rise  to  the  surface  of  the  sea 
to  breathe,  its  tail  is  placed  horizontally,  to  enable 
it  to  ascend  and  descend  more  quickly;  and  its  nos- 
trils, or  blowholes,  instead  of  being  placed  at  the 
snout,  are  generally  on  the  most  elevated  part  of 
the  head,  that  they  may  be  readily  lifted  clear  of 
the  water. 

When  the  whale  descends  to  the  depths  of  the 
ocean,  it  becomes  exposed  to  an  enormous  pressure 
from  the  superincumbent  water.  This  pressure  is 
sufficient  to  force  the  water  through  the  pores  of  the 
hardest  wood;  yet  it  is  effectually  resisted  by  the 
skin  of  the  whale,  though  it  is  remarkably  soft  and 
flexible.  To  exclude  the  water  from  the  lungs, 
which  would  occasion  suffocation  if  admitted,  the 
blowholes  are  defended  by  the  peculiar  valves  that 
have  been  already  described. 

The  variety  discovered  in  the  structure  of  whales, 
is  by  no  means  one  of  the  least  interesting  parts  of 

VoL. 


122 


THE  WHALE. 


their  physiology.  In  other  classes  of  animals, 
whose  habits  are  similar,  we  often  find,  that  each 
organ  is  the  same  as  the  corresponding  one,  in  al- 
most  all  the  species  of  the  same  genus,  or  even  of 
the  same  order;  excepting  when  their  peculiar 
habits,  or  necessities,  require  a modification  of  the 
general  structure  or  principle.  But  in  whales,  as 
if  it  were  intended  not  only  to  exhibit  the  match- 
less wisdom  of  the  Creator,  but,  to  show  that  his 
resources  are  unlimited,  the  structure  of  the  breath- 
ing canals  is  varied  in  the  different  genera  of  ce- 

Vf 

taceous  animals,  and  a number  of  contrivances  alike 
extraordinary,  equally  beautiful,  and  equally  efli» 
cient,  are  adapted  for  performing  the  same  office. 


THE  WHALK 


123 


C b-  O O 

CO  o 


c <o  o o o 


T-<  00  o> 

^ rH  V)  ^ ^ 


o 


o 

o> 


>^s 


o 


VD  O O O <C 


Ji 


C<NOtO^OOOOOOO'^0<£MOO 


i-(<NCOCO^  I-It-H 


^ o o o o o 


8 s 

o §j 
S K 
8 8 
«5 

^ s 

s>  8 

■§  s 

•Ks  ^ 

I. 


w 

w 

«< 


c o o ^ o 

*:  00  00  o 

fe  cs  ^ 


c 

o 

Xi 

V 

V. 

Xi 


0>  ^ 


o S O 


u 

O 

■Z3  'O 

'a  S 

43  m t», 

— tg  O 

tn  C r’  *~ 

o ^ 
c 


s 
a S 

^ 'o 


p 


iS 


o « ^ ,o>  o 
c.^  « p-^  - 

■p:  « 1)  3 «■> 

c t-  y O c 
c 6c  E ^ Ji 

O ^ P -P 


: 3p5 

C l; 


• jj  “ 
o 5 o 


^ g 


COOO  (^OOOO^COC^  c> 

V)  «)  tv.  O C^  0>  (N  5=1  ■>* 

^ 1-^ 


j£-5S‘~j£'S  c 
'Zr^  £l0  rt  t-’ 
fen  ««  C bo  rt  4J 
C "W  o t ff  ^ 0> 

^ ^ ^ X V ^ 


Cl. 


The  whale  seems  dull  of  hearing.  A noise  in 
the  air,  such  as  that  produced  by  a person  shouting, 
is  not  noticed  by  it,  though  at  the  distance  only  of 
a ship’s  length;  but  a very  slight  splashing  in  the 
water  in  calm  weather  excites  its  attention,  and 
alarms  it. 


124 


THE  WHALE. 


Its  sense  of  seeing  is  acute,  whales  are  observed 
to  discover  one  another  in  clear  water,  when  under 
the  surface,  at  an  amazing  distance.  When  at  the 
surface,  however,  they  do  not  see  far. 

They  have  no  voice;  but  in  breathing  or  blowing, 
they  make  a very  loud  noise.  The  vapour  they 
discharge  is  ejected  to  the  height  of  some  yards, 
and  appears  at  a distance,  like  a puff  of  smoke. 
When  the  animals  are  wounded,  it  is  often  stained 
with  blood;  and,  on  the  approach  of  death,  jets  of 
blood  are  sometimes  discharged  alone.  They  blow 
strongest,  densest,  and  loudest,  when  running.” 
When  in  a state  of  alarm,  or  w'hen  they  first  ap- 
pear at  the  surface,  after  being  a long  time  down, 
they  respire  or  blow  about  four  or  five  times  a 
minute. 

The  whale  being  somewhat  lighter  than  the  me- 
dium in  which  it  swims,  can  remain  at  the  surface 
of  the  sea,  with  its  crown,”  in  which  the  blow- 
holes are  situated,  and  a considerable  extent  of  the 
back,  above  water,  without  any  effort  or  motion. 
To  descend,  however,  requires  an  exertion.  The 
proportion  of  the  whale  that  appears  above  water, 
when  alive,  or  when  recently  killed,  is  probably 
not  a twentieth  part  of  the  animal;  but  within  a day 
after  death,  when  the  process  of  putrefaction  com- 
mences, the  whale  swells  to  an  enormous  size,  until 
at  least  a third  of  the  carcass  appears  above  water, 
and  sometimes  the  body  is  burst  by  the  force  of  air 
generated  within. 


THE  WHALE. 


125 


By  means  of  the  tail  principally,  the  whale  ad- 
vances through  the  water.  The  greatest  velocity 
is  produced  by  powerful  strokes  against  the  water, 
impressed  alternately  upward  and  downward;  but  a 
slower  motion,  it  is  believed,  is  elegantly  produced, 
by  cutting  the  water  laterally  and  obliquely  down- 
ward, in  a manner  similar  to  that  in  which  a boat  is 
forced  along,  with  a single  oar,  by  the  operation  of 
skulling.  The  fins  are  generally  stretched  out  in  an 
horizontal  position;  their  chief  application  seems  to 
be,  the  balancing  of  the  animal,  as  the  moment  life  is 
extinct,  it  alw^ays  falls  over  on  its  side,  or  turns  upon 
its  back.  They  appear  also  to  be  used  in  bearing 
off  their  young,  in  turning,  and  giving  a direction 
to  the  velocity  produced  by  the  tail. 

Bulky  as  the  whale  is,  and  inactive,  or  indeed 
clumsy  as  it  appears  to  be,  one  might  imagine  that 
all  its  motions  w’ould  be  sluggish,  and  its  greatest 
exertions  productive  of  but  little  celerity.  The  fact, 
however,  is  the  reverse.  A whale  extended  mo- 
tionless at  the  surface  of  the  sea,  can  sink  in  the 
space  of  five  or  six  seconds  or  less,  beyond  the 
reach  of  its  human  enemies.  Its  velocity  along  the 
surface,  or  perpendicularly,  or  obliquely  down- 
ward, is  the  same.  I have  observed  a whale  de- 
scending after  I had  harpooned  it,  to  the  depth  of 
400  fathoms,  with  the  average  velocity  of  seven  or 
eight  miles  per  hour.  The  usual  rate  at  which 
whales  swim,  however,  even  when  they  are  on 
their  passage  from  one  situation  to  another,  seldom 


13G 


THK  WHALE. 


exceeds  four  miles  an  hour;  and  though,  when  urged 
by  the  sight  of  any  enemy,  or  alarmed  by  the  stroke 
of  a harpoon,  their  extreme  velocity  may  be  at  the 
rate  of  eight  or  nine  miles  an  hour;  yet  we  find  this 
speed  never  continues  longer  than  for  a few  min- 
utes, before  it  relaxes  to  almost  one  half;  hence,  for 
the  space  of  a few  minutes,  they  are  capable  of 
darting  through  the  water,  with  the  velocity  almost 
of  the  fastest  ship  under  sail,  and  of  ascending 
with  such  rapidity  as  to  leap  entirely  out  of  the 
water.  This  feat  they  sometimes  perform  as  an 
amusement  apparently,  to  the  high  admiration  of 
the  distant  spectators;  but  to  the  no  small  terror 
of  the  inexperienced  fishers,  who  even  under  such 
circumstances,  are  often  ordered,  by  the  fool-hardy 
harpooner,  to  pull  away,”  to  the  attack.  Some- 
times, the  whales  throw  themselves  into  a per- 
pendicular posture,  with  their  heads  downwards, 
and  rearing  their  tails  on  high  in  the  air,  heat 
the  water  with  awful  violence.  In  both  these 
cases,  the  sea  is  thrown  into  foam,  and  the  air 
filled  with  vapours:  the  noise  in  calm  weather  is 
heard  to  a great  distance;  and  the  concentric  waves, 
produced  by  the  concussions  on  the  water,  are  com- 
muicated  abroad  to  a considerable  extent.  Some- 
times the  whale  shakes  its  tremendous  tail  in  the 
air,  which,  cracking  like  a whip,  resounds  to  the 
distance  of  two  or  three  miles. 

When  it  retires  from  the  surface,  it  first  lifts  its 
head,  then  plunging  it  under  water,  elevates  its 


THE  WHALE. 


127 


back,  like  the  segment  of  a sphere,  deliberately 
rounds  it  away  towards  the  extremity,  throws  its 
tail  out  of  the  water,  and  then  disappears. 

In  their  usual  conduct,  whales  remain  at  the  sur- 
face to  breathe,  about  two  minutes,  seldom  longer; 
during  which  time,  they  blow”  eight  or  nine 
times,  and  then  descend  for  an  interval  usually  of 
five  or  ten  minutes,  but  sometimes,  when  feed- 
ing, fifteen  or  twenty.  The  depth  to  which  they 
commonly  descend,  is  not  known,  though,  from  the 
eddy  occasionally  observed  on  the  water,  it  is  evi- 
dently at  times,  only  trifling.  But  when  struck,  the 
quantity  of  line  they  sometimes  take  out  of  the  boats, 
in  a perpendicular  descent,  affords  a good  measure 
of  the  depth.  By  this  rule,  they  have  been  known 
to  descend  to  the  depth  of  an  English  mile,  and  with 
such  velocity,  that  instances  have  occurred,  in  which 
whales  have  been  drawn  up  by  the  line  attached, 
from  a depth  of  700  or  800  fathoms,  and  have  been 
found  to  have  broken  their  jaw-bones,  and  some- 
times crown-bone,  by  the  blow  struck  against  the 
bottom.  Some  persons  are  of  opinion,  that  whales 
can  remain  under  a field  of  ice,  or  at  the  bottom  of 
the  sea  in  shallow  w^ater,  when  undisturbed,  for 
many  hours  at  a time.  Whales  are  seldom  found 
sleeping,  yet,  in  calm  weather,  among  ice,  instances 
occasionally  occur. 

The  food  of  the  whale  consists  of  various  species 
of  actinise,  cliones,  sepise,  medusae^  caneri,  and 


128 


THE  WHALE. 


helices,  or,  at  least,  some  of  these  genera  are  al- 
ways to  be  seen,  wherever  any  tribe  of  whales  is 
found  stationary  and  feeding.  In  the  dead  animals, 
however,  in  the  very  few  instances,  in  which  I have 
been  enabled  to  open  their  stomachs,  squillse  or 
shrimps,  were  the  only  substances  discovered.  In 
the  mouth  of  a whale  just  killed,  I once  found  a 
quantity  of  the  same  kind  of  insect. 

When  the  whale  feeds,  it  swims  with  considera- 
ble velocity  below  the  surface  of  the  sea,  with  its 
jaws  widely  extended.  A stream  of  water  conse- 
quently enters  its  capacious  mouth,  and  along  with 
it  large  quantities  of  water  insects;  the  water  escapes 
again  at  the  sides;  but  the  food  is  entangled  and 
sifted,  as  it  were,  by  the  whalebone,  which,  from 
its  compact  arrangement,  and  the  thick  internal 
covering  of  hair,  does  not  allow  a particle  the  size 
of  the  smallest  grain  to  escape. 

There  does  not  seem  to  be  suflScient  dissimilarity 
in  the  form  and  appearance  of  the  mysticete  found 
in  the  polar  seas,  to  entitle  them  to  a division  into 
other  species;  yet  such  is  the  diiference  observed  in 
the  proportions  of  these  animals,  that  they  may  be 
well  considered  as  sub-species  or  varieties.  In 
some  of  the  mysticete,  the  head  measures  four  tenths 
of  the  whole  length  of  the  animal;  in  others,  scarce- 
ly three  tenths;  in  some  the  circumference  is  up- 
wards of  seven  tenths  of  the  length,  in  others  less 
than  six  tenths,  or  tittle  more  than  one  half. 


THE  WHALE. 


129 


The  sexual  intercourse  of  whales,  is  often  ob- 
served about  the  latter  end  of  summer;  and  females, 
with  cubs  or  suckers  along  with  them,  being  most 
commonly  met  with  in  the  spring  of  the  year,  the 
time  of  their  bringing  forth,  it  is  presumed,  is  in 
February  or  March;  and  their  period  of  gestation 
about  nine  or  ten  months.  In  the  latter  end  of 
April,  1811,  a sucker  was  taken  by  a Hull  whaler, 
to  which  the  funis  umbilicalis  was  still  attached. 
The  whale  has  one  young  at  a birth.  Instances  of 
two  being  seen  with  a female  are  very  rare.  Tiie 
young  .one,  at  the  time  of  parturition,  is  said  to  be 
at  least  ten,  if  not  fourteen  feet  in  length.  It  goes  un- 
der the  protection  of  its  mother  for  probably  a year, 
or  more;  or  until,  by  the  evolution  of  the  whalebone, 
it  is  enabled  to  procure  its  own  nourishment.  Sup- 
posing the  criterion  before  mentioned,  of  the  notches 
in  the  whalebone  being  indicative  of  the  number  of 
years  growth,  to  be  correct,  then  it  would  appear 
that  the  whale  reaches  the  magnitude  called  size, 
that  is,  with  a six  feet  length  of  whalebone,  in 
twelve  years,  and  attains  its  full  growth  at  the  age 
of  twenty  or  twenty -five.  Whales,  doubtless,  live 
to  a great  age.  The  marks  of  age  are,  increase  in 
the  quantity  of  gray  colour  in  the  skin,  and  a 
change  to  a yellowish  tinge  of  the  white  parts  about 
the  head;  a decrease  in  the  quantity  of  oil  yielded 
by  a certain  weight  of  blubber;  an  increase  of  hard- 
ness in  the  blubber,  and  in  the  thickness  and  strength 
VoL.  III. 17 


130 


THE  WHALE. 


of  the  ligamentous  fibres  of  which  it  is  partly  com- 
posed. 

The  maternal  affection  of  the  whale,  which,  in 
other  respects,  is  apparently  a stupid  animal,  is  strik- 
ing and  interesting,  the  cub,  being  insensible  to  dan- 
ger, is  easily  harpooned;  when  the  tender  attachment 
of  the  mother  is  so  manifested  as  not  unfrequently  to 
bring  her  within  the  reach  of  the  whalers.  Hence, 
though  a cub  is  of  little  value,  seldom  producing 
above  a ton  of  oil,  and  often  less,  yet  il  is  sometimes 
struck  as  a snare  for  its  mother.  In  this  case  she 
joins  it  at  the  surface  of  the  water,  whenever  it  has 
occasion  to  rise  for  respiration;  encourages  it  to 
swim  off;  assists  its  flight,  by  taking  it  under  her 
fin,  and  seldom  deserts  it  while  life  remains.  She 
is  then  dangerous  to  approach;  but  affords  frequent 
opportunities  for  attack.  She  loses  all  regard  for 
her  own  safety,  in  anxiety  for  the  preservation  of 
her  young;  dashes  through  the  midst  of  her  ene- 
mies; despises  the  danger  that  threatens  her;  and 
even  voluntarily  remains  with  her  ofispring,  after 
various  attacks  on  herself,  from  the  harpoons  of  the 
fishers.  In  June,  1811,  one  of  my  harpooners 
struck  a sucker,  with  the  hope  of  its  leading  to  the 
capture  of  the  mother.  Presently  she  arose  close 
by  the  fast  boat,”  and  seizing  the  young  one, 
dragged  about  a hundred  fathoms  of  line  with  re- 
markable force  and  velocity.  Again  she  arose  to 
the  surfiice;  darted  furiously  to  and  fi‘o;  frequently 


THE  WHAI.E. 


131 


stopped  short,  or  suddenly  changed  her  direction, 
and  gave  every  possible  intimation  of  extreme  agony. 
For  a length  of  time  she  continued  thus  to  act, 
though  closely  pursued  by  the  boats;  and,  inspired 
with  courage  and  resolution  by  the  concern  for  her 
offspring,  seemed  regardless  of  the  danger  which  sur- 
rounded her.  At  length  one  of  the  boats  approached 
so  near  that  a harpoon  was  hove  at  her.  It  hit,  but 
did  not  attach  itself.  A second  harpoon  was  struck; 
this  also  failed  to  penetrate;  but  a third  was  more 
effectual,  and  held.  Still  she  did  not  attempt  to 
escape;  but  allowed  other  boats  to  approach;  so 
that,  in  a few  minutes,  three  more  harpoons  were 
fastened;  and,  in  the  course  of  an  hour  afterwards, 
she  was  killed. 

There  is  something  extremely  painful  in  the  de- 
struction of  a whale,  when  thus  evincing  a degree 
of  affectionate  regard  for  its  offspring,  that  would  do 
honour  to  the  superior  intelligence  of  human  beings; 
yet  the  object  of  the  adventure,  tlie  value  of  the 
prize,  the  joy  of  the  capture,  can  not  be  sacrificed 
to  feelings  of  compassion.  Whales,  though  often 
found  in  great  numbers  together,  can  scarcely  be 
said  to  be  gregarious;  found  most  generally  solitary, 
or  in  pairs,  excepting  when  drawn  to  the  same  spot, 
by  the  attraction  of  an  abundance  of  palatable  food, 
or  a choice  situation  of  the  ice. 

The  superiority  of  the  sexes,  in  point  of  numbers, 
seems  to  be  in  favour  of  the  male.  Of  124  whales 
which  have  been  taken  near  Spitzbergen,  in  eight 


133 


THE  WHALE. 


years,  in  ships  commanded  by  myself,  70  were  males, 
and  54  were  females,  being  in  the  proportion  of  five  to 
four  nearly.  The  mysticetus  occurs  most  abundant- 
ly  in  the  frozen  seas  of  Greenland  and  Davis’s  Strait 
— in  the  bays  of  BaflSn  and  Hudson — in  the  sea  to 
the  northward  of  Behring’s  Strait,  and  along  some 
parts  of  the  northern  shores  of  Asia,  and  probably 
America.  It  is  never  met  with  in  the  German  Ocean, 
and  rarely  within  200  leagues  of  the  British  coast; 
but  along  tlie  coasts  of  Africa  and  South  America, 
it  is  met  with  periodically  in  considerable  numbers. 
In  these  regions  it  is  attacked  and  captured  by  the 
Southern  British  and  American  Whalers,  as  well 
as  by  some  of  the  people  inhabiting  the  coasts,  to 
the  neighbourhood  of  which  it  resorts.  Whether 
this  whale  is  precisely  of  the  same  kind  as  that  of 
Spitzbergen  and  Greenland,  is  uncertain,  though  it 
is  evidently  a mysticetus.  One  striking  difference, 
possibly  the  efiect  of  situation  and  climate,  is,  that 
the  mysticetus  found  in  southern  regions  is  often  co- 
vered with  barnacles,  (Lepas  diadema,  &c.)  wdiile 
those  of  the  Arctic  seas  are  free  from  these  shell- 
fish. 

It  would  be  remarkable,  if  an  animal  like  the 
whale,  which  is  so  timid  that  a bird  alighting  upon 
its  back  sometimes  sets  it  off  in  great  agitation  and 
terror,  should  be  wholly  devoid  of  enemies.  Be- 
sides man,  who  is  doubtless  its  most  formidable 
adversary,  it  is  subject  t®  annoyance  from  sharks, 
and  it  is  also  said  from  the  narwal,  sword-fish,  and 


THE  WHALE. 


133 


thresher.  With  regard  to  the  iiarwal,  I am  per- 
suaded that  this  opinion  is  incorrect,  for  so  far  from 
its  being  an  enemy,  it  is  found  to  associate  with  the 
whale  in  the  greatest  apparent  harmony,  and  its 
appearance,  indeed,  in  the  Greenland  sea  is  hailed 
by  the  fishers,  the  narwal  being  considered  as  the 
harbinger  of  the  whale.  But  the  swmrd-fish  and 
thresher,  (if  such  an  animal  there  be)  may  possibly 
be  among  the  enemies  of  the  whale,  notwithstand- 
ing I have  never  witnessed  their  combats;  and  the 
shark  is  known  certainly  to  be  an  enemy,  thougli 
perhaps  not  a very  formidable  one.  Whales  indeed 
flee  the  seas  where  it  abounds,  and  evince  by  marks 
occasionally  found  on  their  tails,  a strong  evidence 
of  their  havingbeenbit  by  the  shark.  A living  whale 
may  be  annoyed,  though  it  can  scarcely  be  supposed 
to  be  ever  overcome  by  the  shark;  but  a dead  whale 
is  an  easy  prey,  and  affords  a fine  banquet  to  this 
insatiable  creature. 

The  whale,  from  its  vast  bulk,  and  variety  of 
products,  is  of  great  importance  in  commerce,  as 
well  as  in  the  domestic  economy  of  savage  nations; 
and  its  oil  and  whalebone  are  of  extensive  applica- 
tion in  the  arts  and  manufactures.  A description  of 
its  most  valuable  products,  and  of  the  uses  to  which 
they  are  applied,  being  included  in  the  account  of 
the  whale  fishery,  which  follows,  it  will  only  be 
necessary,  in  this  place,  to  mention  the  purposes  to 
which  parts  and  products,  not  now  objects  of  com- 
merce, arc  or  might  be  applied. 


134 


Till':;  WHAi-K. 


Though  to  the  refined  palate  of  a modem  Euro- 
pean, the  flesh  of  a whale,  as  an  article  of  food, 
would  be  received  with  abhorrence,  yet  we  find 
that  it  is  considered  by  some  of  the  inhabitants  of 
the  northern  shores  of  Europe,  Asia,  and  America, 
as  well  as  those  on  the  coasts  of  Hudson’s  Bay, 
and  Davis’s  strait,  as  a choice  and  staple  article  of 
snbsistence.  The  Esquimaux  eat  the  flesh  and 
fat  of  the  whale,  and  drink  the  oil  with  greediness. 
Indeed,  some  tribes,  who  are  not  familiarized  with 
spiritous  liquors,  carry  along  with  them  in  their 
canoes,  in  their  fishing  excursions,  bladders  filled 
with  oil,  whicli  they  use  in  the  same  way,  and  with 
a similar  relish,  that  a British  sailor  does  a dram.'^' 
They  also  eat  the  skin  of  the  whale  raw,  both 
adults  and  children;  for  it  is  not  uncommon,  when 
the  females  visit  the  whale-ships,  for  them  to  help 
themselves  to  pieces  of  skin,  preferring  those  with 
which  a little  blubber  is  connected,  and  to  give  it  as 
food  to  their  infants  suspended  on  their  backs,  who 
suck  it  with  apparent  delight. 

Blubber,  when  pickled  and  boiled,  is  said  to  be 
very  palatable;  the  tail,  wheai  parboiled  and  then 
fried,  is  said  to  be  not  unsavoury,  but  even  agreea- 
ble eating;  and  the  flesh  of  young  whales,  I know 
IVom  experiment,  is  by  no  means  indiflerent  food. 

ot  only  is  it  certain  that  the  flesh  of  the  whale 
is  now  eaten  by  savage  nations,  but  it  is  also  well 


* Ellis’s  voyage  to  Hudson’s  Bay,  p,  233. 


THE  WHALE. 


135 


authenticated  that,  in  the  1:3th,  13th,  l4th,  and  15th 
centuries,  it  was  used  as  food  by  the  Icelanders, 
the  Netherlanders,  the  French,  the  Spanish,  and 
probably  by  the  English.  M.  S.  B.  Noel,  in  a 
tract  on  the  whale  fishery,^' informs  us,  that  about  the 
13th  century,  the  flesh,  particularly  the  tongue  of 
whales,  was  sold  in  the  markets  of  Bayonne,  Ci- 
bourre  and  Beariz,  where  it  was  esteemed  as  a great 
delicacy,  being  used  at  the  best  tables;  and  even  so 
late  as  the  15th  century,  he  conceives,  from  the  au- 
thority of  Charles  Etienne,  that  the  principal  nour- 
ishment of  tlie  poor  in  Lent,  in  some  districts  of 
France,  consisted  of  the  flesh  and  fat  of  the  whale. 

Besides  forming  a choice  eatable,  the  inferior 
products  of  the  whale  are  applied  to  other  purposes 
by  the  Indian  and  Esquimaux  of  Arctic  countries, 
and  with  some  nations  are  essential  to  their  com- 
fort, some  membranes  of  the  abdomen  are  used  for 
an  upper  article  of  clothing,  and  the  peritoneum,  in 
particular,  being  thin  and  transparent,  is  used  in- 
stead of  glass  in  the  windows  of  their  huts;  the 
bones  are  converted  into  ha,rpoons  and  spears,  for 
striking  the  seal,  or  darting  at  the  sea-birds,  and 
are  also  employed  in  the  erection  of  their  tents,  and 
with  some  tribes,  in  the  formation  of  their  boats;  the 
sinews  are  divided  into  filaments,  and  used  as 
thread,  Avith  which  they  join  the  seams  of  their 


■*  Memoire  sur  “ I’Antiquite  de  la  Peche  de  la  Baleine  pai’ 
les  nations  Europeennes.” 


13G 


THE  AVIIALE. 


coats  and  tent  cloths,  and  sew  with  great  taste  and 
nicety  the  different  articles  of  dress  they  manufac- 
ture; and  the  whalebone  and  other  superior  pro- 
ducts, so  valuable  in  European  markets,  have  also 
their  uses  among  them. 

I shall  conclude  this  account  of  the  mysticetus, 
with  a sketch  of  some  of  the  characters  which  be- 
long generally  to  cetaceous  animals. 

Whales  are  viviparous:  they  have  but  one  young 
at  a time,  and  suckle  it  with  teats.  They  are  fur- 
nislied  with  lungs,  and  are  under  the  necessity  of 
approaching  the  surface  of  the  water  at  intervals  to 
respire  in  the  air.  The  heart  has  two  Ventricles 
and  two  auricles.  The  blood  is  warmer  than  in 
the  human  species;  in  a narwal  that  had  been  an 
liour  and  a half  dead,  the  temperature  of  the  blood 
was  97°;  and  in  a mysticetus  recently  killed  102°. 
All  of  them  inhabit  the  sea.  Some  of  them  pro- 
cure their  food  by  means  of  a kind  of  sieve,  com- 
posed of  two  fringes  of  whalebone;  these  have 
no  teeth.  Others  have  no  whalebone,  but  are 
furnished  Avith  teeth.  They  all  have  two  lateral  or 
pectoral  fins,  wiih  concealed  bones  like  those  of  a 
hand;  and  a large  flexible  horizontal  tail,  which  is 
the  principal  member  of  motion.  Some  have  a 
kind  of  dorsal  fin,  which  is  .an  adipose  or  cartila- 
ginous substance,  without  motion.  This  fin, \ary- 
ing  in  form,  size,  and  position,  in  different  spqcies, 
and  being  in  a conspicuous  situation,  is  Avell  adapt- 


THE  KAZOR-BACK. 


137 


ed  for  a specific  distinction.  The  appearance  and 
dimensions  of  the  whalebone  and  teeth,  especially 
the  former,  are  other  specific  characteristics.  All 
whales  have  spiracles  or  blowholes,  some  with  one, 
others  with  two  openings,  through  which  they 
breathe;  some  have  a smooth  skin  all  over  the  body; 
others  have  rugae  or  sulci  about  the  region  of  the 
thorax  and  on  the  lower  jaw.  And  all  afford,  be- 
neatli  the  integuments,  a quantity  of  fat  or  blubber, 
from  whence  a useful  and  valuable  oil,  the  train  oil 
of  commerce,  is  extracted. 


Species  II.— TAe  Razor-back, 

Balaena  Physalis;  L. 

Balsenoptera  Gihhar;  La  Cepede. 

This  is  the  longest  animal  of  the  whale  tribe; 
and  probably,  the  most  powerful  and  bulky  of 
created  beings.  It  differs  from  the  mysticetus,  in  its 
form  being  less  cylindrical,  and  its  body  longer  and 
more  slender;  in  its  whalebone  being  shorter;  its 
produce  in  blubber  and  oil  being  less;  in  its  colour 
being  of  a bluer  tinge;  in  its  fins  being  more  in  num- 
ber, in  its  breathing  or  blowing  being  more  vio- 
lent; in  its  speed  being  greater;  in  its  actions  being 
quicker  and  more  restless,  and  in  its  conduct  being 
bolder. 

VoL.  III. 


18 


138 


THE  RAZOR-BACK. 


The  length  of  the  physalis  is  about  100  feet;  its 
greatest  circumference  30  or  35.  The  body  is  not 
cylindrical,  but  is  considerably  compressed  on  the 
side,  and  angular  at  the  back.  A transverse  sec- 
tion near  the  fins  is  an  oblong,  and  at  the  rump  a 
rhombus.  The  longest  lamina  of  whalebone  mea- 
sures about  four  feet;  it  affords  ten  or  twelve  tons  of 
blubber.  Its  colour  is  a pale  bluish  black,  or  dark 
bluish  gray,  in  which  it  resembles  the  sucking  mys- 
ticetus.  Besides  the  two  pectoral  fins,  it  has  a small 
horny  protuberance,  or  rayless  and  immoveable  fin, 
on  the  extremity  of  the  back.  Its  blowing  is  very 
violent,  and  may  be  heard  in  calm  weather,  at  the 
distance  of  about  a mile.  It  swims  with  a velocity  at 
the  greatest  of  about  twelve  miles  an  hour.  It  is  by 
no  means  a timid  animal,  yet  it  does  not  appear  to 
be  revengeful  or  mischievous.  When  closely  pur- 
sued by  boats,  it  manifests  little  fear,  and  does  not 
attempt  to  outstrip  them  in  the  race;  but  merely  en- 
deavours to  avoid  them  by  diving  or  changing  its 
direction.  If  harpooned,  or  otherwise  wounded,  it 
then  exerts  all  its  energies,  and  escapes  with  its  ut- 
most velocity,  but  shows  little  disposition  to  retaliate 
on  its  enemies,  or  to  repel  their  attacks  by  engaging 
in  a combat.  Though  at  a distance  the  physalis  is 
sometimes  mistaken  by  the  whalers  for  the  raysti- 
cetus;  yet  its  appearance  and  actions  are  so  different, 
that  it  may  be  generally  distinguished.  It  seldom 
lies  quietly  on  the  surface  of  the  w ater  when  blow- 
ing, but  usually  has  a velocity  of  four  or  five  miles 


THE  RAZOR-BACK. 


4 39 

an  hour;  and  when  it  descends,  it  very  rarely  throws 
its  tail  in  the  air,  w'hich  is  a very  general  practice 
with  the  niystieetus. 

The  great  speed  and  activity  of  the  physalis, 
render  it  a difficult  and  dangerous  object  of  attack; 
while  the  small  quantity  of  inferior  oil  it  affords, 
makes  it  unworthy  the  general  attention  of  the  fish- 
ers. When  struck,  it  frequently  drags  tlie  fast 
boat  with  such  speed  through  the  water,  that  it  is 
liable  to  be  carried  immediately  beyond  the  reach 
of  assistance,  and  soon  out  of  sight  of  both  boats 
and  ship.  Hence  the  striker  is  under  the  necessity 
of  cutting  the  line,  and  sacrificing  his  employer’s 
property,  for  securing  the  safety  of  himself  and 
companions.  I have  made  different  attempts  to 
capture  one  of  these  formidable  creatures.  In  the. 
year  1818, 1 ordered  a general  chase  of  them,  pro- 
viding  against  the  danger  of  having  my  crew  sepa- 
rated from  the  ship,  by  appointing  a rendezvous  on 
the  shore,  not  far  distant,  and  preparing  against  the 
loss  of  much  line,  by  dividing  it  at  200  fathoms  from 
the  harpoon,  and  affixing  a buoy  to  the  end  of  it. 
Thus  arranged,  one  of  these  whales  was  shot,  and 
another  struck.  The  former  dived  with  such  im- 
petuosity, that  the  line  was  broken  by  the  resistance 
of  the  buoy,  as  soon  as  it  was  thrown  into  the  water, 
and  the  latter  was  liberated  within  a minute  by  the 
the  division  of  the  line,  occasioned,  it  was  supposed, 
by  its  friction  against  the  dorsal  fin.  Both  of  them 
escaped.  Another  physalis  was  struck  by  one  of 


140 


THE  RAZOR-BACK. 


my  inexperienced  harpooners,  who  mistook  it  for  a 
mysticetus.  It  dived  obliquely  with  such  velocity, 
that  480  fathoms  of  line  were  withdrawn  from  the 
boat  in  about  a minute  of  time.  This  whale  was 
also  lost  by  the  brealdng  of  the  line. 

The  following  observations  on  this  animal  have 
been  derived  from  different  persons  who  have  had 
opportunities  of  examining  it  when  dead. 

Length  of  a physalis  found  dead  in  -Davis’s 
Strait  105  feet,  greatest  circumference  about  38. 
Head  small,  compared  with  that  of  the  common 
whale;  fins  long  and  narrow;  tail  about  twelve  feet 
broad,  finely  formed;  whalebone  about  four  feet  in 
length,  thick,  bristly  and  narrow;  blubber  six  or 
eight  inches  thick,  of  indifferent  quality;  colour  blu- 
ish black  on  the  back,  and  bluish  gray  on  the  belly; 
skin  smooth,  excepting  about  the  side  of  the  thorax, 
where  longitudinal  rugae  or  sulci  occur.  The  phy- 
salis  occurs  in  great  numbers  in  the  Arctic  seas, 
especially  along  the  edge  of  the  ice,  between  Cherie 
Island  and  Nova  Zembla,  and  also  near  Jan  Mayen. 
Persons  trading  to  Archangel  have  often  mistaken 
it  for  the  common  whale.  It  is  seldom  seen  among 
much  ice,  and  seems  to  be  avoided  by  the  mysti- 
cetus; as  such,  the  whale  fishers  view  its  appear- 
ance with  painful  concern.  It  inhabits  most  gene- 
rally in  the  Spitzbergen  quarter,  the  parallels  of 
from  70  to  76  degrees,  but  in  the  months  of  June, 
July,  and  August,  when  the  sea  is  usually  open,  it 
advances  along  the  land  to  the  northward  as  high 


THE  BROAD-NOSED  WHALE. 


141 


as  the  80th  degree  of  latitude.  In  open  seasons  it 
is  seen  near  the  headland  at  an  earlier  period.  A 
whale,  probably  of  this  kind,  101  feet  in  length, 
was  stranded  on  the  banks  of  the  Humber,  about  the 
middle  of  September,  1750. 


Species  III. — The  Broad-nosed  Whale. 

Balsena  Musculus;  L.  . ’ 

Bahenoptera  Rorqual:  La  Cepede. 

This  species  of  whale  frequents  the  coasts  of  Scot- 
land, Ireland,  and  Norway,  &c.  and  is  said  to  feed 
principally  upon  herrings.  Several  characters  of 
■ the  musculus  very  much  resemble  those  of  the  phy- 
salis,  though  I believe  there  is  an  essential  differ- 
ence between  the  two  animalsj  the  musculus  being 
shorter,  having  a larger  head  and  mouth,  and  rounder 
under  jaw,  than  the  physalis.  Several  individuals, 
apparently  of  this  kind,  have  been  stranded  or  kill- 
ed on  different  parts  of  the  coast  of  the  United 
Kingdom.  One,  53  feet  in  length,  was  stranded 
near  Eyemouth,  June  19th,  1752.  Another,  near- 
ly 70  feet  in  length,  ran  ashore  on  the  coast  of  Corn- 
wall, on  the  18th,  of  June,  1797-  Three  were  kill- 
ed on  the  northwest  coast  of  Ireland,  in  the  year 
1762,  and  two  in  1763;  one  or  two  have  been  killed 
in  the  Thames,  and  one  was  embayed  and  killed  in 


142 


THE  FINNER. 


Baltic  sound,  Shetland,  in  the  winter  of  1817-18; 
some  remains  of  which  I saw.  This  latter  whale, 
was  83  feet  in  length,  the  jaw  bones  were  31  feet 
long,  the  longest  lamina  of  whalebone  about  three 
feet  long.  Instead  of  hair  at  the  inner  edge  and  at 
the  front  of  each  blade  of  whalebone,  it  had  a fringe 
of  bristly  fibres;  and  it  Avas  stilfer,  harder,  and  more 
horny  in  its  texture  than  common  whalebone.  This 
whale  produced  only  about  five  tons  of  oil,  all  of  it 
of  an  inferior  quality,  some  of  it  viscid  and  bad.  It 
was  valued  altogether,  expenses  of  removing  the 
produce  and  extracting  the  oil  deducted,  at  no  more 
than  60Z.  Sterling.  It  had  the  usual  sulci  about  the 
thorax,  and  a dorsal  fin. 

In  its  blowing,  swimming,  and  general  action,  as 
well  as  in  its  appearance  in  the  water,  the  museulus 
very  much  resembles  the  physalisj  from  Avhich,  in-r 
deed,  while  living,  it  can  scarcely  be  distinguished. 


Species  IV.— T/;e  Firmer. 

Balaena  Boops:  L. 

Balamoptera 

Length  about  46  feet;  greatest  circumference  of  the 
body  about  SO  feet;  dorsal  protuberance  or  fin,  about 
two  feet  and  a half  high;  pectoral  fin,  four  or  five  feet 
long,  externally,  and  scarcely  a foot  broad;  tail 


143 


THE  FINNER, 

about  three  feet  deep,  and  ten  broad;  whalebone 
about  300  latninse  on  each  side,  the  longest  about 
18  inches  in  length;  the  under  jaw  about  15  feet 
long,  or  one  third  of  whole  length  of  the  animal; 
sulci  about  two  dozen  in  number;  two  external blow'- 
holes;  blubber  on  the  body,  two  or  three  inches 
thick;  under  the  sulci  none. 

In  the  Memoirs  of  the  Wernerian  Society,  a de- 
scription of  a whale,  corresponding  in  its  dimen- 
sions, at  least,  with  the  Balsena  Eoops,  has  been 
given  to  the  public  by  Mr.  P.  Neill,  Edinburgh.^ 
This  whale  was  stranded  on  the  banks  of  the  Forth, 
near  Alloa,  and  had  been  considerably  mutilated 
before  Mr.  Neill  had  an  opportunity  of  examining 
it.  It  is  considered  by  him,  a Balsena  Rostrata, 
From  his  valuable  paper,  part  of  the  above  descrip- 
tion is  taken,  which  differs  so  much  from  a Rostrata 
noticed  below,  particularly  in  its  larger  dimensions, 
and  in  the  greater  proportion  which  the  head  bears 
to  the  body,  that  it  would  appear  to  belong  either 
to  the  Balsena  Boops  or  to  an  undescribed  species. 
From  the  inaccuracy  of  the  sketches  of  almost  all  the 
whales  hitherto  figured,  the  naturalist  is  rather 
plagued  than  assisted  by  them.  As  such,  the  fig- 
ures given  by  La  Cepede  and  others,  can  scarcely 
be  of  any  service,  in  determining  the  species  of  this 
whale. 


* Vol.  1,  p.  201. 


144 


THE  BEAKED  WHALE. 


Species  V. — -The  Beaked  Inhale. 

Balaena  Rostrata;  L. 

Balsmopiera  Acuto  Bosiratd;  La^  Cep^de. 

This  is  the  last  and  the  smallest  of  the  whale- 
bone whales  with  which  l am  acquainted.  An  ani- 
mal of  this  species  w^as  killed  in  Scalpa  Bay,  No- 
vember 14,  1808.  Its  length  was  17^  feet,  circum- 
ference 20  feet,  length  from  the  snout  to  the  dorsal 
fin  171  feet,  from  the  snout  to  the  pectoral  fin  5 
feet,  from  the  snout  to  the  eye  3§  feet,  and  from  the 
snout  to  the  blowholes  3 feet.  Pectoral  fins  two 
feet  long  and  seven  inches  broad;  dorsal  fin  15 
inches  long  by  9 inches  high,  tail  15  inches  long 
by  4|  feet  broad.  Largest  whalebone  about  six 
inches.  Colour  of  the  back  black;  of  the  belly 
glossy  white;  and  of  the  grooves  of  the  plicse,  ac- 
cording to  Mrs.  Traill,  who  saw  it  on  the  beach 
in  Scalpa  Bay,  a sort  of  flesh  colour. 

The  Eostrata  is  said  to  inhabit  principally  the 
Norwegian  seasj  and  to  grow  to  the  length  of  25 
feet.  One  of  the  species  was  killed  near  Spitz- 
bergen,  in  the  year  1813,  some  of  the  whalebone 
of  which  I now  have  in  ray  possession.  It  is  thin, 
fibrous,  of  a yellowish  white  colour,  and  semi-trans- 
parent, almost  like  lantern  horns.  It  is  curved  like 
a scymetar,  and  fringed  with  white  hair  on  the  con- 
vex edge  and  point.  Its  length  is  9 inches;  greatest 
breadth  2i. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


145 


THE  WHALE  FISHERY. 

Observations  on  the  Fishery  of  different  latitudes  and 
seasons,  and  under  different  circumstances  of  Ice, 
Wind,  and  Weather,- 

It  is  not  yet  ascertained,  what  is  the  earliest 
period  of  the  year,  in  which  it  is  possible  to  fish 
for  whales.  The  danger  attending  the  navigation, 
amidst  massive  drift  ice  in  the  obscurity  of  night, 
is  the  most  formidable  objection  against  attemptmg 
the  fishery  before  the  middle  of  the  month  of  April, 
when  the  sun,  having  entered  the  northern  tropic, 
begins  to  enlighten  the  Polar  regions  throughout 
the  twenty-four  hours.  Severity  of  frost,  preva- 
lence of  storms,  and  frequency  of  thick  weather, 
arising  from  snow  and  frost  rime,  are  the  usual  con- 
comitants of  the  spring  of  the  year;  and  these,  when 
combined  with  the  darkness  incident  to  night,  a 
tempestuous  sea,  and  crowded  ice,  must  probably 
produce  as  high  a degree  of  horror  in  the  mind  of 
the  navigator,  who  is  unhappily  subjected  to  their 
distressful  influence,  as  any  combination  of  circum- 
stances which  the  imagination  can  present.  Some 
ships  have  sailed  to  the  northward  of  the  seventy- 
eighth  degree  of  latitude,  before  the  close  of  the 
month  of  March;  but  I am  not  acquainted  with  a 
sinele  instance,  where  the  hardy  fishers  have,  at  this 
VoL.  HI.— 19 


146 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


season,  derived  any  compensation  for  the  extraor- 
dinary dangers  to  which  they  were  exposed.  In 
the  course  of  the  month  of  April,  on  certain  occa- 
sions, considerable  progress  has  been  made  in  the 
fishery,  notwithstanding  the  frequency  of  storms. 
At  the  first  stage  of  the  business,  iw  open  seasons, 
the  whales  are  usually  found  in  most  abundance  on 
the  borders  of  the  ice,  near  Haekluy  t’s  Headland, 
in  the  latitude  of  80°.  A degree  or  two  farther 
south,  they  are  sometimes  seen,  though  not  in  much 
plenty;  but  in  the  76th  degree,  they  sometimes  occur 
in  such  numbers,  as  to  present  a tolerable  prospect 
of  success  in  assailing  them.  Some  rare  instances 
have  occurred,  wherein  they  have  been  seen  on  the 
edge  of  the  ice,  extending  from  Cherry  Island  to 
Point-look-out,  in  the  early  part  of  the  season. 

In  the  year  1803,  the  fishery  of  April  was  con- 
siderable in  the  latitude  of  80°;  in  1813,  many 
whales  were  seen  in  the  same  latitude;  but  the 
weather  being  tempestuous  in  an  almost  unprece- 
dented degree,  but  few  were  killed;  and  in  the  in- 
termediate years,  the  fishery  was  never  general  in 
this  month,  and  but  seldom  begun  at  all  before  the 
commencement  of  May.  In  1814,  the  fishery  com- 
menced before  the  middle  of  April,  and  some  ships 
derived  uncommon  advantage  from  an  early  ar- 
rival. In  1815,  some  ships  were  near  Spitzbergen 
in  March,  and  fished  in  the  first  week  of  April 
in  the  latitude  of  80°,  where  a great  number  of 


■\VHALE-'FISHERT.  147 

whales  were  seen.  Accompanying  the  ice  in  its 
drift,  along  the  coast  to  the  southward,  the  same 
tribe  of  whales  were  seen  in  the  latitude  of  7§% 
about  the  middle  and  end  of  the  month,  and  a con- 
siderable number  were  killed.  In  1816,  fish  were 
seen  in  80°,  in  the  same  month,  but  few  killed,  on 
account  of  the  formation  of  bay  ice  upon  the  sea. 
Ill  1817jtbe  w’^eatherwas  very  tempestuous  in  April, 
and  scarcely  any  whales  were  killed;  and  in  1818, 
the  fishery  of  this  month  was  inconsiderable. 

Grown  fish  are  frequently  found  at  the  edge,  or 
a little  within  the  edge  of  the  loose  ice^  in  the  79th 
degree  of  north  latitude,  in  the  month  of  May;  and 
small  whales  of  different  ages  at  fields,  and  some- 
times in  bays  of  the  ice  in  the  SOth  degree. 

Usually,  the  fish  are  most  plentiful  in  June; 
and  on  some  occasions  they  are  met  with  in  every 
degree  of  latitude  fi’om  75°  to  80°.  In  this  month, 
the  large  whales  are  found  in  every  variety  of  sit- 
uation; sometimes  in  open  water,  at  others  in  the 
loose  ice,  or  at  the  edges  of  fields  and  floes,  near  the 
main  impervious  body  of  ice,  extending  towards 
the  coast  of  West  Greenland.  The  smaller  ani- 
mals of  the  species  are,  at  the  same  time,  found  far- 
ther to  the  south,  than  in  the  spring,  at  floes,  fields, 
or  even  among  loose  ice,  but  most  plentiful  about 
• fields  or  floes,  at  the  border  of  the  main  western  ice, 
in  the  latitude  of  78  or  7S|  degrees. 

In  July,  the  fishery  generally  terminates,  some- 
times at  the  beginning  of  the  month,  at  others. 


148  WHALE-FISHERY. 

though  more  rarely,  it  continues  throughout  the 
greater  part  of  it.  Few  small  fish  are  seen  at  this 
season.  The  large  whales,  when  plentiful,  are 
found  occasionally  in  every  intermediate  situation, 
between  the  open  sea  and  the  main  ice,  in  one  di- 
rection, and  between  the  latitudes  of  75°  and  79°  in 
the  other,  but  rarely  as  far  north  as  80°. 

The  parallel  of  78  to  78|  degrees,  is,  on  the 
whole,  the  most  productive  fishing  station!  The 
interval  between  this  parallel  and  80°,  or  any  other 
situation  more  remote,  is  called  the  “ northward,” 
and  any  situation  in  a lower  latitude  than  78°,  is 
called  the  southward.” 

Though  the  79th  degree  affords  whales  in  the 
greatest  abundance,  yet  the  76th  degree  affords 
them,  perhaps,  more  generally.  In  this  latter  situa- 
tion, a very  large  kind  of  the  mysticetus  is  com- 
monly to  be  found  throughout  the  season,  from 
April  to  July  inclusive.  Their  number,  however, 
is  not  often  great;  and  as  the  situation  in  which 
they  occur  is  unsheltered,  and,  consequently,  ex- 
posed, to  heavy  swells,  the  southern  fishery  is  not 
much  frequented. 

The  parallel  of  77°  to  771°,  is  considered  a 
dead  latitude,”  by  the  fishers,  but  occasionally 
it  affords  whales  also. 

From  an  attentive  observation  of  facts,  it  would 
appear,  that  different  tribes  of  the  mysticetus  in- 
habit different  regions,  and  pursue  different,  routes 
on  their  removal  from  the  places  where  first  seen. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


149 


These  tribes  seem  to  be  distingiiisbed  by  a ditferenee 
of  age  or  mannersj  and  in  some  instances,  apparent- 
ly  by  a difference  of  species,  or  sub-species.  The 
whales  seen  in  the  spring  in  the  latitude  of  80°, 
which  are  usually  full  grown  animals,  disappear 
generally  by  the  end  of  April;  and  the  place  of  their 
retreat  is  unknown.  Those  inhabiting  the  regions 
of  78°,  are  of  a mixed  size.  Such  as  resort  to  fields 
in  May  and  the  beginning  of  June,  are  generally 
young  animals;  and  those  seen  in  the  latitude  of 
76°,  are  almost  always  of  the  very  largest  kind. 
Instances  are  remembered  by  some  aged  captains, 
wherein  a number  have  been  taken  in  the  soiithivard 
fishing  stations,  which  were  astonishingly  produc- 
tive of  oil.  It  is  probable,  that  the  difference  in 
the  appearance  of  the  heads,  or  the  difference  of 
proportion  existing  between  the  heads  and  bodies 
of  some  mystieete,  are  distinguishable  of  a differ- 
ence in  the  species,  or  sub-species.  Those  inhabit- 
ing southern  latitudes,  have  commonly  long  heads 
and  bodies,  compared  with  their  circumference, 
moderately  thick  blubber  and  long  whalebone;  those 
of  the  mean  fishing  latitude,  that  is  78° — 79°,  have 
more  commonly  short  broad  heads,  compared  with 
the  size  of  the  body.  In  some  individuals,  the 
head  is  at  least  one-third  of  the  whole  length  of  the 
animal,  but  in  others  scarcely  two- sevenths.  Hence, 
it  is  exceedingly  probable,  that  the  whales  seen 
early  in  April,  in  the  latitude  of  80°,  are  a peculiar 
tribe,  which  do  not  re-appear  during  the  remainder 


150 


WHALE-FISHERYi 


of  the  season;  and  that  those  inhabiting  the  latitude 
of  78°  and  of  76°,  are  likewise  distinct  tribes. 

Notwithstanding,  if  we  descendto  particulars,  the 
great  variety  and  uncertainty  which  appear  in  the 
nature  of  the  situations  preferred  by  the  whales,  and 
the  apparent  dissimilarity  observed  in  their  habits, 
it  is  probable,  that,  were  the  diifferent  tribes  distin- 
guished, we  should  find  a much  greater  degree  of 
similarity  in  their  choice  of  situation  and  in  their 
general  habits  than  we  are  at  present  able  to  trace. 

Annoyed  as  the  whales  are  by  the  fishers,  it  is 
nut  surprising  that  they  sometimes  vary  their  usual 
places  of  resort,  and  it  is  not  improbable,  were  they 
left  undisturbed  for  a few  years,  but  that  they  might 
return  to  the  bays  and  sea-coasts  of  Spitzbergen  and 
its  neighbouring  islands,  as  was  formerly  the  cus- 
tom with  certain  tribes,  at  the  commencement  of  this 
fishery.  W e are  doubtless  in  a great  measure  indebt- 
ed to  the  necessity  they  are  under,  of  performing  the 
function  of  respiration  in  the  aiv,  at  stated  intervals, 
for  being  able  to  meet  with  them  at  all;  tliough  the 
coast  of  Spitzbergen  may  possibly  possess  powerful 
attraction  to  the  mysticete,  by  affording  them  a great- 
er abu  ndance  of  palatable  food  than  the  interior  west-- 
ern  waters,  covered  perpetually  by  the  ice.  From 
this  necessity  of  respiring  in  the  air,  we  may  account 
for  their  appearance  in  the  open  sea  in  the  early 
part  of  the  spring.  The  ice  at  this  season,  connect- 
ed by  the  winter’s  frost,  is  so  consolidated,  as  to  pre- 
vent the  whales  from  breathing  among  it,  excepting 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


131 


within  so  much  of  its  confines  as  may  be  broken  by 
the  violence  of  the  sea  in  storms.  After  the  disso- 
lution of  the  continuity  of  the  ice,  by  north,  north- 
west, or  west  winds,  they  find  sufficient  convenience 
for  respiration  in  the  interior,  and  often  retreat 
thither  to  the  great  disadvantage  of  the  whalers.  In 
such  cases,  if  the  formation  of  bay  ice,  or  the  con- 
tinuity of  the  border  of  the  heavy  ice,  prevents 
the  ships  from  following,  the  whales  completely  es- 
cape their  enemies,  until  the  relaxation  of  the  frost 
permits  an  entrance. 

It  is  not  uncommon,  however,  for  an  adult  tribe  of 
whales,  to  resort  partially  to  the  open  sea,  between 
the  latitudes  of  76°  and  79°,  during  the  months  of 
May  and  June,  and,  though  more  rarely,  during  the 
early  part  of  July,  when,  at  length,  they  suddenly 
betake  themselves  to  the  ice,  and  disappear  alto- 
gether. 

The  systematical  movements  of  the  whales  re- 
ceive additional  illustration  from  many  well  known 
facts.  Sometimes  a large  tribe,  passing  from  one  place 
to  another,  which,  under  such  circumstances,  is  de- 
nominated a run  of  fish,”  has  been  traced  in  its 
movements  in  a direct  line  from  the  south  towards 
the  north,  along  the  seaward  edge  of  the  western 
ice,  through  a space  of  two  or  three  degrees  of  lati- 
tude; then  it  has  been  ascertained  to  have  entered 
the  ice,  and  penetrated  to  the  north-westward,  be- 
yond the  reach  of  the  fishers.  In  certain  years,  it 
is  curious  to  observe,  that  the  whales  commence  a 


153 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


simultaneous  retreat  throughout  the  whole  fishing 
limits,  and  all  disappear  within  the  space  of  a very 
few  days.  On  such  occasions  it  has  often  happened, 
that  not  a single  whale  has  been  seen  by  any  indi- 
vidual belonging  to  the  whole  Greenland  fleet,  after 
perhaps  the  middle  of  June,  but  more  commonly 
after  the  first  or  second  week  in  July,  notwithstand- 
ing many  of.  the  fleet  may  have  cruised  about  in  the 
fishing  region  for  a month  afterwards.  In  the  year 
1813,  whales  were  found  in  considerable  numbers 
in  the  open  sea,  during  the  greater  part  of  the  fish- 
ing season,  but  in  the  greatest  abundance  about  the 
end  of  June  and  beginning  of  July.  On  the  6th  of 
July,  they  departed  into  the  ice,  and  Avere  followed 
by  the  fishers;  several  were  killed  during  the  three 
succeeding  days,  but  they  wholly  disappeared  after 
the  9th.  Notwithstanding,  several  ships  cruised 
the  country,”  for  some  weeks  afterwards,  in  all 
navigable  directions,  through  an  extent  of  four  de- 
grees of  latitude,  and  penetrated  the  ice  as  far  as 
the  main  western  body,  in  different  parallels,  it 
does  not  appear  that  a single  whale  was  caught, 
and  as  far  as  I was  able  to  learn,  but  one  was  seen, 
and  this  individual  was  observed  to  be  rapidly  ad- 
vancing towards  the  north-west.  1 do  not  mention 
this  as  an  uncommon  circumstance,  because  a simi- 
lar case  occurs  frequently,  but  as  a single  illustra- 
tion of  the  foregoing  observation. 

When  the  fishery  for  the  season,  in  the  opinion  of 
the  British  whalers,  has  altogether  ceased,  it  ap- 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


153 


P®'^.rs  from  the  observation  of  the  Dutch,*  that  it 
frequently  be  recommenced  in  the  autumn,  at 
the  verge  of  the  most  northern  waters,  near  Hack- 
luyt’s  Headland.  They  consider  the  fish  which  then 
appear  as  the  same  tribe  that  are  seen  in  this  place 
in  the  spring  of  the  year,  and  enter  the  ice,  imme- 
diately after  it  opens  in  the  north.  On  the  recom- 
mencement of  the  frost,  they  instinctively  return  to 
prevent  themselves  being  enclosed  so  far  within  the 
ice,  as  to  occasion  suffocation  from  the  freezing  up 
of  the  openings  through  which  they  might  otherwise 
breathe. 

This  tribe  are  supposed  by  the  Dutch  to  be  real- 
ly inhabitants  of  the  sea  adjoining  West  Greenland; 
that  they  always  retreat  thither  whenever  the  state 
of  the  ice  will  admit,  and  only  appear  within  the 
observation  of  the  fishers,  when  the  solidity  of  the 
ice  prevents  their  attaining  those  favourite  situations, 
where  they  probably  find  the  most  agreeable  food.-f 

The  whales,  of  lower  latitudes,  however,  whose 
food  lies  near  the  eastern  margin  of  the  main  ice, 
when  they  enter  the  ice  in  May  and  June,  seem  to 
exhibit  an  intention  of  evading  their  pursuers;  for  in 
whatever  manner  they  may  retreat  for  a while,  they 
frecpiently  return  to  the  same  or  other  similar  place, 


* Beschryving  der  Walvisvangst,  vol.  1,  p.  52. 
t Beschryving,  8cc.  vol.  1.  p.  53. — As  I have  never  seen 
whales  in  this  situation  in  the  autumn  myself,  I give  the  in- 
formation entirely  on  the  authority  of  the  work  here  quoted. 

Vol.  III.- 20 


154 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


accessible  to  the  fisbers.  But  after  the  montl* 
July,  this  tribe  also  penetrates  so  deeply  into  l^Je 
ice,  that  it  gets  beyond  the  reach  of  its  enemies. 

Experience  proves,  that  the  whale  has  its  favour- 
ite places  of  resort,  depending  on  a sufficiency  of 
food,  particular  circumstances  of  weather,  and  par- 
ticular positions  and  qualities  of  the  ice.  Thus, 
though  many  whales  may  have  been  seen  in  open 
water,  when  the  weather  was  fine,  after  the  occur- 
rence of  a storm,  perhaps  not  one  is  to  be  seen. 
And,  though  fields  are  sometimes  the  resort  of  hun- 
dreds of  whales,  yet,  whenever  the  loose  ice  around 
separates  entirely  away,  the  whales  quit  them  also. 
Hence  fields  seldom  afford  whales  in  much  abund- 
ance, excepting  at  the  time  when  they  first  ‘‘  break 
out,”  and  become  accessible;  that  is,  immediately 
after  a vacancy  is  made  on  some  side  by  the  sepa- 
ration of  adjoining  fields,  floes,  or  drift  ice.  Whales, 
on  leaving  fields  which  have  become  exposed,  fre- 
quently retire  to  other  more  obscure  situations  in  a 
west  or  northwest  direction;  but  occasionally  they 
retreat  no  further  than  the  neighbouring  drift  ice, 
from  whence  they  sometimes  return  to  the  fields  at 
regular  intervals  of  six,  twelve  or  twenty-four  hours. 

Whales  are  rarely  seen  in  abundance  in  the  large 
open  space  of  water,  which  sometimes  occurs  amidst 
fields  and  floes,  nor  are  they  commonly  seen  in  a 
very  open  pack,  unless  it  be  in  the  immediate  neigh- 
bourhood of  the  main  western  ice.  They  seem  to 
have  a preference  for  close  packs  and  patches  of 
ice;  and  for  fields  under  certain  circumstances;  for 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


155 


<lee[)  bays  ov  bights,  and  sometimes  for  clear  water 
situations;  occasionally  for  detached  streams  of  drift 
ice;  and  most  generally,  for  extensive  sheets  of  bay 
ice.  Bay  ice  is  a very  favourite  retreat  of  the 
whales,  so  long  as  it  continues  sufficiently  tender 
to  be  couveuiently  broken,  for  the  purpose  of  respi- 
ration. In  such  situations,  whales  may  frequently 
be  seen  in  amazing  numbers,  elevating  and  break- 
ing the  ice  with  their  crowns,*  where  they  are  ob- 
served to  remain  much  longer  at  rest  than  when 
seen  in  open  water,  or  in  the  clear  interstices  of  the 
ice,  or  indeed  in  almost  any  other  situation. 

Description  of  the  boats  and  principal  instruments  used 
in  the  capture  of  the  whale. 

Whale-boats  are,  of  course,  peculiarly  adapted 
for  the  occupation  they  are  intended  to  be  employ- 
ed in.  A well  constructed  Greenland  boat,”  pos- 
sesses the  following  properties.  It  floats  lightly 
and  safely  on  the  water, — is  capable  of  being  row- 
ed with  great  speed,  and  readily  turned  round, — it 
is  of  such  capacity  that  it  carries  six  or  seven  men, 
seV^en  or  eight  hundred  weight  of  whale-lines,  and 
various  other  materials,  and  yet  retains  the  necessa- 
ry properties  of  safety,  buoyancy,  and  speed,  either 
in  smooth  water,  or  where  it  is  exposed  to  a con- 
siderable sea.  Whale-boats  , being  very  liable  to 
receive  damage,  both  from  whales  and  ice,  are  al- 


* The  eminence  on  the  head  of  the  whale,  in  which  the 
blow-holes  are  situated,  is  thus  called. 


156 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


Ways  carver-built, — a structure  wliieh  is  easily  re- 
paired. They  are  usually  of  the  following  dinieti- 
sions.  Those  called  “ six  oared  boats,”  adapted  for 
carrying  seven  men,  six  of  whom,  including  the  har- 
pooner,  are  rowers,  are  generally  26  to  28  feet  in 
lengtii,  and  about  five  feet  nine  inches  in  breadth. 
Six  men  boats,  that  is,  with  five  rowers  and  a steers- 
man, are  usually  25  to  26  feet  in  length,  and  about 
five  feet  six  inches  in  breadth.  And  four  oared 
boats,”  are  usually  twenty-three  to  twenty-four  in 
length,  and  about  five  feet  three  inches  in  breadth. 
The  main  breadth  of  the  two  first  classes  of  boats 
is  at  about  three-sevenths  of  the  length  of  the  boat 
reckoned  from  the  stem;  but,  in  the  last  class,  it 
is  necessary  to  have  the  main  breadth  within  one- 
tliird  of  the  length  of  the  boat  from  the  stem.  The 
object  of  this  is,  to  enable  the  smaller  boat  to  sup- 
port, without  being  dragged  under  water,  as  great  a 
strain  on  the  lines  as  those  of  a larger  class;  other- 
wise, if  such  a boat  were  sent  out  by  itself,  its  lines 
would  be  always  liable  to  be  lost  before  any  assist- 
ance could  reach  it.  The  five  oared  or  six  men 
boat,  is  that  which  is  in  most  general  use;  though 
each  fishing  ship  generally  carries  one  or  tu'o  of  the 
largest  class.  These  boats  are  now  commonly  built 
of  fir-boards,  one-half  or  three-fourths  of  an  inch 
thick,  with  timbers,  keel,  gunw^ales,  stem  and  stern- 
post  of  oak.  An  improvement  in  tlie  timbering  of 
whale-boats  lias  lately  been  made,  by  sawing  the 
timber  out  of  very  stitiight  grained  oak,  and  bend- 
ing them  to  the  required  form,  after  being  made 


WHALE-FISHERY, 


supple,  by  the  application  of  steam,  or  immersion 
in  boiling  water.  This  improvement,  which  renders 
the  timbers  more  elastic,  than  when  they  are  sawn 
out  of  crooked  oak,  at  the  same  time  makes  the  boat 
stronger  and  lighter.  Though  the  principle  has 
long  been  acted  upon  in  clincher-built  boats,  with 
ash  timbers,  the  application  to  carver-built  whale- 
boats, is,  I believe,  new.  The  bow  and  stern  of 
Greenland  boats,  are  both  sharp,  and,  in  appear- 
ance, very  similar;  but  the  stern  forms  a more  acute 
angle  than  the  bow.  The  keel  has  some  inches 
depression  in  the  middle,  from  which  the  facility  of 
turning  is  acquired. 

The  instruments  of  general  use  in  the  capture  of 
the  whale,  are  the  harpoon  and  lance. 

The  harpoon  (fig.  4.)  is  an  instrument  of  iron,  of 
about  three  feet  in  length.  It  consists  of  three  con- 
joined parts,  called  the  socket,”  shank,”  and 
“ mouth,”  the  latter  of  which  includes  the  barbs  or 
withers.”  This  instrument,  if  we  except  a small 
addition  to  the  barbs,  and  some  enlargement  of  dimen- 
sions, maintains  the  same  form  in  which  it  was  ori- 
ginally used  in  the  fishery  tv/o  centuries  ago.  At 
that  time,  the  mouth  or  barbed  extremity  was  of  a tri- 
angular shape,  united  to  the  shank  in  the  middle  of 
one  of  the  sides;  and  this  being  scooped  out  on  each 
side  of  the  shank,  formed  two  simple  flat  barbs.  In 
the  course  of  last  century,  an  improvement  was  made, 
by  adding  another  small  barb,  resembling  the  beard 
of  a fish-hook,  within  each  of  the  former  withers,  in 
a reverse  position.  The  two  principal  withers,  in 


158 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


the  present  improveil  harpoon,  measure  about  eight 
inches  in  length  and  six  in  breadth;  the  shank  is 
eigliteen  inches  to  two  feet  in  length,  and  four-tenths 
of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  the  socket,  which  is 
hollow,  swells  from  the  size  of  the  shank  to  near 
two  inches  diameter,  and  is  about  six  inches  in 
length.  Now,  when  the  harpoon  is  forced  by  a 
blow  into  the  fat  of  the  whale,  and  the  line  is 
held  tight,  the  principal  withers  seize  the  strong 
ligamentous  fibres  of  the  blubber,  and  prevent 
it  from  being  withdrawn;  and  in  the  event  of  its 
being  pulled  out,  so  far  as  to  remain  entangled 
by  one  wither  only,  which  is  frequently  the  case, 
then  the  little  reverse  barb,  or  “ stop  wither,”  as  it  is 
called,  collecting  a number  of  the  same  reticulated 
sinewy  fibres,  which  are  very  numerous  near  the 
skin,  prevents  the  harpoon  from  being  shaken  out 
by  the  ordinary  motions  of  the  whale.  The  point 
and  exterior  edges  of  the  barbs  of  the  harpoon,  are 
sharpened  to  a rough  edge,  by  means  of  a file.  This 
part  of  the  harpoon  is  not  formed  of  steel,  as  it  is 
frequently  represented,  but  of  common  soft  iron;  so 
that  when  blunted,  it  can  be  readily  sharpened  by  a 
file,  or  even  by  scraping  it  with  a knife.  The  most 
important  part  in  the  construction  of  this  instrument, 
is  the  shank.  As  this  part  is  liable  to  be  forcibly 
and  sudddenly  extended,  twisted  and  bent,  it  re- 
quires to  be  made  of  the  softest  and  most  pliable 
iron.  That  kind  which  is  of  the  most  approved 
tenacity,  is  made  of  old  horse-shoe  nails  or  stubs, 
which  are  formed  into  small  rods,  and  two  or  three 


WHALE- FISHERY. 


159 


of  these  welded  together;  so  that  should  a flaw  hap- 
pen to  occur  in  any  one  of  the  rods,  the  strength  of 
the  whole  might  still  be  depended  on.  Some  maiui- 
faeturers  enclose  a quantity  of  stub-iron  in  a cylinder 
of  best  foreign  iron,  and  form  the  shank  of  the  har- 
poon out  of  a single  rod.  A test  sometimes  used 
for  trying  the  sufficiency  of  a harpoon,  is  to  wind 
its  shank  round  a bolt  of  inch  iron,  in  the  form  of  a 
close  spiral,  then  to  unwind  it  again,  and  put  it  in- 
to  a straight  form.  If  it  bears  this  without  injury 
in  the  cold  state,  it  is  considered  as  excellent.  The 
breaking  of  a harpoon  is  of  no  less  importance  than 
the  value  of  a whale,  which  is  sometimes  estimated 
at  more  than  lOOOZ.  sterling. 

Next  in  importance  to  the  harpoon,  is  the  lance, 
(fig.  5.)  which  is  a spear  of  iron  of  the  length  of  six 
feet.  It  consists  of  a hollow  socket  six  inches  long, 
swelling  from  half  an  inch,  the  size  of  the  shank, 
to  near  two  inches  in  diameter,  into  which  is  fitted 
a four  feet  stock  or  handle  of  fir;  a shank  five  feet 
long,  and  half  an  inch  in  diameter;  and  a mouth  of 
steel,  which  is  made  very  thin,  and  exceedingly 
sharp,  seven  or  eight  inches  in  length,  and  two  or 
in  breadth. 

Tliese  two  instruments,  the  harpoon  and  lance, 
with  the  necessary  apparatus  of  lines,  boats,  and 
oars,  are  all  that  are  essential  for  capturing  the 
whale.  But  besides  these  instruments,  so  success- 
fully used  in  the  whale-fishery,  there  is  likewise  an 
auxiliary  weapon  which  has,  at  different  periods, 
been  of  some  celebrity.  This  is  the  harpoou-gmi. 


t60 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


It  is  well  calculated  to  facilitate  the  capture  of  whales 
uuder  particular  circumstances,  particularly  in  calm 
clear  weather,  when  the  fish  are  apt  to  take  the 
alarm,  whenever  the  boats  approach  within  fifteen 
or  twenty  yards  of  them.  The  harpoon-gun  was 
invented  in  the  year  17*31,  and  used,  it  seems,  by 
some  individuals  with  success.  Being,  however, 
difficult,  and  somewliat  dangerous  in  its  application, 
it  was  laid  aside  for  many  years.  It  has,  however, 
subsequently  been  highly  improved,  and  rendered 
capable  of  throwing  a harpoon  near  forty  yards  with 
effect;  yet,  on  account  of  the  difficulty  and  address 
requisite  in  the  management  of  it,  and  loss  of  fish, 
which,  in  unskilful  hands  it  has  been  the  means  of 
occasioning,  together  with  some  accidents  which 
have  resulted  from  its  use, — it  has  not  been  so  gene- 
rally adopted  as  might  have  been  expected. 

In  its  present  improved  form,  the  harpoon-gun 
consists  of  a kind  of  swivel,  having  a barrel  of 
wrought  iron,  2-1  to  26  inches  in  length,  of  3 inches 
exterior  diameter,  and  ii  inches  bore.  It  is  furnish- 
ed with  two  locks,  which  act  simultaneously,  for 
the  purpose  of  diminishing  the  liability  of  the  gun 
missing  fire.  Fig.  1.  is  a representation  of  the 
harpoon-gun;  and  fig.  2.  and  3.  show  the  form 
of  the  harpoon  which  is  fired  from  it.  The  shank 
of  this  harpoon  is  double,  terminating  in  a cy- 
lindrical knob,  fitting  the  bore  of  the  gun.  Be- 
tween the  two  parts  of  the  shank  is  a wire  ring,  to 
which  is  attached  the  line.  Now,  when  the  har- 
poon is  introduced  into  the  barrel  of  the  gun,  the 


WHALE-i'ISHERYo 


16  j 

ring,  with  the  attached  line,  remains  on  the  outside 
near  the  mouth  of  the  harpoon;  but  the  instant  that 
it  is  fired,  the  ring  flies  back  against  the  cylindrical 
knob.  Some  harpoons  have  been  lately  made  with 
a single  shank,  similar  to  the  common  hand-har- 
poon,” but  swelled  at  the  end  to  the  thickness  of 
the  bore  of  the  gun.  The  whale  line  closely  splic- 
ed  round  the  shank,  is  slipped  towards  the  mouth 
of  the  harpoon,  when  it  is  placed  in  the  gun,  and 
when  fired,  is  prevented  from  disengaging  itself,  by 
the  size  of  the  knob  at  the  end. 

Proceedings  on  Fishing  Stations. 

On  fishing  stations,  when  the  weather  is  such  as 
to  render  the  fishing  practicable,  the  boats  are  al- 
ways ready  for  instant  service.  Suspended  from 
davits  or  cranes  by  the  side  of  the  ship,  and  furnish- 
ed with  the  requisite  implements,  two  boats  at  least, 
the  crews  of  which  are  always  in  readiness,  can,  in 
a general  way,  be  manned  and  lowered  into  tlie 
water,  within  the  space  of  one  minute  of  time. 

Wherever  there  is  a probability  of  seeing  whales, 
when  the  weather  and  situation  are  such,  as  to  pre- 
sent a possibility  of  capturing  them,  the  crow’s- 
nest^,  is  generally  occupied  by  the  master,  or  some 


* The  crow’s-nest,  is  an  apparatus  placed  on  the  main- 
topmast,  or  top -gallant-mast  head,  as  a kind  of  watch  tow- 
er, for  the  use  of  the  master,  or  officer  of  the  watch,  in  the 
fishing  seas,  for  sheltering  him  from  the  wind,  when  en- 

VoL. 


162 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


one  of  tile  officers,  who,  commanding  from  thence 
an  extensive  prospect  of  the  surrounding  sea,  keeps 
' an  anxious  watch  for  the  appearance  of  a whalej 
assisted  by  a telescope,  he  views  the  operations  of 
any  ship  which  may  be  in  sight  at  a distancej  and 
occasionally  sweeps  the  horizon  with  his  glass,  to 
extend  the  limited  sphere  of  vision,  in  which  he  is 
able  to  discriminate  a whale  with  the  naked  eye,  to 
an  area  vastly  greater.  The  moment  that  a fish  is 
seen,  he  gives  notice  to  the  “ watch  upon  deck/’ 
part  of  whom  leap  into  a boat,  are  lowered  down, 
and  push  off  towards  the  place.  If  the  fish  be  large, 
a second  boat  is.  immediately  despatched  to  the  sup- 
port of  the  other.  When  the  whale  again  appears, 
two  boats  row  towards  it  with  their  utmost  speed; 
and  though  they  may  be  disappointed  in  all  their  at- 
tempts, they  generally  continue  the  pursuit,  until 
the  fish  either  takes  the  alarm,  and  escapes  them,  or 
they  are  recalled  by  signal  to  the  ship.  When  two 
or  more  fish,  appear  at  the  same  time  in  different 
situations,  the  number  of  boats,  sent  in  pursuit,  is 
commonly  increased;  and  when  the  whole  of  the 


gaged  in  piloting  the  ship,  through  crowded  ice,  or  for  ob- 
taining a more  extensive  view  of  the  sea  around,  when  look- 
ing out  for  whales.  In  difficult  situations,  a master’s  pre- 
sence at  the  mast-head  is  sometimes  required  for  many  hours 
in  succession,  when  the  temperature  of  the  air  is  from  10° 
to  20°  degrees  below  the  freezing  point,  or  more.  It  is 
therefore  necessary  for  the  preservation  of  his  health,  as  well 
as  his  comfort,  that  he  should  be  sheltered  from  the  gale. 


WHALE-FISHERY.  103 

boats  are  sent  out,  the  ship  is  said  to  have  a loose 
fall.’' 

During  fine  weather,  in  situations  where  whales 
are  seen,  or  where  they  have  recently  been  seen,  or 
where  there  is  a great  probability  of  any  making 
their  appearance,  a boat  is  generally  kept  in  readi- 
ness, manned  and  afloat.  If  the  ship  sails  with 
considerable  velocity,  this  boat  is  towed  by  a rope 
astern;  but  when  tlie  ship  is  pretty  still,  whether 
moored  to  ice,  laid  to,  or  sailing  in  light  winds,  the 

bran  boat,”  as  it  is  called,  often  pushes  off  to  a 
little  distance  from  the  ship.  A boat  on  watch,  com- 
monly lies  still  in  some  eligible  situation,  with  all 
its  oars  elevated  out  of  the  water,  but  in  readiness 
in  the  hands  of  the  rowers  for  immediate  use. 

The  harpooner  and  boat  steerer,  keep  a careful 
watch  on  all  sides,  while  each  of  the  rowers  looks 
out  -in  the  direction  of  his  oar.  In  field  fishing,  the 
boats  approach  the  ice  witli  their  sterns,  and  are 
each  of  them  fastened  to  it,  by  means  of  a boat-hook, 
or  an  iron  spike  with  a cord  attached,  either  of 
which  is  held  by  the  boat-steerer,  and  is  slipped  or 
withdrawn,  the  moment  a whale  appears.  There 
are  several  rules  observed  in  approaching  a whale, 
as  precautions,  to  prevent,  as  far  as  possible,  the  ani- 
mal from  taking  the  alarm.  As  the  whale  is  dull 
of  hearing,  but  quick  of  sight,  the  boat-steerer  al- 
ways endeavours  to  get  behind  it;  and,  in  accom- 
plishing this,  he  is  sometimes  justified  in  taking  a 
cfrcuitous  route.  In  calm  weather,  w'here  guns  are 


164 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


not  used,  the  greatest  caution  is  necessary,  before  a 
whale  can  be  reached;  smooth  careful  rowing  is  al-^ 
ways  requisite,  and  sometimes  sculling  is  practised. 

When  it  is  known  that  a whale  seldom  abides 
longer  on  the  water  than  two  minutes,  that  it  gene- 
rally remains  from  five  to  ten  or  fifteen  minutes 
under  water;^  that  in  this  interval  it  sometimes 
moves  through  a space  of  half  a mile  or  more,™ 
and  that  the  fisher  has  very  rarely,  any  certain  in- 
timation of  the  place  in  which  it  will  reappear; — • 
the  difficulty  and  address,  requisite  to  approach  suf- 
ficiently near,  during  its  short  stay  on  the  surface, 
to  harpoon  it,  will  readily  be  appreciated.  It  is, 
therefore,  a primary  consideration  with  the  harpoon- 
er  always  to  place  his  boat  as  near  as  possible  to 
the  spot,  in  which  he  expects  the  fish  to  rise,  and  he 
conceives  himself  successful  in  the  attempt  when 
the  fish  comes  up  within  a start,’’  that  is,  within 
the  distance  of  about  200  yards.  In  all  cases  when 
a whale  that  is  pursued,  has  butonce  been  seen,  the 
fisher  is  considerably  indebted  to  what  is  called 
chance  for  a favourable  position.  But  when  the 
whale  has  been  twice  seen,  and  its  change  of  place, 
if  any,  noticed,  the  harpooner  makes  the  best  use  of 
the  intimation  derived  from  his  observation  on  its 


* Before  I had  particularly  minuted  the  time,  that  a whale 
stays  on  the  surface,  and  remains  below,  I believed  each  in- 
terval, and  especially  the  former,  was  much  greater  than  it 
really  is.  • 


WHAiy-FlSHERY.  165 

apparent  motion,  and  places  his  boat  accordingly; 
thus  he  anticipates  the  fish  in  its  progress,  so  that 
when  it  rises  to  the  surface,  there  is  probability  of 
its  being  within  the  favourable  precincts  of  a start. 

A whale  moving  forward  at  a small  distance  be- 
neath the  surface  of  the  sea,  leaves  a sure  indica- 
tion of  its  situation,  in  what  is  called  an  eddy,” 
having  somewhat  the  resemblance  of  the  “ wake,” 
or  track  of  a ship,  and  in  fine  calm  weather,  its 
change  of  position  is  sometimes  pointed  out  by  the 
birds,  many  of  which  closely  follow  it  when  at  the 
surface,  and  hover  over  it  when  below,  whose 
keener  vision  can  discover  it,  when  it  is  totally  con- 
cealed from  human  eyes.  By  these  indications 
many  whales  have  been  taken. 

Whenever  a whale  lies  on  the  surface  of  the  wa- 
ter,  unconscious  of  the  approach  of  its  enemies,  the 
hardy  fisher  rows  directly  upon  it;  and  an  instant 
before  the  boat  touches  it,  buries  his  harpoon  in  its 
back.  But  if,  while  the  boat  is  yet  at  a little  dis- 
tance, the  whale  should  indicate  his  intention  of 
diving,  by  lifting  his  head  above  its  common  level, 
and  then  plunging  it  under  water,  and  raising  his 
body  until  it  appear  like  the  large  segment  of  a 
sphere, — the  harpoon  is  thrown  from  the  hand,  or 
fired  from  a gun,  the  former  of  which,  when  skilfully 
practised,  is  efficient  at  the  distance  of  eight  or  ten 
yards,  and  the  latter  at  the  distance  of  thirty  yards, 
or  upward.  The  wounded  whale,  in  the  surprise 
and  agony  of  the  moment,  makes  a convulsive  ef- 


166 


WHALE-F^'’HERY. 

fort  to  escape.  Then  is  the  moment  of  danger.  The 
boat  is  subjected  to  the  most  violent  blows  from  its 
head,  or  its  fins,  bat  particularly  from  its  ponderous 
tail,  which  sometimes  sweeps  the  air  with  such 
tremendous  fury,  that  both  boat  and  men  are  ex- 
posed to  one  common  destruction. 

The  head  of  the  whale  is  avoided,  because  it  can- 
not be  penetrated  with  the  harpoon;  but  any  part  of 
the  body,  between  the  head  and  tail,  will  admit  of 
the  full  length  of  the  instrument,  without  danger  of 
obstruction.  The  harpoon,  therefore,  is  always 
struck  into  the  back,  and  generally  well  forward 
towards  the  fins,  thus  affording  the  chance,  when 
it  happens  to  drag  and  plough  along  the  back,  of 
retaining  its  hold  during  a longer  time,  than  when 
struck  in  closer  to  the  tail. 

The  moment  that  the  wounded  whale  disappears, 
or  leaves  the  boat,  a jack  or  flag,  elevated  on  a 
staff,  is  displayed;  on  sight  of  which,  those  on  watch 
in  the  ship,  give  the  alarm,  by  stamping  on  the 
deck,  accompanied  by  a simultaneous  and  continued 
shout  of  a fall,”*  at  the  sound  of  this,  the  sleep- 
ing crew  are  roused,  jump  from  their  beds,  rush 
upon  deck,  with  their  clothes  tied  by  a string  in 


* The  word  fall,  as  well  as  many  others  used  in  the  fishery, 
is  derived  from  the  Dutch  language.  In  the  original  it  is 
written  val,  implying  jump,  drop,  fall,  and  is  considered  as 
expressive  of  the  conduct  of  the  sailors,  when  manning  the 
boats,  on  an  occasion  requiring  extreme  dispatch. 


WHALF/FISHERY. 


167 


their  hands,  and  crowd  into  the  boats,  with  a tern- 
perature  of  zero.  Should  a fall  occur,  the  crew  would 
appear  upon  deck,  shielded  only  by  their  drawers, 
stockings,  and  shirts,  or  other  habirunents  in  which 
they  sleep.  They  generally  contrive  to  dress  them- 
selves, in  part  at  least,  as  the  boats  are  low'ered 
down;  but  sometimes  they  push  off  in  the  state  in 
which  they  rise  from  their  beds,  row  away  towards 
the  fast  boat,’^  and  have  no  opportunity  to  clothe 
themselves  for  a length  of  time  afterwards.  The 
alarm  of  a fall,’’  has  a singular  effect  on  the  feel- 
ings of  a , sleeping  person,  unaccustomed  to  the 
whale-fishing  business.  It  has  often  been  mistaken 
as  a cry  of  distress.  A landsman  in  a Hull  ship, 
seeing  the  crew,  on  an  occasion  of  a fall,  rush  upon 
deck,  with  their  clothes  in  their  hands,  when  there 
W'as  no  appearance  of  danger,  thought  the  men  were 
all  mad;  but,  with  another  individual  the  effect  w'as 
totally  different.  Alarmed  with  the  extraordinary 
noise;  and  still  more  so,  when  he  reached  the  deck, 
with  the  appearance  of  all  the  crew  seated  in  the 
boats  in  their  shirts,  he  imagined  the  ship  was  sink- 
ing. He  therefore  endeavoured  to  get  into  a boat 
himself,  but  every  one  of  them  being  fully  manned, 
he  was  always  repulsed.  After  several  fruitless 
endeavours  to  gain  a place  among  his  comrades, 
he  cried  out,  with  feelings  of  evident  distress, 
what  shall  I do?— Will  none  of  you  take  me  iu?’^ 
The  first  effort  of  a fast-fish,’^  or  whale  that 
has  been  struck,  is  to  escape  from  the  boat,  by  sink- 


168 


WHAl-E-Fi^HBRY. 

ing  under  water.  After  this,  it  pursues  its  course 
directly  downward,  or  re-appears  at  a little  dis- 
tauee,  and  SAvims  with  great  celerity,  near  the  sur- 
face of  the  Avater,  t6AA’;ards  any  neighbouring  ice, 
among  Avhieli  it  may  obtain  an  imaginary  shelter; 
or  it  returns  instantly  to  the  surface,  and  gives  evi- 
dence of  its  agony,  by  the  most  convulsive  throes, 
in  Avhieh  its  fins  and  tail  are  alternately  displayed 
in  the  air,  and  dashed  into  the  Avater  with  tremen- 
dous violence.  The  former  behaviour,  however, 
that  is,  to  dive  toAvards  the  bottom  of  the  sea,  is  so 
frequent,  in  comparison  of  any  other,  that  it  may 
be  considered  as  the  general  conduct  of  a fast  fish. 

A Avhale  struck  near  the  edge  of  any  large  sheet 
of  ice,  and  passing  underneath  it,  Avill  sometimes  run 
the  Avhole  of  the  lines  out  of  the  boat,  in  the  space 
of  eight  or  ten  minutes  of  time.  This  being  the 
case,  Avhen  the  fast-boat”  is.  at  a distance,  both 
from  the  ship  and  from  any  other  boat,  it  fre- 
quently happens  that  the  lines  are  all  withdrawn 
before  assistance  arrivesj  and,  Avith  the  fish,  en- 
tirely lost.  In  some  cases,  hoAvever,  they  are  re- 
covered. To  retard,  therefore,  as  much  as  pos- 
sible, the  flight  of  the  whale,  it  is  usual  for  the 
harpooner,  Avho  strikes  it,  to  cast  one,  tAVo,  or  more 
turns  of  line  round  a kind  of  post  called  a bollard; 
which  is  fixed  Avithin  ten  or  twelve  inches  of  tlie 
stem  of  the  boat,  for  the  purpose.  Such  is  the  fric- 
tion of  the  line,  Avhen  running  round  the  bollard, 
that  it  frequently  envelopes  the  harpooner  in  smoke; 
and  if  the  Avood  Avere  not  repeatedly  wetted,  would 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


169 


probably  set  fire  to  the  boat.  During  the  capture 
of  one  whale,  a groove  is  sometimes  cut  in  the  bol- 
lard, near  an  inch  in  depth;  and,  were  it  not  for  a 
plate  of  brass,  iron,  or  a block  of  lignum-vitse,  which 
covers  the  top  of  the  stem  where  the  line  passes 
over,  it  is  apprehended  that  the  action  of  the  line  on 
the  material  of  the  boat,  would  cut  it  down  to  the  wa- 
ter’s edge,  in  the  course  of  one  season  of  successful 
fishing.  The  approaching  distress  of  a boat,  for 
want  of  line,  is  indicated  by  the  elevation  of  an  oar, 
in  the  way  of  a mast,  to  which  is  added  a second, 
a third,  or  even  a fourth,  in  proportion  to  the  nature 
of  the  exigence.  The  utmost  care  and  attention  are 
requisite,  on  the  part  of  every  person  in  the  boat, 
when  the  lines  are  running  out;  fatal  consequences 
having  been  sometimes  produced  by  the  most  tri- 
fling neglect.  When  the  line  happens  to  run 
foul,”  and  can  not  be  cleared  on  the  instant,  it  some- 
times draws  the  boat  under  water;  on  which,  if  no 
auxiliary  boat,  or  convenient  piece  of  ice  be  at  hand, 
the  crew  are  plunged  into  the  sea,  and  are  obliged 
to  trust  to  the  buoyancy  of  their  oars,  or  to  their 
skill  in  swimming,  for  supporting  themselves  on  the 
surface.  To  provide  against  such  au  accident,  as 
well  as  to  be  ready  to  furnish  an  additional  supply 
of  lines,  it  is  usual,  when  boats  are  sent  in  pursuit,  for 
two  to  go  out  in  company;  and  when  a whale  has 
been  struck,  for  the  first  assisting  boat  which  ap- 
proaches, to  join  the  fast-boat,  and  to  stay  by  it  un- 
til the  fish  re- appears.  The  other  boats,  likewise, 
VoL.  III. 22 


470 


WITAI.E-FISHERYo 


make  towards  the  one  carrying,  a flag,  anti  surronnil 
it  at  various  distances,  awaiting  the  appearance  of 
the  wounded  whale. 

On  my  first  voyage  to  the  whale-fishery,  such  an 
accident,  as  above  alluded  to,  occurred.  A thou- 
sand fathoms  of  line  were  alread}'^  out,  and  the  fast- 
boat  was  forcibly  pressed  against  the  side  of  a piece 
oflce.  The  liarpooner,  in  Ids  anxiety  to  retard  the 
flight  of  the  whale,  applied  too  many  turns  of  the 
line  round  the  bollard,  which,  getting  entangled, 
drew  the  boat  beneath  the  ice.  Another  boat,  pro- 
videntially, was  at  hand,  into  which  the  crew,  in- 
eluding  myself,  who  happened  to  be  present,  had 
just  time  to  escape.  The  whale,  with  near  two 
miles  length  of  line,  was,  in  consequence  of  the 
accident,  lost,  but  the  boat  was  recovered.  On  a 
subsequent  occasion,  I underwent  a similar  misad' 
venture,  but  witli  a happier  result;  we  escaped  with  a 
little  wetting  into  an  uccompanying  boat,  and  the 
whale  was  afterwards  captured,  and  tlie  boat  with 
its  lines  recovered. 

When  fish  have  been  struck  by  myself,  I have 
on  dilTerent  occasions  estimated  their  rate  of  descent. 
For  the  first  300  fathoms,  tlie  average  velocity  was 
usually  after  the  rate  of  eight  to  ten  miles  per  hour. 
In  one  instance,  the  third  line  of  120  fathoms  was 
run  out  in  61  seconds;  that  is  at  the  rate  of  En- 
glish miles,  or  71  nautical  miles  per  hour.  By  the 
motions  of  the  fast-boat,  thesimultancous  movements 
of  the  whale  are  estimated.  Tiie  auxiliary  boats, 


VVIIALE-FISIIEUY. 


171 


accordingly,  lake  their  stations  about  tlie  situation 
where  the  whale,  from  these  motions,  may  reason- 
ably be  expected  to  appear. 

The  average  stay  under  water,  of  a wounded 
whale,  which  steadily  descends  after  being  struck, 
according  to  the  most  usual  conduct  of  the  animal, 
is  about  30  minutes.  The  longest  I ever  observed 
was  56  minutes;  but  in  shallow  water,  I have  been 
informed,  it  has  sometimes  been  known  to  remain 
an  hour  and  a half  at  the  bottom  after  being  struck, 
and  yet  has  returned  to  the  surface  alive.  The 
greater  the  velocity,  the  more  considerable  the  dis- 
tance to  which  it  descends;  and  the  longer  the  time 
it  remains  under  water,  so  much  greater  in  propor- 
tion is  the  extent  of  its  exhaustion  and  the  consequent 
facility  of  accomplishing  its  capture.  Immediately 
that  it  reappears,  the  assisting  boats  make  for  the  place 
with  their  utmost  speed,  and  as  they  reach  it,  each 
liarpooner  plunges  his  harpoon  into  its  back,  to  the 
amount  of  three,  four,  or  more,  according  to  the 
size  of  the  whale,  and  the  nature  of  the  situation. 
Most  frequently,  however,  it  descends  for  a few 
minutes  after  receiving  the  second  harpoon,  and 
obliges  the  other  boats  to  await  its  return  to  the 
surface,  before  any  further  attack  can  be  made.  It 
is  afterwards  actively  plied  with  lances,  which  are 
thrust  into  its  body,  aiming  at  its  vitals.  At  length, 
when  exhausted  by  numerous  wounds  and  the  loss 
of  blood,  which  Hows  from  the  huge  animal  in  co- 
pious streams,  it  indicates  the  approach  of  its  dis- 


i72 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


solution,  by  discharging  from  its  '^‘  blowholes,”  a 
mixture  of  blood  along  with  the  air  and  mucus 
which  it  usually  . expires,  and  finally  jets'  of  blood 
alone.  The  sea,  to  a great  extent  around,  is  dyed 
with  its  blood,  and  the  ice,  boats,  and  men,  are 
sometimes  drenched  with  the  same.  Its  track  is 
likewise  marked  by  a broad  pellicle  of  oil,  which 
exudes  from  its  wounds,  and  appears  on  the  surface 
of  the  sea.  Its  final  capture  is  sometimes  preceded 
by  a convulsive  struggle,  in  which,  its  tail,  rear- 
ed, whirled,  and  violently  jerked  in  the  air,  re- 
sounds to  the  distance  of  miles.  In  dying,  it  turns 
on  its  back  or  on  its  side;  which  joyful  circum- 
.stauce  is  announced  by  the  eapturers  with  the 
striking  of  their  flags,  accompanied  by  three  lively 
huzzas! 

The  remarkable  exhaustion  observed  in  the  first 
appearance  of  a wounded  whale  at  the  surface,  after 
a descent  of  700  or  800  fathoms  perpendicular, 
does  not  depend  on  the  nature  of  the  wound  it  has 
received;  for  a hundred  snperficial  wounds  received 
from  harpoons,  could  not  have  the  effect  of  a single 
lance  penetrating  the  vitals,  but  is  the  effect  of 
the  almost  incredible  pressure  to  which  the  animal 
must  have  been  exposed.  The  surface  of  the  body 
of  a large  whale,  may  be  considered  as  comprising 
an  area  of  1540  square  feet.  This,  under  the  com- 
mon weight  of  the  atmosphere  only,  must  sustain  a 
pressure  of  3,104,640  pounds,  or  1386  tons.  But 
at  the  depth  of  800  fathoms,  where  there  is  a column 


WHALE-FISHERY.  173 

of  water  equal  in  weight  to  about  154  atmospheres, 
the  pressure  on  the  animal  must  be  equal  to  211,200 
tons.*  This  is  a degree  of  pressure  of  which  we 
can  have  but  an.  imperfect  conception.  It  may 
assist  our  comprehension,  however,  to  be  informed, 
that  it  exceeds  in  weight  sixty  of  the  largest  ships 
of  the  British  navy  when  manned,  provisioned,  and 
fitted  for  a six  months  cruise. 

Every  boat  fast  to  a living  whale  carries  a flag, 
and  the  ship  to  which  such  boats  belong,  also  wears 
a flag,  until  the  whale  is  either  killed  or  makes  its 
escape.  ' These  signals  serve  to  indicate  to  sur- 
rounding ships  the  exclusive  title  of  the  fast  ship,” 
to  the  entangled  whale,  and  to  prevent  their  inteiv 
ference,  excepting  in  the  way  of  assistance,  in  the 
capture. 

A very  natural  inquiry  connected  with  this  sub- 
ject, is,  what  is  the  length  of  time  requisite  for  cap- 

-)  ■ ■ 

*From  experiments  made  with  sea-water  taken  up  near 
Spitzbergen,  I find  that  35  cubical  feet  weigh  a ton. 
Now  supposing  a whale  to  descend  to  the  depth  of  800 
fathoms  or  4800  feet,  which,  I believe,  is  not  uncommon, 
we  have  only  to  divide  4800  feet,  the  length  of  the  column 
of  water  pressing  upon  the  whale,  by  35  feet,  the  length  of  a 
column  of  sea-water  a foot  square,  weighing  a ton,  the  quo-' 
tient  137  1-7,  shows  the  pressure  per  square  foot  upon  the 
whale,  in  tons;  which  multiplied  by  1 540,  the  number  of 
square  feet  of  surface  exposed  by  the  animal,  affords  a pro- 
duct of  21 1,200  tons,  besides  the  usual  pressure  of  the  at- 
mosphere. 


174  WHALE-FISHERY. 

turiiig  a whale?  This  is  a question  which  can  only 
he  answered  indirectly;  for  I have  myself  witnessed 
tlie  capture  of  a large  whale,  which  has  been  effect- 
ed in  twenty-eight  minutes;  and  have  also  been  en- 
gaged with  another  fish  which  was  lost,  after  it  had 
been  entangled  about  sixteen  hours.  Instances  are 
well  authenticated,  in  which  whales  have  yielded 
their  lives  to  the  lances  of  active  fishers,  within  the 
space  of  fifteen  minutes  from  the  time  of  being 
struck;  and  in  cases  when  fish  have  been  shot  witli 
a harpoon-gun,  in  a still  shorter  period;  while  other 
instances  are  equally  familiar  and  certain,  wherein 
a whale  having  gained  the  shelter  of  a pack  or  com- 
pact patch  of  ice,  has  sustained  or  avoided  every 
attack  upon  it,  during  the  space  of  forty  or  fifty 
hours.  Some  whales  have  been  captured  wlien 
Very  slightly  entangled  with  a single  harpoon, 
wliile  others  have  disengaged  themselves,  though 
severely  wounded  with  lances,  by  a single  act  of 
violent  and  convulsive  distortion  of  the  body,  or 
tremendous  shake  of  tlie  tail,  from  four  or  more 
harpoons;  in  which  act,  some  of  the  lines  have  been 
broken  witii  apparent  ease,  and  the  harpoons,  to 
which  other  lines  were  attached,  either  broken  or 
torn  out  of  the  body  of  the  vigorous  animal.  Gene- 
rally, the  speedy  capture  of  a whale  'depends  on 
the  activity  of  the  harpooners,  tlie  favourableness 
of  situation  and  weather,  and,  in  no  inconsiderable 
degree,  on  the  peculiar  conduct  of  the  whale  at- 
tacked. Under  the  most  favourable  circumstances, 


WHALE-FTSHEPwY. 


175 


namely,  when  the  fishermen  arc  very  active,  the  ice 
very  open,,  or  the  sea  free  from  ice  and  the  weather 
fine, — the  average  length  of  time  occupied  in  the 
capture  of  a whale,  may  he  stated  as  not  exceeding 
an  hour.^'  The  general  average,  including  all  sizes 
offish,  and  all  circumstances  of ’capture,  may  pro- 
bably  be  two  or  three  hours. 

The  method  practised  in  the  capture  of  whales, 
under  favourable  circumstances,  is  very  uniform 
Avith  all  the  fisliers,  both  British  and  foreigners. 
The  only  variation  observable  in  the  proceedings 
of  the  different  fishers,  consisting  in  the  degree  of 
activity  and  resolution  displayed,  in  pursuance  of 
the  operations  of  harpooning  and  lancing  the  whale, 
and  in  the  address  manifested  in  improving  by  any 
accidental  movement  of  the  fish,  which  may  lay  it 
open  to  an  effectual  attack, — rather  than  in  any 
thing  different  or  superior  in  the  general  method  of 
conducting  the  fishery.  It  is  true,  that  with  some 
the  harpoon-gun  is  much  valued,  and  used  Avith 
advautage,  while  Avith  others,  it  is  held  in  prejudiced 
aversion;  yet,  as  this  difference  of  opinion  affects 


* Twelve  large  whales,  taken  in  different  voyages,  memo- 
randa of  whose  capture  I have  preserved,  were  killed,  on  an 
average,  in  67  minutes.  The  shortest  time  expended  in  the 
taking  of  one  of  the  twelve  whales,  was  28  minutes,  the 
longest  time  2 hours.  One  of  these  whales  we  believed, 
descended  670  fathoms  perpendicular;  another  720;  and  a 
third  750,  one  descended  1400  fathoms  oMiciuely,  and  ano 
ther  1600  fathoms. 


176 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


only  the  first  attack  and  entanglement  of  the  whale, 
the  subsequent  proceedings  with  all  the  fishers,  may 
still  be  said  to  be  founded  on  equal  and  unanimous 
principles.  Hence,  the  mode  described  in  the  pre- 
ceding pages,  of  conducting  the  fishery  for  whales 
under  favourable  circumstances,  maybe  considered 
as  the  general  plan  pursued  by  all  the  fishers  of  all 
the  ports  of  Britain,  as  well  as  those  of  the  nations 
who  resort  to  Spitzbergen.  Neither  is  there  any 
difterence  in  the  plan  of  attack,  or  mode  of  capture 
between  fish  of  large  size,  and  those  of  lesser 
growth;  the  proceedings  are  the  same,  but,  of  course, 
with  the  smaller  whales  less  force  is  requisite; 
though  it  sometimes  happens,  that  the  trouble  at- 
tached to  the  killing  of  a yery  small  whale,  exceeds 
that  connected  with  the  capture  of  oae  of  the  larg- 
est individuals.  The  progress  or  flight  of  a large 
whale  can  not  be  restrained;  but  that  of  an  under 
size  fish  may  generally  be  confined  within  the  limits 
of  400  to  600  fathoms  of  line.  A full  grown  fish 
generally  occupies  the  whole,  or  nearly  the  whole, 
of  the  boats  belonging  to  one  ship  in  its  capture; 
but  three,  four,  or  sometimes  more  small  fish,  have 
been  killed  at  the  same  time,  by  six  or  seven  boats. 
It  is  not  unusual  for  small  whales  to  run  downward, 
until  they  exhaust  themselves  so  completely,  that 
they  are  not  able  to  return  to  the  surface,  but  are 
suflFocated  in  the  water.  As  it  is  requisite  that  a 
whale  that  has  been  drowned  should  be  drawn  up 
by  the  line,  which  is  a tedious  and  troublesome 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


177 


operation,  it  is  usual  to  guard  against  such  an  event 
by  resisting  its  descent  with  a light  strain  on  the 
line,  and  also  by  hauling  upon  the  line,  the  moment 
its  descent  is  stopped,  with  a view  of  irritating  the 
wound,  and  occasioning  such  a degree  of  paiu,  as 
may  induce  it  to  return  to  the  surface,  where  it  can 
be  killed  and  secured  without  further  trouble.  Sel- 
dom more  than  two  harpoons  are  struck  into  an  un- 
der size  whale. 

The  ease  with  which  some  whales  are  subdued, 
and  the  slightness  of  the  entanglement  by  which 
they  are  taken,  is  truly  surprising;  but  with  others 
it  is  equally  astonishing,  that  neither  line  nor  har- 
poon, nor  any  number  of  each,  is  sufficiently  strong 
to  effect  their  capture.  Many  instances  have  oc- 
curred where  whales  have  escaped,  from  four,  five, 
or  even  more  harpoons,  while  fish,  equally  large, 
have  been  killed  through  the  medium  of  a single 
harpoon.  Indeed,  whales  have  been  taken  in  con- 
sequence of  the  entanglement  of  a line,  without  any 
harpoon  at  all;  though,  when  such  a case  has  occur- 
red, it  has  evidently  been  the  result  of  accident.  The 
following  instances  are  in  point. 

A whale  was  struck  from  one  of  the  boats  of  the 
ship  Nautilus,  in  Davis’s  Straits.  It  was  killed, 
and  as  is  usual  after  the  capture,  it  was  disentangled 
of  the  line  connected  with  the  “ first  fast-boat,”  by 
dividing  it  at  the  splice  of  the  foreganger,  within 
eight  or  nine  yards  of  the  harpoon.  The  crew  of 
the  boat  from  which  the  fish  was  first  struck,  in  the 

VoL.  III. — -—23 


178 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


meantime  were  employed  in  heaving  in  the  lines, 
by  means  of  a winch  fixed  in  the  boat  for  the 
purpose,  which  they  progressively  effected  for  some 
time.  On  a sudden,  however,  to  their  great  aston* 
ishraent,  the  lines  were  pulled  away  from  them, 
w ith  the  same  force  and  violence,  as  by  a whale 
when  first  struck.  They  repeated  their  signal,  in- 
dicative of  a whale  being  struck;  their  shipmates 
flocked  towards  them,  and  while  every  one  express- 
ed a similar  degree  of  astonishment  with  themselves, 
they  all  agreed  that  a fish  was  fast  to  the  line.  In  a 
few  minutes,  they  were  agreeably  confirmed  in  their 
opinion,  and  relieved  from  suspense,  by  the  rising 
of  a large  whale  close  by  tliem,  exhausted  with  fa- 
tigue, and  having  every  appearance  of  a fast-fish. 
It  permitted  itself  to  be  struck  by  several  harpoons 
at  once,  and  was  speedily  killed.  On  examining  it 
after  death,  for  discovering  the  cause  of  such  an  in- 
teresting accident,  they  found  tlie  line,  belonging  to 
the  above  mentioned  boat,  in  its  mouth,  where  it  was 
still  firmly  fixed  by  the  compression  of  its  lips.  The 
occasion  of  this  happy  and  puzzling  accident,  was 
therefore  solved; — the  end  of  the  line,  after  being 
cut  from  the  whale  first  killed,  was  in  the  act  of 
sinking  in  the  water;  the  fish  in  question,  engaged 
in  feeding,  was  advancing  with  its  mouth  wide  open, 
and  accidentally  caught  the  line  between  its  extend- 
ed jaws; — asensation  so  utterly  unusual  as  that  pro- 
duced by  the  line,  had  induced  it  to  shut  its  mouth 
and  grasp  the  line,  which  was  the  cause  of  its  alarm. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


179 


so  firmly  between  its  lips,  as  to  produce  the  effect 
just  stated.  This  circumstance  took  place  many 
years  ago,  but  a similar  one  occurred  in  the  year 
1814. 

A harpooner,  belonging  to  the  Prince  of  Brazil, 
of  Hull,  had  struck  a small  fish.  It  descended,  and 
remained  for  some  time  quiet,  and  atlength  appeared 
to  be  drowned.  The  strain  on  the  line  being  then  con- 
siderable, it  was  taken  to  the  ship,  with  a view  of 
heaving  the  fish  up.  The  force  requisite  for  perform- 
ing this  operation,  was  extremely  various;  sometimes, 
the  line  came  in  with  ease,  at  others,  a quantity  was 
withdrawn  with  great  force  and  rapidity.  As  such, 
it  appeared  evident  that  the  fish  was  yet  alive. 
The  heaving,  however,  was  persisted  in,  and  after 
the  greater  part  of  the  lines  had  been  drawn  on  board, 
a dead  fish  appeared  at  the  surface,  secured  by 
several  turns  of  the  line  round  its  body.  It  was 
disentangled  with  difficulty,  and  was  confidently 
believed  to  be  the  whale  they  had  struck.  But 
when  the  line  was  cleared  from  the  fish,  it  proved 
to  be  merely  the  “ bight,”  for  the  end  still  hung 
perpendicularly  downward.  What  was  then  their 
surprise  to  find  that  it  was  still  pulled  away  with 
considerable  force.  The  capstern  was  again  resort- 
ed to,  and  shortly  afterwards,  they  hove  up,  also 
dead,  the  fish  originally  struck,  with  the  har- 
poon still  fast.  Hence  it  appeared,  that  the  fish 
first  drawn  up,  had  got  accidentally  entangled  with 
the  line,  and  in  its  struggles  to  escape,  had  still  fur- 


180 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


ther  involved  itself,  by  winding  the  line  repeatedly 
round  its  body.  The  first  fish  entangled,  as  was 
suspected,  had  long  been  dead;  and  it  was  this  lucky 
interloper,  that  occasioned  the  jerks  and  other  sin- 
gular  efiects  observed  on  the  line. 

iterations  produced  in  the  manner  of  conducting  the 
Fishery,  by  peculiar  Circumstances  of  Situation 
and  Weather. 

Hitherto  I have  only  attempted  to  describe  the 
method  adopted  for  the  capture  of  whales,  under  fa- 
vourable circumstances,  such  as  occur  in  open  water 
or  amongst  open  ice  in  fine  weather;  as,  however, 
this  method  is  subject  to  various  alterations,  when 
the  situation  and  circumstances  are  peculiar,  I shall 
venture  a few  remarks  on  the  subject. 

1.  Pack-fishirig. — The  borders  of  close  packs  of 
drift  ice  are  frequently  a favourite  resort  of  large 
whales.  To  attack  them  in  such  a situation,  subjects 
the  fisher  to  great  risk  in  his  lines  and  boats,  as  well 
as  uncertainty  in  effecting  their  capture.  When  a 
considerable  swell  prevails  on  the  borders  of  the 
ice,  the  whales,  on  being  struck,  will  sometimes  re- 
cede from  the  pack,  and  become  the  prize  of  their 
assailers;  but  most  generally  flee  to  it  for  shelter, 
and  frequently  make  their  escape.  To  guard  against 
the  loss  of  lines  as  much  as  possible,  it  is  pretty 
usual  either  to  strike  two  harpoons  from  different 
boats  at  the  same  moment,  or  to  bridle  the  lines  of 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


181 


a second  boat  upon  those  of  the  boat  from  which 
the  fish  is  struck.  This  operation  consists  in  fixing 
other  lines  to  those  of  the  fast-boat  at  some  distance 
from  the  harpoon,  so  that  there  is  only  one  harpoon 
and  one  line  immediately  attached  to  the  fish,  but 
the  double  strength  of  a line  from  the  place  of  their 
junction  to  the  boats.  Hence,  should  fish  flee  di- 
rectly into  the  ice,  and  proceed  to  an  inaccessible 
distance,  the  two  boats,  bearing  an  equalstra  in  on 
each  of  their  lines,  can  at  pleasure  draw  the  har- 
poon, or  break  the  single  part  of  the  line  immedi- 
ately connected  with  it,  and  in  either  case,  secure 
themselves  against  any  considerable  loss. 

When  a pack,  for  its  compactness,  prevents  boats 
from  penetrating,  the  men  travel  over  the  ice,  leap- 
ing from  piece  to  piece,  in  pursuit  of  the  entangled 
whale.  In  this  pursuit,  they  carry  lances  with  them 
and  sometimes  harpoons,  with  which,  whenever 
they  can  approach  the  fish,  they  attack  it,  and  if 
they  succeed  in  killing  it,  they  drag  it  towards  the 
exterior  margin  of  the  ice,  by  means  of  the  line 
fastened  to  the  harpoon  with  which  it  was  origin- 
ally struck.  In  such  cases,  it  is  generally  an  object 
of  importance  to  sink  it  beneath  the  ice;  for  efiect- 
ing  which  purpose,  each  lobe  of  the  tail  is  divided 
from  the  body,  excepting  a small  portion  of  the  edge, 
from  which  it  hangs  pendulous  in  the  water.  If  it 
still  floats,  bags  of  sand,  kedges  or  small  cannon, 
are  suspended  by  a block  on  the  bight  of  the  line, 
wherewith  the  buoyancy  of  the  dead  whale  is  usu- 


18S 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


ally  overcome.  It  then  sinks,  and  is  easily  hauled 
out  by  the  line  into  the  open  sea. 

To  particularize  all  the  variety  of  pack  fishing, 
arising  from  winds  and  weather,  size  of  the  fish,  state 
and  peculiarities  of  the  ice,  &c.  would  require  more 
space  than  the  interest  of  the  subject,  to  general 
readers,  would  justify.  I shall,  therefore,  only  re- 
mark, that  pack-fishing  is,  on  the  whole,  the  most 
troublesome  and  dangerous  of  all  others; — that  in- 
stances have  occurred  of  fish  having  been  entangled 
during  40  or  50  hours,  and  have  escaped  after 
all; — and  that  other  instances  are  remembered,  of 
ships  having  lost  the  greater  part  of  their  stock  of 
lines,  several  of  their  boats,  and  sometimes,  though 
happily,  less  commonly,  some  individuals  of  their 
crews. 

3.  Field-fishing. — The  fishery  for  whales,  when 
conducted  at  the  margin  of  those  wonderful  sheets 
of  solid  ice,  called  fields,  is,  when  the  weather  is 
fine,  and  the  refuge  for  ships  secure,  of  all  other 
situations  which  the  fishery  of  Greenland  presents, 
the  most  agreeable  and  sometimes  the  most  produc- 
tive. A fish  struck  at  the  margin  of  a large  field  of 
ice,  generally  descends  obliquely  beneath  it,  takes 
four  to  eight  lines  from  the  fast-boat,  and  then  re- 
turns exhausted  to  the  edge.  It  is  then  attacked  in 
the  usual  way,  with  harpoons  and  lances,  and  is 
easily  killed.  There  is  one  evident  advantage  in 
field-fishing,  which  is  this:  When  the  fast-boat  lies 
at  the  edge  of  a firm  unbroken  field,  and  the 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


183 


line  proceeds  in  an  angle  beneath  the  ice,  the  fish 
must  necessarily  arise  somewhere  in  a semicircle, 
described  from  the  fast-boat  as  a centre,  with  a 
sweep  not  exceeding  the  length  of  the  lines  out;  but 
most  generally  it  appears  in  aline  extending  along 
the  margin  of  the  ice,  so  that  the  boats,  when  dis- 
persed along  the  edge  of  the  field,  are  effectual 
and  as  ready  for  promoting  the  capture  as  twice  the 
number  of  boats  or  more,  when  fishing  in  open  situ- 
ations; because,  in  open  situations,  the  whale  may 
arise  any  where  within  a circle,  instead  of  a semicir- 
cle, described  by  the  length  of  the  lines  withdrawn 
from  the  fast-boat;  whence,  it  frequently  happens, 
that  all  the  attendant  boats  are  disposed  in  a wrong 
direction,  and  the  fish  recovers  its  breath,  breaks 
loose,  and  escapes  before  any  of  them  can  secure  it 
by  a second  harpoon.  Hence,  Avhen  a ship  fishes  at  a 
field  with  an  ordinary  crew,  and  six  or  seven  boats, 
two  of  the  largest  fish  may  be  struck  at  the  same 
time  with  every  prospect  of  success;  while  the  same 
force  attempting  the  capture  of  two  at  once  in  an 
open  situation,  will,  not  unfrequently,  occasion  the 
loss  of  both.  There  have  indeed  been  instances  of 
a ship’s  crew,  with  seven  boats,  striking  at  a field, 
six  fish  at  the  same  time,  and  of  success  in  killing 
the  whole.  Generally  speaking,  six  boats  at  a field 
are  capable  of  performing  the  same  execution  as 
near  twice  that  number  in  open  situations.  Besides, 
fields  sometimes  aflbrd  an  opportunity  of  fishing, 
when  in  any  other  situation  there  can  be  little  or  no 


184 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


chance  of  success,  or,  indeed,  when  to  lish  else- 
where  is  utterly  impracticable.  Thus  calms,  storms, 
and  fogs,  are  great  annoyances  in  the  fishery  in  gene- 
ral, and  frequently  prevent  it  altogether;  but  at 
fields  the  fishery  goes  on  under  any  of  these  disad- 
vantages. As  there  are  several  important  advan- 
tages attending  the  fishery  at  fields,  so,  likewise, 
there  are  some  serious  disadvantages,  chiefly  relat- 
ing to  the  safety  of  the  ships  engaged  in  the  occu- 
pation. The  motions  of  fields  are  rapid,  various, 
and  unaccountable,  and  the  power  with  which  they 
approach  each  other,  and  squeeze  every  resisting 
object,  immense, — hence  occasionally  vast  mischief 
is  produced,  which  it  is  not  always  in  the  power  of 
the  most  skilful  and  attentive  master  to  foresee  and 
prevent. 

Such  are  the  principal  advantages  and  disad- 
vantages of  fields  of  ice  to  the  whale-fishers.  The 
advantages,  however,  as  above  enumerated,  though 
they  extend  to  large  floes,  do  not  extend  to  small 
floes,  or  to  such  fields,  how  large  soever  they  may 
be,  as  contain  tracks  or  holes,  or  are  filled  up  with 
tliin  ice  on  the  interior.  Large  and  firm  fields  are 
the  most  convenient,  and  likewise  the  most  advan- 
tageous for  the  fishery;  the  most  convenient,  be- 
cause the  whales,  unable  to  breathe  beneath  a close 
extensive  field  of  ice,  are  obliged  to  make  their  ap- 
pearance again  above  water  among  the  boats  on  the 
look  out;  and  they  are  most  advantageous,  because 
not  only  the  most  fish  commonly  resort  to  them,  but  a 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


185 


greater  number  can  be  killed  with  less  force,  and  in  a 
short  space  of  time,  than  in  any  other  situation.  Thin 
fields,  or  fields  full  of  holes,  being  by  no  means  ad- 
vantageous to  fish  by,  are  usually  avoided,  because 
a “fast-fish,’^  retreating  under  such  a field,  can 
respire  through  the  holes  in  the  centre  as  conve- 
niently as  on  the  exterior;  and  a large  fish  usually 
proceeds  from  one  hole  to  another,  and  if  determin- 
ed to  advance  can  not  possibly  be  stopped.  In  this 
case,  all  that  can  be  done  is,  to  break  the  line  or  draw 
the  harpoon  out.  But  when  the  fish  can  be  observ- 
ed “ blowing,”  in  any  of  the  holes  in  a field,  the 
men  travel  over  the  ice  and  attack  it  with  lances, 
pricking  it  over  the  nose,  to  endeavour  to  turn  it 
back.  This  scheme,  however,  does  not  always 
answer  the  expectations  of  the  fishers,  as  frequent- 
ly the  fear  of  his  enemies  acts  so  powerfully  on  the 
whale,  that  he  pushes  forward  to  the  interior  to  his 
dying  moment.  When  killed,  the  same  means  are 
used  as  in  pack-fishing,  to  sink  it,  but  they  do  not 
always  succeed;  for  the  harpoon  is  frequently  drawn 
out,  or  the  line  broken  in  the  attempt.  If,  there- 
fore, no  attempt  to  sink  the  fish  avails,  there  is 
scarcely  any  other  practicable  method  of  making 
prize  of  it,  (unless  when  the  ice  happens  to  be  so 
thin  that  it  can  be  broken  with  a boat,  or  a channel 
readily  cut  in  it  with  an  ice  saw,)  than  cutting  the 
blubber  away,  and  dragging  it  piece  by  piece  across 
the  ice  to  the  vessel,  which  requires  immense  labour 
and  is  attended  with  vast  loss  of  time.  Hence,  we 
VoL.  III._2I 


186 


AVH  ALE-FISHERY, 


have  a sufficient  reason  for  avoiding  such  situations 
whenever  llsh  can  be  found  elsewhere.  As  con 
nected  with  this  subject,  I can  not  pass  over  a cir- 
cumstance which  occurred  within  my  own  observa- 
tion, and  which  excited  my  highest  admiration. 

On  the  8th  of  July,  1813,  the  ship  Esk  lay  by 
the  edge  of  a large  sheet  of  ice,  in  which  were  seve- 
ral thin  parts,  and  some  holes.  Here  a fish  being 
heard  blowing,  a harpoon,  with  a line  connected  to 
it,  was  conveyed  across  the  ice,  from  a boat  on 
guard,  and  the  harpooner  succeeded,  in  striking  the 
whale,  at  the  distance  of  350  yards  from  the  verge. 
It  dragged  out  ten  lines,  (S400  yards,)  and  was  sup- 
posed to  be  seen  blowing  in  different  holes  in  the 
ice.  After  some  time,  it  happened  to  make  its  ap- 
pearance on  the  exterior,  Avlien  a harpoon  was  struck 
at  the  moment  it  was  on  the  point  of  proceed- 
ing again  beneath.  . About  a hundred  yards  from 
the  edge,  it  broke  the  ice  where  it  was  a foot  in 
thickness,  with  its  crown,  and  respired  through  the 
opening.  It  then  determinately  pushed  forward, 
breaking  the  ice  as  it  advanced,  in  spite  of  the  lances 
constantly  directed  against  it.  It  reached  at  length  a 
kind  of  bason  in  the  field,  where  it  floated  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  water,  without  any  incumbrance  from  ice. 
Its  back  being  fairly  exposed,  the  harpoon,  struck 
from  the  boat  on  the  outside,  was  observed  to  be  so 
slightly  entangled,  that  it  was  ready  to  drop  out. 
Some  of  the  officers  lamented  this  circumstance,  and 
expressed  a wish  that  the  harpoon  were  better  fast, 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


187 


observing,  at  the  same  time,  that  if  it  should  slip 
out,  the  fish  would  either  be  lost,  or  they  ivoiild  be 
under  the  necessity  of  flensing  it  where  it  lay,  and 
of  dragging  the  pieces  of  blubber  over  the  ice  to  the 
ship;  a kind  and  degree  of  labour,  every  one  was 
anxious  to  avoid.  No  sooner  was  the  wish  ex- 
pressed, and  its  importance  made  loiowu,  than  one 
of  the  sailors,  a smart  and  enterprising  fellow,  stept 
forward  aud  volunteered  his  services  to  strike  it  bet- 
ter in.  Not  at  all  intimidated  by  the  surprise  which 
was  manifested  in  every  countenance,  by  such  a 
bold  proposal,  he  pulled  out  his  pocket-knife, 
leapt  upon  the  back  of  the  living  whale,  and  imme- 
diately cut  the  harpoon  out.  Stimulated  by  this 
courageous  example,  one  of  his  companions  pro- 
ceeded to  his  assistance.  While  one  of  them  haul- 
ed upon  the  line  and  held  it  in  his  hands,  the  other 
set  his  shoulder  against  the  extremity  of  the  har- 
poon, and  though  it  was  without  a stock,  he  con- 
trived to  strike  it  again  into  the  fish  more  eifectually 
than  it  was  at  first;  the  fish  was  in  motion  before 
they  finished.  After  they  got  off  its  back,  it  ad- 
vanced a considerable  distance,  breaking  the  ice  all 
the  way,  and  survived  this  uncommon  treatment, 
ten  or  fifteen  minutes.  This  admirable  act  was  an 
essential  benefit.  The  fish  fortunately  sunk  spon- 
taneously, after  being  killed,  on  which  it  was  haul- 
ed out  to  the  edge  of  the  ice  by  the  line,  and  secur- 
ed without  further  trouble.  It  proved  a stout 
whale,  and  a very  acceptable  prize. 


188 


WHALE-FISHERY, 


When  a ship  approaches  a considerable  field  of 
ice,  and  finds  whales,  it  is  usual  to  moor  to  the  lee- 
Avard  side  of  it,  from  which  the  adjoining  ice  usual- 
ly first  separates.  Boats  are  then  placed  on  watch, 
on  each  side  of  the  ship,  and  stationed  at  inter- 
vals of  100  or  150  yards  from  one  another,  along 
the  edge  of  the  ice.  Hence,  if  a fish  arises  any 
where  between  the  extreme  boats,  it  seldom  escapes 
unhurt.  It  is  not  uncommon  for  a great  number  of 
ships  to  moor  to  the  same  sheet  of  ice.  When  the 
whale  fishery  of  the  Hollanders  was  in  a flourishing 
state,  above  100  sail  of  ships  might  sometimes  be 
seen  moored  to  the  same  field  of  ice,  each  having  two 
or  more  boats  on  watch.  The  field  would,  in  conse- 
quence, be  so  nearly  surrounded  with  boats,  that  it 
was  almost  impossible  'for  a fish  to  rise  near  the 
verge  of  the  ice,  without  being  within  the  limits  of 
a start  of  some  of  them. 

3.  Fishing  in  croivded  ice,  or  in  open  packs. — In 
navigably  open  drift  iee,  or  among  small  detached 
streams  and  patches,  either  of  which  serve  in  a de- 
gree to  break  the  force  of  the  sea,  and  to  prevent 
any  considerable  swell  from  arising,  we  have  a 
situation,  which  is  considered  as  one  of  the  best 
possible  for  conducting  the  fishery  in;  consequent- 
ly, it  comes  under  the  same  denomination  as  those 
favourable  situations,  in  which  I have  first  attempted 
to  describe  the  proceedings  of  the  fishers  in  killing 
the  whale.  But  the  situation  I now  mean  to  refer 
to,  is,  when  the  ice  is  crowded  and  nearly  close;  so 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


189 


close,  indeed,  that  it  scarcely  affords  room  for  boats 
to  pass  through  it,  and  by  no  means  sufficient  space 
for  a ship  to  be  navigated  among  it.  This  kind  of 
situation  occurs  in  somewhat  open  packs,  or  in  large 
patches  of  crowded  ice,  and  affords  a fair  proba- 
bility of  capturing  a whale,  though  it  is  seldom  ac- 
complished without  a considerable  degree  of  trou- 
ble. When  the  ice  is  very  crowded,  and  the 
ship  can  not  sail  into  it  with  propriety,  it  is  usual 
to  seek  out  for  a mooring  to  some  large  mass  of 
ice,  if  such  can  be  found,  extending  two  or  three 
fathoms  or  more,  under  water.  A piece  of  ice  of 
this  kind,  is  capable  not  only  of  holding  the  ship 
head-to-wind,’’  but  also  to  windward  of  the  smal- 
ler ice.  The  boats  then  set  out  in  chase  of  any 
fish  which  may  be  seen;  and  when  one  happens  to 
be  struck,  they  proceed  in  the  capture  in  a similar 
manner  as  when  in  more  favourable  circumstances, 
excepting  so  far  as  the  obstruction  which  the  quality 
and  arrangement  of  the  ice  may  offer,  to  the  regular 
system  of  proceeding.  Among  crowded  ice,  for  in- 
stance, the  precise  direction  pursued  by  the  fish  is 
not  easily  ascertained,  nor  can  the  fish  itself  be 
readily  discovered  on  its  first  arrival  at  the  surface, 
after  being  struck,  on  account  of  the  elevation  of  the 
intervening  masses  of  ice,  and  the  great  quantity  of 
line  it  frequently  takes  from  the  fast-boat.  Success 
in  such  a situation,  depends  on  the  boats  being 
spread  widely  abroad,  and  on  a judicious  arrange- 
ment of  each  boat;  on  a keen  look  out  on  the  part 


190 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


of  the  harpooners  in  the  boat,  and  on  their  occasion- 
ally taking  the  benefit  of  a hummock  of  ice,  from 
tlie  elevation  of  wliich  the  fish  may  sometimes  be 
seen  “ blowing’^  in  the  interstices  of  the  ice;  on 
pushing  or  rowing  the  boats  with  the  greatest  imagi- 
nable celerity,  towards  the  place  where  the  fish  may 
have  been  seen;  and,  lastly,  on  the  exercise  of  the 
liighest  degree  of  activity  and  despatch  in  every 
proceeding. 

If  these  means  be  neglected,  the  fish  will  gene- 
rally have  taken  his  breath,  renewed  its  strength, 
and  removed  to  someotlier  quarter,  before  the  arrival 
of  the  boats;  and  it  is  often  remarked,  that  if  there 
be  one  part  of  the  ice  more  crowded  or  more  diffi- 
cult of  access  than  another,  it  commonly  retreats 
thither  for  refuge.  In  such  cases,  the  sailors  find 
much  difficulty  in  getting  to  it  with  their  boats, 
having  to  separate  many  pieces  of  ice  before  they 
can  pass  through  between  them.  But  when  it  is 
not  practicable  to  move  the  pieces,  and  when  they 
can  not  travel  over  them,  they  must  either  drag  the 
boats  across  the  intermediate  ice,  or  perform  an  ex- 
tensive circuit,  before  they  can  reach  the  opposite 
side  of  the  close  ice,  into  which  the  whale  has 
retreated. 

A second  harpoon,  in  this  case,  as  indeed  in  all 
others,  is  a material  point.  They  proceed  to  lance 
whenever  a second  harpoon  is  struck,  and  strike 
more  harpoons  as  the  auxiliary  boats  progressively 
arrive  at  the  place. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


191 


When  the  fish  is  killed,  it  is  often  at  a distance 
from  the  ship,  and  so  circumstanced,  that  the  ship 
can  not  get  near  it.  In  such  cases,  the  fish  must 
be  towed  by  the  boats  to  the  ship;  an  operation 
which,  in  crowded  ice,  is  most  troublesome  and  la- 
borious. 

4.  Bay-ice  fishing. — Bay-ice  constitutes  a situa- 
tion, which,  though  not  particularly  dangerous,  is 
yet,  on  the  whole,  one  of  the  most  troublesome  in 
which  whales  are  killed.  In  sheets  of  bay-ice,  the 
whales  find  a very  effectual  shelter;  for  so  long  as 
the  ice  will  not  “ carry  a man,”  they  can  not  be  ap- 
approached  with  a boat,  Avithout  producing  such  a 
noise,  as  most  certainly  warns  them  of  the  intended 
assault.  And  if  a whale,  by  some  favourable  acci- 
dent, Avere  struck,  the  difficulties  of  completing  the 
capture  are  always  numerous,  and  sometimes  proA’c 
insurmountable.  The  whale  liaA’ing  free  locomo- 
tion beneath  the  ice,  the  fishers  pursue  it  under 
great  disadvantage.  The  fishers  can  not  push  their 
boats  toAvards  it  but  Avith  extreme  difficulty;  Avhile 
the  Avhale,  invariably  Avarued  by  the  noise  of  their 
approach,  possesses  every  facility  for  avoiding  its 
enemies.  In  the  year  1813,  I adopted  a new  plan 
of  fishing  in  bay-ice,  Avhich  Avas  attended  with  the 
most  fortunate  result.  The  ship  under  my  com- 
mand (the  Esk  of  Whitby)  Avas  frozen  into  a sheet 
of  bay-ice,  included  in  a triangular  space,  formed 
by  massive  fields  and  floes.  Here  a number  of 
small  whales  Avere  seen  sporting  around  us,  in 


193 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


every  little  hole  or  space  in  the  bay-ice,  and  occa- 
sionally they  were  observed  to  break  through  it, 
for  the  purpose  of  breathing.  In  various  little  open- 
ings, free  of  ice,  near  the  ship,  few  of  which  were 
twenty  yards  in  diameter,  we  placed  boats;  each 
equipped  with  a harpoon  and  lines,  and  directed 
by  two  or  three  men.  They  had  orders  to  place 
themselves  in  such  a situation,  that  if  a fish  appear- 
ed in  the  same  opening,  they  could  scarcely  fail  of 
striking  it.  Previous  to  this,  I provided  myself  with 
a pair  of  ice  shoes,  consisting  of  two  pieces  of  thin 
deal,  six  feet  in  length,  and  seven  in  breadth. 
They  were  made  very  thin  at  both  ends;  and,  in 
the  centre  of  each,  was  a hollow  place  exactly 
adapted  for  the  reception  of  the  sole  of  my  hoot, 
with  a loop  of  leather  for  confining  the  toes.  I was 
thus  enabled  to  retain  the  ice  shoes  pretty  firmly  to 
my  feet,  when  required,  or,  when  I wished  it,  of 
disengaging  them  in  a moment.  Where  the  ice  was 
smooth,  it  was  easy  to  move  in  a straight  line;  but, 
in  turning,  I found  a considerable  difficulty,  and 
required  some  practice  before  1 could  eflFect  it,  with- 
out falling.  I advanced,  with  tolerable  speed,  when 
the  ice  was  level  on  the  surface,  by  sliding  the 
shoes  alternately  forward,  but  when  I met  with 
rough  hilly  places,  I experienced  great  inconve- 
nience. When,  however,  the  rough  places  happen- 
ed to  consist  of  strong  ice,  which  generally  was  the 
case,  I stepped  out  of  my  ice  shoes,  until  I reached 
a weaker  part.  Equipped  with  this  apparatus,  I 


WHALE-FISHEliV. 


193 


travelled  safely  over  ice  which  had  not  been  frozen 
above  twenty-four  hours,  and  which  was  incapable 
of  supporting  the  weight  of  the  smallest  boy  in  the 
ship. 

Whenever  a fish  was  struck,  I gave  orders  to  the 
harpooner,  in  running  the  lines,  to  use  every  means 
of  drowning  it;  the  trouble  of  hauling  it  up,  under 
the  circumstances  in  which  the  ship  was  placed, 
being  a matter  of  no  consideration.  This  was  at- 
tempted, by  holding  a steady  tight  strain  on  the 
line,  without  slacking  it  or  jerking  it  unnecessarily, 
and  by  forbearing  to  haul  at  the  line  when  the  fish 
was  stopped.  By  this  measure,  one  fish,  the  stout- 
est of  the.  three  we  got,  was  drowned.  When 
others  were  struck,  and  the  attempt  to  drown  them 
failed,  I provided  myself  with  a harpoon;  and,  ob- 
serving the  direction  of  the  line,  travelled  towards 
the  place  where  I expected  the  fish  to  rise.  A 
small  boat  was  launched^  more  leisurely,  in  the 
same  direction,  for  my  support;  and  whenever  the 
ice  in  my  track  was  capable  of  supporting  a man, 
assistance  was  afforded  me  in  dragging  the  line. 
When  the  wounded  fish  appeared,  I struck  my  har- 
poon through  the  ice,  and  then,  with  some  occasional 
assistance,  proceeded  to  lance  it,  until  it  was  killed. 
At  different  times  the  fish  rose  beneath  my  feet,  and 
broke  the  ice  on  which  I stood;  on  one  occasion, 
when  the  ice  was  fortunately  moi|e  than  usually 
strong,  I was  obliged  to  leave  my  ice-shoes  and 
skip  off.  In  this  way  we  captured  three  fish,  and 

VoL.  III. 


194 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


took  their  produce  on  board,  while  several  ships 
near  us  made  not  the  least  progress  in  the  fishery. 
After  they  were  killed,  -we  had  much  trouble  in  get- 
ting them  to  the  ship,  but  as  we  could  not  employ 
ourselves  to  advantage  in  any  other  way,  we  were 
well  satisfied  with  the  issue.  This  part  of  the  busi- 
ness, however,  I could  not  effect  alone,  and  all 
hands  who  were  occasionally  employed  in  it,  broke 
through  the  ice.  Some  individuals  broke  in  two 
or  three  times,  but  no  serious  accident  ensued.  As 
a precaution,  we  extended  a rope  from  man  to  man, 
which  was  held  in  the  hands  of  each  in  their  pro- 
gress  across  the  ice,  and  which  served  for  drawing 
those  out  of  the  water  who  happened  to  break 
through.  Sometimes  ten  or  a dozen  of  them  would 
break  in  at  once;  but  so  far  was  such  an  occurrence 
from  exciting  distress,  that  each  of  their  companions 
indulged  a laugh  at  their  ^expense,  notwithstanding 
they,  probably,  shared  the  same  fate  a minute  or 
two  afterwards.  The  shivering  tars  were,  in  gene- 
ral, amply  repaid  for  the  drenching  they  had  suf- 
fered^ by  a dram  of  spirits,  which  they  regularly 
received  on  such  occasions.  I have  seen  instances, 
indeed,  of  sailors  having  voluntarily  broken  through 
the  ice,  for  the  mere  purpose  of  receiving  the  usual 
precious  beverage. 

5.  Fishings;  in  Storms. — Excepting  in  situations 
sheltered  from  the  sea  by  ice,  it  would  be  alike 
useless  and  presumptuous  to  attempt  to  kill  whales 
during  a storm.  Cases,  however,  occur,  wherein 


WHALE-FISHERY, 


195 


fish  that  were  struck  during  fine  weather,  in  winds 
which  do  not  prevent  the  boats  from  plying  about, 
remain  entangled,  but  unsubdued,  after  the  com- 
mencement of  a storm.  Sometimes  the  capture  is 
completed,  at  others  the  fishers  are  under  the  ne- 
cessity of  cutting  the  lines,  and  allowing  the  fish  to 
escape.  Sometimes,  when  they  have  succeeded  in 
killing  it,  and  in  securing  it  during  the  gale  with  a 
hawser  to  the  ship,  they  are  enabled  to  make  a 
prize  of  it  on  the  return  of  moderate  weather;  at 
others,  after  having  it  to  appearance  secured,  by 
means  of  a sufficient  rope,  the  dangerous  proximity 
of  a lee  pack  constrains  them  to  cut  it  adrift  and 
abandon  it,  for  the  preservation  of  their  vessel. 
After  thus  being  abandoned,  it  becomes  the  prize 
of  the  first  who  gets  possession  of  it,  though  it  be 
in  the  face  of  the  original  capturers.  A storm  com- 
mencing while  the  boats  are  engaged  with  an  en- 
tangled fish,  sometimes  occasions  serious  disasters. 
Generally,  however,  though  they  suffer  the  loss  of 
the  fish,  and  perhaps  some  of  their  boats  and  mate- 
rials, yet  the  men  escape  with  their  lives. 

6.  Fishing  in  Foggy  Weather. — The  fishery  in 
storms,  in  exposed  situations,  can  never  be  volun- 
tary, as  the  case  only  happens  when  a storm  arises 
subsequent  to  the  time  of  a fish  being  struck;  but 
in  foggy  weather,  though  occasionally  attended  with 
hazard,  the  fishery  is  not  altogether  impracticable. 
The  fogs  which  occur  in  the  icy  regions  in  June 
and  July,  are  generally  dense  and  lasting.  They 


196 


WUALE-FISHEUY. 


are  so  thick,  that  objects  can  not  be  distinguished 
at  the  distance  of  100  or  150  yards,  and  frequently 
continue  for  several  days  without  attenuation.  To 
fish  with  safety  and  success,  during  a thick  fog,  is, 
therefore,  a matter  of  difficulty,  and  of  still  greater 
uncertainty.  When  it  happens  that  a fish  conducts 
itself  favourably,  that  is,  descends  almost  perpen- 
dicularly, and  on  its  return  to  the  surface  remains 
nearly  stationary,  or  moves  round  in  a small  circle, 
the  capture  is  usually  accomplished  without  hazard 
or  particular  difficulty;  but  when,  on  the  contrary, 
it  proceeds  with  any  considerable  velocity  in  a 
horizontal  direction,  or  obliquely  downwards,  it 
soon  drags  the  boats  out  of  sight  of  the  ship,  and 
shortly  so  confounds  the  fishers  in  the  intensity  of 
the  mist,  that  they  lose  all  traces  of  the  situation 
of  their  vessel,  if  the  fish,  in  its  flight,  draws  them 
beyond  the  reach  of  the  sound  of  a bell,  or  a horn, 
their  personal  safety  becomes  endangered;  and  if 
they  are  removed  beyond  the  sound  of  a cannon, 
their  situation  becomes  extremely  hazardous,  espe- 
cially if  no  other  ships  happen  to  be  in  the  imme- 
diate vicinity.  Meanwhile,  whatever  may  be  their 
imaginary  or  real  danger,  the  mind  of  their  com- 
mander must  be  kept  in  the  most  anxious  suspense 
until  they  are  found;  and  whether  they  may  be  in 
safety,  or  near  perishing  with  fatigue,  hunger  and 
cold,  so  tong  as  he  is  uncertain,  his  anxiety  must  be 
the  same.  Hence  it  is,  that  feelings  excited  by  un- 
certainty are  frequently  more  violent  and  distress- 


WHALE-FISHERY.  1U7 

ing  than  those  produced  by  the  actual  knowledge  of 
the  truth. 

Keen  and  vigilant  observance  of  the  direction 
pursued  by  the  whale,  on  the  part  of  the  persons 
engaged  in  the  chase,  and  a corresponding  observ- 
ance of  the  same  by  their  commanders,  can  be  the 
only  means  within  the  power  of  each  party  of  secur- 
ing the  ship  and  boats  from  being  widely  separated, 
without  knowing  what  course  to  pursue  for  re-unit- 
ing them.  Much  depends  on  the  people  employed 
in  the  boats  using  every  known  means  to  arrest  the 
progress  of  the  fish  in  its  flight,  by  attacking  it  with 
the  most  skilful,  active,  and  persevering  efforts,  un- 
til it  is  killed;  and  then,  as  speedily  as  may  be,  of 
availing  themselves  of  the  intimation  they  may  pos- 
sess relative  to  the  position  of  the  ship,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  rejoining  her.  But  as  their  knowledge  of  the 
direction  of  their  movements  generally  depends  on 
the  Avind,  unless  they  happen  to  be  provided  with 
a compass,  and  have  attentively  marked  their  route 
by  its  indications,  any  change  in  the  direction  of 
the  Aviud,  must  be  attended  with  serious  conse- 
quences. 

Jinecdotes  illustrative  of  Peculiarities  tn  the  Whale 
Fishery. 

On  the  25th  of  June,  1813,  one  of  the  harpooners 
belonging  to  the  Resolution,  of  Whitby,  under  my 
command,  struck  a whale  by  the  edge  of  a small 


198 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


floe  of  ice.  Assistance  being  promptly  afforded,  a 
second  boat’s  lines  were  attached  to  those  of  the 
fast-boat;  in  a few  minutes  after  the  harpoon  was 
discharged.  The  remainder  of  tlie  boats  proceeded 
to  some  distance,  in  the  direction  the  fish  seemed  to 
have  taken.  In  about  a quarter  of  an  hour  the  fast- 
boat,  to  my  surprise,  again  made  a signal  for  lines. 
As  the  ship  was  then  within  five  minutes  sail,  we 
instantly  steered  towards  the  boat,  with  the  view  of 
affording  assistance,  by  means  of  a spare  boat  Ave 
still  retained  on  board.  Before  we  reached  the 
place,  however,  we  observed  four  oars  displayed  in 
signal  order,  which,  by  their  number,  indicated  a 
most  urgent  necessity  for  assistance.  Two  or  three 
men  were,  at  tlie  same  time,  seated  close  by  the  stern, 
whicli  was  considerably  elevated,  for  the  purpose  of 
keeping  it  down, — while  tlie  bow  of  the  boat,  by  the 
force  of  the  line,  was  drawn  down  to  the  level  of  the 
sea, — and  the  harpooner,  by  the  friction  of  the  line 
round  the  bollard,  was  enveloped  in  smoky  ob- 
scurity. At  length,  when  the  ship  was  scarcely 
100  yards  distant,  we  perceived  preparations  for 
quitting  the  boat.  The  sailors’  2?ea-jackets  were  cast 
upon  the  adjoining  ice, — the  oars  were  thrown 
down, — the  crew  leaped  overboard, — the  bow  of 
of  the  boat  was  buried  in  the  water, — the  stern  rose 
perpendicular,  and  then  majestically,  disappeared. 
The  harpooner  having  caused  the  end  of  the  line 
to  be  fastened  to  the  iron  ring  at  the  boat’s  stern,  Avas 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


199 


(he  means  of  its  loss;*  and  a tongue  of  the  ice,  on 
which  was  a depth  of  several  feet  of  water,  kept  the 
boat,  by  the  pressure  of  the  line  against  it,  at  such 
a considerable  distance  as  prevented  the  crew  from 
leaping  upon  the  fioe.  Some  of  them  were,  there- 
fore, put  to  the  necessity  of  swimming  for  their  pre- 
servation, but  all  of  them  succeeded  in  scrambling 
upon  the  ice,  and  were  taken  aboard  of  the  ship  a few 
minutes  afterwards.  I may  here  observe,  that  it  is 
an  uncommon  circumstance  for  a fish  to  take  more 
than  two  boats’  lines  in  such  a situation;- — none  of 
our  harpooners,  therefore,  had  any  scruple  in  leav- 
ing the  fast-boat,  never  suspecting,  after  it  had  re- 
ceived the  assistance  of  one  boat,  with  six  lines  or 
upwards,  that  it  would  need  any  more. 

Several  ships  being  about  us,  there  was  a pos- 
sibility that  some  person  might  attack  and  make 
a prize  of  the  whale,  when  it  had  so  far  escaped 
us,  that  vve  no  longer  retained  any  hold  of  it;  as 
such,  we  set  all  sail  the  ship  could  safely  sustain, 
and  worked  through  several  narrow  and  intricate 
channels  in  the  ice,  in  the  direction  I observed  the 
fish  had  retreated.  After  a little  time,  it  was  de- 


* “ Giving  a whale  the  boat”  as  the  voluntary  sacrifice  of 
a boat  is  termed,  is  a scheme  not  unfrequently  practised  by 
the  fisher,  when  in  want  of  line.  By  submitting  to  this  risk, 
he  expects  to  gain  the  fish,  and  still  has  the  chance  of  recov- 
ering his  boat  and  its  materials.  It  is  only  practised  in 
open  ice  or  at  fields. 


200 


\VHAT,E-FIS1IERY. 


scried  by  tbe  people  in  the  boats,  at  a considerable 
distance  to  tbe  eastward;  a general  cliase  immediate- 
ly commenced,  and  in  , the  space  of  an  hour  three 
harpoons  were  struck.  We  now  imagined  the  fish 
was  secure,  bat  our  expectations  were  premature. 
The  whale  resolutely  pushed  beneath  a large  floe 
that  had  recently  been  broke  to  pieces  by  the  swell, 
and  soon  drew  all  the  lines  out  of  the  second  fast- 
boat,  the  officer  of  which,  not  being  able  to  get  any 
assistance,  tied  the  end  of  his  line  to  a hummock  of 
ice,  and  broke  it.  Boon  afterwards,  the  other  two 
boats,  still /ast,  were  dragged  against  the  brokenfloe, 
when  one  of  the  harpoons  drew'  out.  The  line  of  only 
one  boat,  therefore,  remained  fast  to  the  fish,  and 
with  six  or  eight  lines  out,  was  dragged  forward 
into  the  shattered  floe  with  astonishing  force.  Pieces 
of  ice,  each  of  which  was  sufficiently  large  to  have 
answered  the  purpose  of  mooring  a ship,  W'ere 
wheeled  about  by  the  strength  of  the  whale;  and 
such  was  the  tension  and  elasticity  of  the  line,  that 
wdienever  it  slipped  clear  of  any  mass  of  ice,  after 
turning  it  round,  into  the  space  between  any  two  ad- 
joining pieces,  the  boat  and  its  crew  flew  forward 
through  the  creek,  with  the  velocity  of  an  arrow, 
and  never  failed  to  launch  several  feet  upon  the  first 
mass  of  ice  that  it  encountered. 

While  we  scoured  the  sea,  around  the  broken 
floe  with  the  ship,  and  while  the  ice  was  attempted 
in  vain  by  the  boats,  the  whale  continued  to  press 
forward  in  an  easterly  direction  towards  the  sea. 


/ ^ 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


201 


At  length,  when  fourteen  lines  (about  1680  fathoms) 
were  drawn  from  the  fourth  fast-boat,  a slight  en- 
tanglement of  the  line  broke  it  at  the  stem.  The 
fish  then  again  made  its  escape,  taking  along  with 
it  a boat  and  twenty-eight  lines.  The  united  length 
of  the  lines  was  672O  yards,  or  upwards  of  3|  En- 
glish milesj  value,  with  the  boat,  above  150  pounds 
sterling. 

The  obstruction  of  the  sunken  boat,  to  the  pro- 
gress of  the  fish,  must  have  been  immense;  and  that 
of  the  lines  likewise  considerable;  the  weight  of  the 
lines  alone,  being  35  hundred  weight. 

Se  long  as  the  fourth  fast-boat,  through  the  me- 
dium of  its  lines,  retained  its  hold  of  the  fish,  we 
searched  the  adjoining  sea  with  the  ship  in  vain; 
but,  in  a short  time  after  the  line  was  divided,  we 
got  sight  of  the  object  of  pursuit,  at  the  distance  of 
near  two  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  ice  and  boats, 
in  the  open  sea.  One  boat  only  with  lines,  and 
two  empty  boats,  were  reserved  by  the  ship.  Hav- 
ing, however,  fortunately  fine  weather,  and  a fresh 
breeze  of  wind,  we  immediately  gave  chase  under 
all  sails;  though,  it  must  be  confessed,  with  the  in- 
significant force  by  us,  the  distance  of  the  fish,  and 
the  rapidity  of  its  flight  considered,  we  had  but 
very  small  hopes  of  success.  At  length,  after  pur- 
suing it  five  or  six  miles,  being  at  least  nine  miles 
from  the  place  where  it  was  struck,  we  came  up 
with  it,  and  it  seemed  inclined  to  rest  after  its  ex- 
traordinary exertions.  The  two  dismantled  or 

VoL.  III.— —26 


SOS  WHALE-FISHERY. 

empty  boats  having  been  furnished  with  two  lines 
each,  (a  very  inadequate  supply,)  they,  together 
with  the  one  in  a good  state  of  equipment,  now 
made  an  attack  upon  the  whale.  One  of  the  har- 
pooners  made  a blunder;  the  fish  saw  the  boat,  took 
the  alarm,  and  again  fled.  I now  supposed  it  v/ould 
be  seen  no  more;  nevertheless,  we  chased  nearly  a 
mile  in  the  direction  I imagined  it  had  taken,  and 
placed  the  boats,  to  the  best  of  my  judgment,  in 
the  most  advantageous  situations.  In  this  case  we 
were  extremely  fortunate.  The  fish  rose  near  one 
of  the  boats,  and  was  immediately  harpooned.  In 
a few  minutes,  two  more  harpoons  entered  its  back, 
and  lances  were  plied  against  it  with  vigour  and 
success.  Exhausted  by  its  amazing  exertions  to 
escape,  it  yielded  itself  at  length  to  its  fate,  received 
the  piercing  wounds  of  the  lances  without  resistance, 
and  finally  died  without  a struggle.  Thus  termi- 
nated with  success,  an  attack  upon  a whale,  which 
exhibited  the  most  uncommon  determination  to  es- 
cape from  its  pursuers,  seconded  by  the  most  ama- 
zing strength  of  any  individual  whose  c apture  I 
ever  witnessed.  After  all,  it  may  seem  surprising, 
that  it  was  not  a particularly  large  individual;  the 
largest  lamina  of  whalebone  only  measuring  nine 
feet  six  inches,  while  those  affording  twelve  feet 
bone  are  not  uncommon.*  The  quantity  of  line 


* It  has  been  frequently  observed,  that  whales  of  this  size 
are  the  most  active  of  the  species;  and  those  of  very  large 
growth  are,  in  general,  captured  with  less  trouble. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


203 


withdrawn  from  the  different  boats  engaged  in  the 
capture,  was  singularly  great.  It  amounted,  alto= 
gether,  to  10,440  yards,^  or  nearly  six  English 
miles.  Of  these,  thirteen  new  lines  lost,  together 
with  the  sunken  boat;  the  harpoon  connecting  them  to 
the  fish,  having  dropt  out  before  the  whale  was  killed. 

After  having  taken  a large  circuit  with  the  ship 
Esk  in  the  open  sea  in  search  of  whales,  we  saw  two 
or  three  individuals,  when  at  the  distance  of  about 
twenty  miles  from  the  middle  hook  of  the  Fore- 
land.-j*  The  weather  was  fine  and  no  ice  in  sight. 
A boat  was  despatched  towards  one  of  the  fish  we 
saw,  which  was  immediately  struck.  The  men 


* The  following  is  a correct  statement  of  the  quantity  of 
lines  withdrawn  from  each  of  the  fast-boats,  viz. 

Yards. 

From  the  first  fast-boat  13  new  lines,  (the  whole 
of  which,  together  with  the  boat,  were  lost,)  har- 


pool!  drew. 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3120 

From  the  second  fast-boat  6|  lines; 

line  broke,  - - 

1560 

third 

do 

05  lines; 

harpoon  drew,  - 

840 

■ fourth 

do 

14  lines; 

line  broke, 

3360 

fifth 

do 

5 line;  harpoon 

drew,  - 

120 

sixth 

do 

25  lines. 

do 

do 

600 

■ seventh 

do 

2i  lines. 

do 

do 

600 

eighth 

do 

1 line, 

do 

do 

240 

Total  in  yards  10,440 


t Charles  Island,  lying  parallel  to  the  west  side  of  Spitz- 
bergen,  is  usually  denominated  the  Foreland;  the  middle 
Hook  is  a remarkable  ridge  of  mountains  near  the  middle 
of  the  Island. 


204 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


were  already  considerably  fatigued,  having  been 
employed  immediately  before  in  the  arduous  opera- 
tion hereafter  to  be  described,  called  malcmg  off; 
but,  of  course,  proceeded  in  the  boats  to  the  chase 
of  the  fast  fish.  It  made  its  appearance  before  they 
all  had  left  the  ship.  Three  boats  then  approached 
it,  unluckily  at  the  same  moment.  Each  of  them 
so  incommoded  the  other,  that  no  second  harpoon 
could  be  struck.  The  fish  then  took  the  alarm  and 
ran  ofiF  towards  the  east,  at  the  rate  of  about  four 
miles  per  hour;  some  of  the  boats  gave  chase  and 
others  took  hold  of  the  fast-boat  and  were  towed  by 
it  to  windward.  When  two  boats,  by  great  exertions 
on  the  part  of  their  crews,  had  got  very  near  the 
fish,  and  the  harpooners  were  expecting  every  mo- 
ment  to  be  able  to  strike  it,  it  suddenly  shifted  its 
course  under  water,  and  in  a few  minutes  discover- 
ed itself  in  a southerly  direction,  at  least  half  a 
mile  from  any  boat.  It  then  completed  a circuit 
round  the  fast-boat,  with  the  sweep  of  nearly  a mile 
as  a radius,  and  though  followed  in  its  track  by  the 
boats,  it  dived  before  any  of  them  got  near  it,  and 
evaded  them  completely.  When  it  appeared  again, 
it  was  at  least  half  a mile  to  windward  of  any  of 
them,  and  then  continued  arduously  advancing  in 
the  same  direction.  At  various  times  during  the 
pursuit,  the  boats  having  the  most  indefatigable 
crews,  reached  the  fish  within  ten  or  fifteen  yards, 
when,  apparently  aware  of  their  design,  it  imme- 
diately sunk  and  changed  its  course;  so  that  it  in- 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


205 


variably  made  its  next  appearance  in  a quarter 
where  no  boats  were  near. 

The  most  general  course  of  the  Avhale  being  to 
windward,  it  soon  withdrew  all  the  boats  many 
miles  from  the  ship,  notwithstanding  our  utmost 
efforts,  under  a press  of  sail  to  keep  near  them. 

After  six  or  seven  hours  pursuit  without  success, 
the  sky  became  overcast,  and  we  were  suddenly  en- 
veloped for  some  time  in  the  obscurity  of  a thick 
fog.  In  this  interval  the  boats  were  all  moored  to 
the  fast-boat,  the  men  being  fearful  of  being  dis- 
persed; but  on  the  disappearing  of  the  fog,  the  pur- 
suit was  recommenced  with  renewed  vigour.  Still 
the  harpooners  were  not  able  to  succeed.  They 
were  now  convinced  of  the  necessity  of  using  every 
measure  to  retard  the  flight  of  the  fish.  For  this 
purpose  they  slacked  out  nine  lines,  a weight  in 
air  of  llcwt.,  while  the  crew  of  the  fast-boat  en- 
deavoured farther  to  retard  its  progress,  by  holding 
their  oars  firmly  in  the  water,  as  if  in  the  act  of 
backing  the  boat  astern.  But  this  plan  did  not  suc- 
ceed. They  then  lashed  two  or  three  boats  with 
their  sides  to  the  stern  of  the  fast-boat,  and  these 
were  dragged  broadside  first,  with  little  diminished 
velocity  for  some  time.  But  the  fish  at  length  feel- 
ing the  impediment,  suddenly  changed  its  course, 
and  again  disappointed  the  people  in  two  of  the 
boats  which  had  got  extremely  near  it. 

Several  times  the  harpooners  seized  their  wea- 
pons and  were  on  the  point  of  launching  them  at 


S06 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


the  fish,  when  in  an  instant  it  shot  from  them  with 
singular  velocity  and  disappeared.  In  this  way 
the  chase  was  continued  for  fourteen  hours,  when 
the  fish  again  turned  to  leeward.  But  the  men,  ex- 
hausted by  such  continued  exertion,  together  with 
the  hard  labour  to  which  they  had  been  previously 
subjected,  at  the  same  time  being  without  meat  or 
drink,  and  sparingly  sheltered  from  the  inclemency 
of  the  weather  by  clothes  drenched  in  oil,  were 
incapacitated  from  taking  advantage  of  the  only 
chance  they  had  ever  had  of  success  from  the  be- 
ginning of  the  chase. 

By  this  time  we  had  reached  the  boats  with  the 
ship.  The  wind  had  increased  to  a gale,  and  a 
considerable  sea  had  arisen.  We  had  no  hope 
therefore  of  success.  As  however  we  could  not 
possibly  recover  the  lines  at  this  time,  stormy  as  the 
weather  was,  we  applied  a cask  as  a buoy  to  sup- 
port  them,  and  moored  an  empty  boat  having  a jack 
flying  in  it,  to  the  cask  with  the  intention  of  keep- 
ing near  it  during  the  storm,  and  with  the  expecta- 
tion of  recovering  our  lines,  and  a faint  hope  like- 
wise of  gaining  the  fish  after  the  termination  of  the 
gale.  The  boat  was  then  abandoned.  We  made 
an  attempt  to  keep  near  the  boat  with  the  ship,  but 
the  increasing  force  of  the  gale,  drove  us  in  spite  of 
every  effort  to  leeward.  On  the  first  cessation  we 
made  all  sail,  and  plyed  towards  the  boat;  succeed- 
ed in  finding  it,  recovered  boat  and  line,  but  lost  the 
whale. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


S07 


On  the  28th  of  May,  1817?  the  E-oyal  Bounty,  of 
Leith,  Captain  Drysdale,  fell  in  with  a great  num- 
ber of  whales  in  the  latitude  of  77°  N.,  and. 

longitude  5°  or  6°  E.  Neither  ice  nor  land  was 
in  sight,  nor  was  there  supposed  to  be  either  the 
one  or  the  other  within  50  or  60  miles.  A brisk 
breeze  of  wind  prevailed,  and  the  weather  was 
clear.  The  boats  M^ere  therefore  manned  and  sent 
in  pursuit.  After  a chase  of  about  five  hours,  the 
harpooner  commanding  a boat,  who,  with  another 
in  company,  had  rowed  out  of  sight  of  the  ship, 
struck  one  of  the  whales.  This  was  about  4 A.  M. 
of  the  29th.  The  captain  supposing,  from  the  long 
absence  of  the  two  most  distant  boats,  that  a fish 
had  been  struck,  directed  the  course  of  the  ship  to- 
wards the  place  where  he  had  last  seen  them,  and 
about  8 A.  M-  he  got  sight  of  a boat  which  display- 
ed the  signal  for  being  fast.  Some  time  afterwards, 
he  observed  the  other  boat  approach  the  fish,  a se- 
cond harpoon  struck,  and  the  usual  signal  displayed. 
As,  however,  the  fish  dragged  the  two  boats  away 
with  considerable  speed,  it  was  mid-day  before  any 
assistance  could  reach  them.  Two  more  harpoons 
were  then  struck,  but  such  was  the  vigour  of  the 
whale,  that  although  it  constantly  dragged  through 
the  water  from  four  to  six  boats,  together  with  1600 
fathoms  of  line,  which  it  had  drawn  out  of  the  dif- 
ferent boats,  yet  it  pursued  its  fiight  nearly  as  fast 
as  a boat  could  row;  and  such  was  the  terror  that  it 
manifested  on  the  approach  of  its  enemies,  that 


208 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


whenever  a boat  passed  beyond  its  tail,  it  invaria- 
bly dived.  All  their  endeavours  to  lance  it,  were 
therefore  in  vain.  The  crews  of  the  loose  boats, 
being  unable  to  keep  pace  with  the  fish,  caught  hold 
of  and  moored  themselves  to  the  fast-boats,  and  for 
some  hours  afterwards,  all  hands  were  constrained 
to  sit  in  idle  impatience,  waiting  for  some  relaxation 
in  the  speed  of  the  whale.  Its  most  general  course 
had  hitherto  been  to  windward,  but  a favourable 
change  taking  place,  enabled  the  ship,  which  had 
previously  been  at  a great  distance,  to  join  the  boats 
at  8 P.  M.  They  succeeded  in  taking  one  of  the 
lines  to  the  ship,  which  was  made  fast  to  the  ship, 
with  a view  of  retarding  its  flight.  They  then  furl- 
ed the  top-gallant-sails,  and  lowered  the  top-sails; 
but  after  supporting  the  ship  a few  minutes  head  to 
wind,  the  wither  of  the  harpoon  upset,  or  twisted 
aside,  and  the  instrument  was  disengaged  from  its 
grasp.  The  whale  immediately  set  off  to  wind- 
ward, with  increased  speed,  and  it  required  an  in- 
terval of  three  hours  before  the  ship  could  again 
approach  it.  Another  line  was  then  taken  on  board 
which  immediately  broke.  A fifth  harpoon  had  pre- 
viously been  struck,  to  replace  the  one  which  was 
pulled  out,  but  the  line  attached  to  it  was  soon  after- 
wards cut.  They  then  instituted  various  schemes  for 
arresting  the  speed  of  the  fish,  which  occupied  their 
close  attention  nearly  twelve  hours.  But  its  velocity 
was  yet  such,  that  the  master,  who  had  himself  pro- 
ceeded to  the  attack,  was  unable  to  approach  suffi- 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


309 


ciently  near  to  strike  a harpoon.  After  a long 
chase,  however,  he  succeeded  in  getting  hold  of  one 
of  the  lines  which  the  fish  dragged  after  it,  and 
of  fastening  another  line  to  it.  The  fish  then  for- 
tunately turned  towards  the  ship,  which  was  at 
a considerable  distance  to  leeward.  At  4 P.  M. 
of  the  30th,  36  hours  after  the  fish  was  struck,  the 
ship  again  joined  the  boats;  when,  by  a successful 
manoeuvre,  they  secured  two  of  the  fast-lines  on 
board.  The  wind  blowing  a moderately  brisk 
breeze,  the  top-gallant  sails  were  taken  in,  the 
courses  hauled  up,  and  the  top-sails  clewed  down; 
but  notwithstanding  the  resistance  a ship  thus  situa- 
ted must  necessarily  olfer,  she  was  towed  by  the  fish 
directly  to  windward,  with  the  velocity  of  at  least 
one  and  a half  to  two  knots,  during  an  hour  and  a 
half.  And  then,  though  the  whale  must  have  been 
greatly  exhausted,  it  beat  the  water  with  its  fins  and 
tail  in  so  tremendous  a way,  that  the  sea  around  was 
in  a continual  foam,  and  the  most  hardy  of  the  sailors 
scarcely  dared  to  approach  it.  At  length,  about  8 
P.  M.,  after  40  hours  of  almost  incessant,  and  for 
the  most  part  fruitless  exertions,  this  formidable  and 
astonishingly  vigorous  animal  was  killed.  The 
capture  and  the  flensing  occupied  48  hours.  The 
fish  was  11  feet  bone  (the  length  of  the  longest 
lamiuse  of  whalebone;)  and  its  produce  filled  47 
butts,  or  23|  ton  casks  with  blubber.* 


* This  interesting  occurrence  was  communicated  to  me 

VoL.  m.-- — 27 


210 


WHAI,E-FISHEKY. 


Excepting  when  it  lias  young  muler  its  protection, 
the  whale  generally  exhibits  remarkable  timidity  of 
character.  A bird  perching  on  its  back  alarms  it. 
The  fisher,  however,  is  sometimes  liable  to  danger 
from  its  fury. 

The  Aim  well,  while  cruising  in  the  Greenland 
seas,  in  the  year  1810,  had  boats  in  chase  of  whales. 
One  of  them  was  harpooned.  But  instead  of  sink- 
ing immediately,  on  receiving  the  wound,  as  is  the 
most  usual  manner  of  the  whale,  this  individual 
only  dived  for  a moment,  and  then  rose  again  be- 
neath the  boat,  struck  it  in  the  most  vicious  manner 
with  its  fins  and  tail,  stove  it,  upset  it,  and  then  dis- 
appeared. The  crew,  seven  in  number,  got  on  the 
bottom  of  the  boat,  but  the  unequal  action  of  the 
line,  which  for  some  time  remained  entangled  with 
the  boat,  rolled  it  occasionally  over,  and  thus  plung- 
ed the  crew  repeatedly  into  the  water.  Four  of 
them,  after  each  immersion,  recovered  themselves, 
and  clung  to  the  boatj  but  the  other  three,  one  of 
whom  was  the  only  person  acquainted  with  the  art 
of  swimming,  were  drowned  before  assistance  could 
arrive.  The  four  men  in  the  boat  being  rescued, 
tbe  attack  was  renewed,  and  two  more  harpoons 
struck.  But  the  whale,  irritated  instead  of  being 
enervated  by  its  wounds,  recommenced  its  furious 


by  the  late  Captain  of  the  Royal  Bounty,  in  a letter  contain- 
ing the  account  of  the  transaction,  as  inserted  in  his  log 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


211 

conduct.  The  sea  was  in  a foam.  Its  tail  and  fins 
were  in  awful  play;  and  in  a short  time,  harpoon 
after  harpoon  drew  out;  the  fish  was  loosened  from 
its  entanglement,  and  escaped. 

Oil  the  3rd  of  June,  1811,  a boat  from  the  Reso- 
lution, commanded  at  the  time  by  myself,  put  off  in 
pursuit  of  a whale,  and  was  rowed  upon  its  back. 
At  the  moment  that  it  was  harpooned,  it  struck  the 
side  of  the  boat  a violent  blow  with  its  tail,  the 
shock  of  which  threw  the  boat  steerer  to  some  dis- 
tance into  the  water.  A repetition  of  the  blow, 
projected  the  harpooner  and  line  manager  in  a simi- 
lar  way.  One  of  the  men  regained  the  boat,  but  as 
the  fish  immediately  sunk,  and  drew  the  boat  away 
from  the  place,  his  two  companions  in  misfortune 
were  soon  left  far  beyond  the  reach  of  assistance. 
The  harpooner,  though  a practised  swimmer,  felt 
himself  so  bruised  by  a blow  he  had  received  on  the 
chest,  that  he  was  totally  incapacitated  from  giving 
the  least  support  to  his  fellow  sufferer.  The  ship 
being  happily  near,  a boat  arrived  to  their  succour, 
at  the  moment  when  the  line  manager,  who  was  un- 
acquainted with  the  art  of  swimming,  was  on  the 
point  of  sinking  to  rise  no  more.  The  fish,  after 
a close  pursuit,  was  subdued. 

A large  whale,  harpooned  from  a boat  belonging 
to  the  same  ship,  became  the  subject  of  a ge- 
neral chase.  Being  myself  in  the  first  boat  which 
approached  the  fish,  I struck  my  harpoon  at  arm’s 
length,  by  which  we  fortunately  evaded  a blow 


212 


WHALB-l'ISHERY. 


which  appeared  to  he  aimed  at  the  boat.  Another 
boat  then  advanced,  and  another  harpoon  was 
struck,  but  not  with  the  same  result,  for  the  stroke 
was  returned  by  a tremendous  blow  from  the  fish’s 
tail.  The  boat  was  sunk  by  the  shock,  and  at  the 
same  time  whirled  round  with  such  velocity,  that 
the  boat  steerer  was  precipitated  into  the  water,  on 
the  side  next  the  fish,  and  was  accidentally  carried 
down  to  a considerable  depth  by  its  tail.  After  a 
minute  or  two  he  arose,  and  was  taken  up,  along 
with  his  companions,  into  my  boat.  A similar  attack 
was  made  on  the  next  boat  which  came  up;  but  the 
harpooner,  being  warned  of  the  prior  conduct  of  the 
fish,  used  such  precaution,  that  the  blow,  though 
equal  in  strength,  took  effect  only  in  an  inferior  de- 
gree. The  activity  and  skill  of  the  lancers  soon  over- 
came this  designing  whale,  and  added  its  produce 
to  the  cargo  of  the  ship.  vSuch  intentional  mischief 
on  the  part  of  the  whale,  it  must  be  observed,  is  a 
somewhat  rare  occurrence. 

Proceedings  after  a Whale  is  Killed. 

Before  a whale  can  be  flensed,  as  the  operation 
of  taking  oli*  the  fat  and  whalebone  is  called,  some 
preliminary  measures  are  requisite.  These  consist 
in  securing  the  fish  to  a boat,  cutting  away  the  at- 
tached whale-lines,  lashing  the  fins  of  the  whale  to- 
gether, and  towing  it  to  the  ship. 

The  first  operation  performed  on  a dead  whale, 
is  to  secure  it  to  a boat.  This  is  easily  effected,  by 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


213 


lashing  it  with  a rope,  passed  several  times  through 
two  holes  pierced  in  the  tail,  to  the  boat’s  bow. 
The  more  difficult  operation  of  freeing  the  whale 
from  the  entanglement  of  the  lines,  is  then  attempt- 
ed. As  the  whale,  when  dead,  always  lies  on  its 
back,  or  on  its  side,  the  lines  and  harpoons  are  ge- 
nerally far  under  water.  When  they  are  seen  pass- 
ing obliquely  downward,  they  are  hooked  with  a 
grapnel,  pulled  to  the  surface  and  cut.  But  when 
they  hang  perpendicularly,  or  when  they  can  not 
be  seen,  they  are  discovered  by  a process,  called 

sweeping  a fish.” 

While  this  is  in  progress,  the  men  of  the  other 
boats,  having  first  lashed  the  tail  to  a boat,  are  em- 
ployed in  lashing  the  fins  together  across  the  belly 
of  the  whale.  I have  observed  two  or  three  curious 
circumstances  connercted  with  these  operations,  which 
I shall  venture  to  mention. 

On  one  occasion,  I was  myself  engaged  in  the 
capture  of  a fish,  upon  which,  when  to  appearance 
dead,  I leaped,  cut  holes  in  the  fins,  and  was  in  the 
act  of  reeving  a rope  through  them,  when  the  fish 
sunk  beneath  my  feet.  As  soon  as  I observed  that 
the  water  had  risen  above  my  knees,  I made  a 
spring  towards  a boat  at  the  distance  of  three  or 
four  yards  from  me,  and  caught  hold  of  the  gunwale. 
Scarcely  was  I on  board  before  the  fish  began  to 
move  forward,  turned  from  its  back  upon  its  belly, 
reared  its  tail  aloft,  and  began  to  shake  it  with  such 
prodigious  violence,  that  it  resounded  through  the 


314 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


air  to  the  distance  of  two  or  three  miles.  After  two 
or  three  minutes  of  this  violent  exercise,  it  ceased, 
rolled  over  upon  its  side,  and  died. 

In  the  year  1816,  a fish  was  to  all  appearance 
killed.  The  fins  were  partly  lashed,  and  the  tail 
on  the  point  of  being  secured,  and  all  the  lines  ex- 
cepting one  were  cut  away,  the  fish  meanwhile 
lying  as  if  dead.  To  the  astonishment  and  alarm, 
however,  of  the  sailors,  it  revived,  began  to  move, 
and  pressed  forward  in  a convulsive  agitation;  soon 
after,  it  sunk  in  the  water  to  some  deptli,  and  then 
died.  One  line  remained  attached  to  it,  by  which 
it  was  drawn  up  and  secured.  A fish  being  proper- 
ly secured,  is  then  “ taken  in  tow,”  that  is,  all  the 
boats  join  themselves  in  a line,  by  ropes  always 
carried  for  the  purpose,  and  unite  their  efforts  in 
rowing  towards  the  ship.  The  course  of  the  ship, 
in  the  mean  time,  is  directed  towards  the  boats,  but 
in  calms,  or  when  the  ship  is  moored  to  the  ice,  at 
no  great  distance,  or  when  the  situation  of  the  fish  is 
inconvenient  or  inaccessible,  the  ship  awaits  the  ap- 
proach of  the  fish. 

The  fish  having  reached  the  ship,  is  taken  to  the 
larboard  side,  arranged  and  secured  for  flensing. 
For  the  performance  of  this  operation,  a variety  of 
knifes  and  other  instruments  is  requisite. 

Towards  the  stern  of  the  ship,  the  head  of  the 
fish  is  directed;  and  the  tail,  which  is  first  cut  off, 
sent  abreast  of  the  fore  chains.  The  smallest  or 
posterior  part  of  the  whale’s  body,  where  the 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


215 


tail  is  united,  is  called  the  rump,  and  the  extremity 
or  anterior  part  of  the  liead  is  drawn  in  an  opposite 
direction  by  means  of  the  nose  tackles.  Hence, 
the  body  of  the  fish  is  forcibly  extended.  The 
right-side  fin,  being  next  the  ship,  is  lashed  upward 
towards  the  gunnel.  A band  of  blubber,  two  or 
three  feet  in  width,  encircling  a fish’s  body,  and 
lying  between  tlie  fins  and  the  head,  being  the 
fat  of  the  neck,  or  what  corresponds  to  the  neck  in 
other  animals,  is  called  the  Tcent,  because  by  means 
of  it  the  fish  is  turned  over  or  Tcented.  In  the  com- 
mencement of  this  band  of  fat  or  kent  is  fixed  the 
lower  extremity  of  a combination  of  powerful  blocks, 
called  the  kent  purchase.  Its  upper  extremity  is 
fixed  round  the  head  of  the  main  mast,  and  its  fall 
or  rope,  is  applied  to  the  windlass,  drawn  tight,  and 
the  upper  surface  of  the  fish  rising  several  inches 
above  the  water.  The  enormous  weight  of  a whale 
prevents  the  possibility  of  raising  it  more  than  one 
fourth,  or  one  fifth  part  out  of  the  water,  except, 
indeed,  when  it  has  been  some  days  dead,  in  which 
case  it  swells  in  consequence  of  air  generated  by 
putrefaction,  until  one  third  of  its  bulk,  appears 
above  the  surface;  the  fish  then  lying  belly  upwainis, 
extended  and  well  secured,  is  ready  for  the  opera- 
tion of  flensing. 

Process  of  Flensing. 

After  the  whale  is  properly  secured  along  side  of 
the  ship,  the  harpooners,  having  their  feet  armed 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


SI  6 


with  spurs,  to  prevent  them  from  slipping,  descend 
upon  the  fish.  Two  boats,  each  of  which  is  under 
the  guidance  of  one  or  two  boys,  attend  upon  them, 
and  serve  to  hold  all  their  knives,  and  other  appa- 
ratus. Thus  provided,  the  harpoouers,  directed 
by  the  specksione  r,*  divide  the  fat  into  oblong 
pieces,  or  slips,’’  by  means  of  blubber  spades” 
and  “ blubber  knives;”  then,  affixing  a “ speck- 
tackle”  to  each  slip,  flay  it  progressively  off,  as  it 
is  drawn  upwards.  The  speck-tackles,  which  are 
two  or  three  in  number,  are  rendered  effective  by 
capstern  winches,  or  other  mechanical  powers. 
The  fleusers  commence  with  the  belly  and  under 
jaw,  being  the  only  part  then  above  water.  The 
blubber,  in  pieces  of  half  a ton  each,  is  received  on 
deck,  and  divided  into  portable,  cubical,  or  oblong 
pieces,  containing  near  a solid  foot  of  fat,  and  pass- 
ed down  between  decks,  when  it  is  packed  in  a re- 
ceptacle provided  for  it  in  the  hold,  or  other  suitable 
place,  called  the  flens-gut,  where  it  remains  until 
further  convenience. 

All  the  fat  being  taken  away  from  the  belly,  and 
the  right  fin  removed,  the  fish  is  then  turned  round 
on  its  side  by  means  of  tlie  kent,  which,  by  the 
power  of  the  windlass,  readily  performs  this  office. 


*The  name  of  this  officer  was  introduced  by  the  Dutch, 
and  is  derived  from  the  word  speck,  which,  in  their  language, 
is  applied  to  the  fat  of  the  whale,  as  well  as  to  that  of  other 
animals. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


S17 

The  upper  surface  of  fat  is  again  removed,  together 
with  the  left  fin,  and  after  a second  kenting,  one  of 
the  lips”  is  taken  away,  which  the  whalebone 
of  one  side  of  the  head,  now  lying  nearly  horizon- 
tal, is  exposed.  The  fish  being  a little  further 
turned,  the  whalebone  of  the  left  side  is  dislodged 
by  the  use  of  bone  hand-spikes,”  “ bone  knives,” 
and  bone  spades.”  These  constitute  what  are 
called  bone  geer,”  and  are  used,  with  the  assist- 
ance of  speck  tackles,  for  taking  up  the  whalebone 
in  one  mass.  On  its  arrival  on  deck,  it  is  split  Avith 
bone  wedges  into  junks,”  containing  five  to  ten 
blades  each,  and  stowed  away.  A further  kenting 
brings  the  fish’s  back  upward,  and  the  next  exposes 
the  second  side  of  bone.  As  the  fish  is  turned  round, 
every  part  of  the  blubber  becomes  successively  up- 
permost and  is  removed.  At  length,  when  the 
whole  of  the  blubber,  whalebone,  and  jaw  bones 
have  been  taken  on  board,  the  kent,  which  now  ap- 
pears a slip  of  perhaps  30  feet  in  length,  is  also 
separated,  together  Avith  the  rump  rope,  and  nose 
tackle,  on  Avhich,  the  carcass  being  at  liberty,  gene- 
rally sinks  in  the  water  and  disappears. 

When  sharks  are  present,  they  generally  help 
themselves  very  plentifully,  during  the  progress  of 
the  fiensing;  but  they  often  pay  for  their  temeri- 
ty with  their  lives.  Fulmars  pay  close  attendance 
in  immense  numbers.  They  seize  the  fragments 
occasionally  disengaged  by  the  knife,  Avhile  they 
are  swimming  in  the  Avater:  but  most  of  the  other 

Yol.  111. 28 


218 


WHALK-FISHERY. 


gulls,  who  attend  on  the  occasion,  take  their  share 
on  the  wing.  The  burgomaster  is  decidedly  mas- 
ter  of  the  feast.  Hence  every  bird  is  obliged  to  re- 
linquish the  most  delicious  morsel,  when  the  burgo- 
master  descends  to  claim  it. 

When  despatch  is  seconded  by  ability,  the  ope- 
ration of  flensing  can  be  performed  on  a whale,  af- 
fording 20  or  30  tons  of  blubber,  in  the  space  of 
tjhree  or  four  hours.  Flensing  in  a swell  is  a most 
dilBcult  and  dangerous  undertaking,  and  when  the 
swell  is  considerable,  it  is  commonly  impracticable. 
No  ropes  or  blocks  are  capable  of  bearing  the  jerk 
of  the  sea.  The  harpooners  are  annoyed  by  the 
surge,  and  repeatedly  drenched  in  water,  and  are 
likewise  snbject  to  be  wounded  by  the  breaking  of 
ropes,  or  hooks,  or  tackles,  and  even  by  strokes 
from  each  other’s  knives.  Hence,  accidents  in  this 
kind  of  flensing  are  not  uncommon.  The  harpoon 
ers  not  unfrequently  fall  into  the  fish’s  mouth,  when 
it  is  exposed'by  the  removal  of  a surface  of  blubber; 
where  they  might  easily  be  drowned,  but  for  prompt 
assistance. 

Some  years  ago,  1 was  witness  of  a circumstance 
in  which  a harpooner  was  exposed  to  the  most  im- 
minent risk  of  his  life  at  the  conclusion  of  a flensing 
process,  by  a very  curious  accident.  The  harpooner 
stood  on  one  of  the  jaw  bones  of  the  fish,  with  a boat 
by  his  side.  In  this  situation,  while  he  was  in  the 
act  of  cntting  the  kreng*  adrift,  a boy  inadvertently 


* The  carcass,  after  being  flensed,  is  so  called. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


S19 


stuck  the  point  of  the  boat-hook,  by  which  he  usu- 
ally held  the  boat,  through  the  ring  of  the  harpoon- 
er’s  spur,  and  in  the  same  act,  seized  the  jaw  bone 
of  the  fish  with  the  hook  of  the  same  instrument. 
Before  this  was  discovered,  the  kreng  was  set  at 
liberty,  and  began  instantly  to  sink.  The  har- 
pooner  then  threw  himself  towards  the  boat,  but 
being  firmly  entangled  by  the  foot,  he  fell  into 
the  water.  Providentially  he  caught  the  gunwale 
of  the  boat  with  both  hands;  but  overpowered  by  the 
force  of  the  sinking  kreng,  he  was  on  the  point  of 
relinquishing  his  grasp,  when  some  of  his  compan- 
ions got  hold  of  his  hands  while  others  threw  a rope 
round  his  body.  The  carcass  of  the  fish  was  now 
suspended  entirely  by  his  body,  which  was  conse- 
quently so  dreadfully  extended,  that  there  was 
some  danger  of  his  being  drawn  asunder.  But  such 
was  his  terror  of  being  taken  under  water,  that 
notwithstanding  the  excruciating  pain  he  suffered, 
he  constantly  cried  to  his  companions,  to  “ haul 
away  the  rope.”  He  remained  in  this  dreadful  state 
until  means  were  adopted  for  hooking  the  kreng 
with  a grapnel,  and  drawing  it  back  to  the  surface 
of  the  Avater. 

Process  oj  Making  Off. 

When  a fish  is  caught,  or  sometimes  Avhen  there 
is  a good  prospect  of  success  in  the  fishery,  even 
before  a fish  is  caught,  the  centre  of  the  ship’s  hold 
is  disencumbered  of  a few  of  its  casks,  to  be  in 


220 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


readiness  for  the  reception  of  the  blubber.  The 
cavity  thus  made,  together  with  all  the  space  be- 
tween decks  which  can  conveniently  be  appro- 
priated to  the  same  purpose,  receives  the  name  of 
the  fiens-gut.  Now,  when  the  flens-gut  is  filled 
with  blubber,  or  when,  no  fish  having  been  seen,  a 
favourable  opportunity  of  leisure  is  presented,  the 
operation  of  making  off*  is  generally  commenced. 
This  consists  of  freeing  the  fat  from  all  extraneous 
substances,  especially  the  muscular  parts,  and  the 
skin;  then  cutting  it  into  small  pieces,  and  putting 
it  into  casks  through  the  bunghole.  Before  the 
process  of  making  off  can,  however,  be  commenced, 
several  preparatory  measures  are  necessary.  The 
ship  must  be  moored  to  a convenient  piece  of  ice, 
or  placed  in  an  open  situation,  and  the  sails  so  re- 
duced as  to  require  no  further  attention  in  the  event 
of  bad  weather  occurring.  The  hold  of  the  ship 
must  be  cleared  of  its  superstructure  of  casks,  until 
the  “ ground  tier,’’  or  lowest  stratum  of  casks, ‘is 
exposed;  and  the  ballast  water  must  be  started,” 
or  pumped  out  of  all  the  casks  that  are  removed 
upon  deck,  as  well  as  out  of  those  in  the  ground 
tier,  which  are  first  prepared  for  the  reception  of 
the  blubber.  In  “ breaking  out  the  hold,”  it  is 


* The  expression  “ making  ofif,”  seems  to  be  derived  from 
the  word  afmaaken  of  the  Dutch,  signifying  to  finish,  ad- 
just, or  complete,  referring  to  the  nature  of  the  operation, 
as  a concluding,  finishing,  or  adjusting  process. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


2M 

not  necessary  to  lay  open  more  of  the  ground  tier  at 
a timcj  than  three  or  four  casks  extended  in  length. 

The  water  which  is  discharged  from  the  casks 
in  the  hold,  provided  they  have  been  before  in  use, 
gives  out  a great  quantity  of  a strong  disagreeable 
vapour,  consisting  probably  of  sulphuretted  and 
phosphuretted  hydrogen,  with  a mixture  of  other 
gaseous  fluids,  produced  by  the  decomposition  of 
the  oleaginous,  and  other  animal  substances,  left  in 
the  casks  after  former  voyages.  This  decomposi- 
tion seems  to  be  encouraged,  if  not  wholly  produced, 
by  the  action  of  the  water  on  the  animal  matter; 
because  the  same  casks,  if  bunged  close,  When 
empty,  give  out  but  a small  quantity  of  gas  and 
that  of  inferior  pungency.  The  gas  proceeding 
from  oily  casks,  having  contained  water,  resembles, 
in  some  degree,  though  vastly  more  pungent,  the  gas 
evolved  by  bilge  water,”  or  the  stagnant  water 
which  rests  among  the  timbers  of  a very  tight  ship. 
The  gas  discharged  from  oily  casks,  is  usually 
stronger  and  more  abundant,  in  proportion  as  the 
water  from  which  it  is  disengaged,  has  been  a longer 
time  in  the  casks.  A considerable  quantity  of  it  is 
generated  in  the  space  of  three  or  four  months. 
This  gas  blackens  metals,  even  gold,  restores  some 
metallic  oxides,  is  disagreeable  in  respiration,  and 
aflfects  the  eyes  of  the  persons  employed  in  the  hold, 
where  it  is  most  abundant,  so  as  to  occasion  ophtfel- 
mic  inflammation,  and  frequently  temporary  bliad- 
ness. 


223 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


While  the  line-managers,  together  with  the 
“ skeeman/’^  the  cooper,  and  perhaps  a few  others, 
are  employed  in  breaking  out  the  hold,  the  rest  of 
the  crew  on  the  deck  arrange  all  the  variety  of  ap- 
paratus used  for  the  preparation  of  the  blubber,  be- 
fore it  is  put  into  the  casks.  Of  this  apparatus,  the 
most  considerable  part  is  the  “ speck-trough,”  with 
its  appendages.  It  consists  of  a kind  of  oblong 
box  or  chest,  about  twelve  feet  in  length,  1|  feet 
in  breadth,  and  feet  in  depth.  The  speck-trough 
is  fixed  upon  the  deck,  as  nearly  as  possible  over 
the  place  where  the  casks  are  to  be  filled  in  the 
hold.  A square  hole,  made  in  its  bottom,  is  placed 
either  over  the  nearest  hatch-way  to  the  scene  of 
operation,  or  upon  a corresponding  hole  cut  in  the 
deck. 

The  speck-trough  is  then  secured,  and  its  lid 
turned  backward  into  a horizontal  position;  in 
which  position  it  is  supported  on  one  side  by  its 
hinges,  and  on  the  other  by  screw  props  or  pillars; 
or  it  is  altogether  rested  upon  several  little  stools. 
The  surface  of  the  lid,  which  thus  placed,  forms  a 
level  table,  is  then  covered  with  blocks  of  whales’ 
tail,  from  end  to  end.  This  substance,  from  its 
sinewy  and  elastic  nature,  makes  excellent  “chop- 
ping blocks,”  and  preserves  the  “ chopping  knives” 
from  injury,  when  used  for  dividing  the  blubber 


**  The  officer  who  has  the  direction  of  operations  con- 
ducting in  the  hold. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


223 


upon  it.  Into  the  square  hole  in  the  bottom  of  the 
speck-trough  is  fitted  an  iron-frame,  to  which  is 
suspended  a canvass  tube  or  “ hose,”  denominated 
a lull.  The  lull  is  open  at  both  ends.  Its  diame- 
ter is  about  a foot,  and  its  length  sufficient  to  reach 
from  the  deck  to  the  bottom  of  the  hold.  To  the 
middle,  or  towards  the  upper  part  of  the  lull,  is  at- 
tached a '^^pair  of  nippers,”  consisting  of  two  sticks 
fastened  together  by  a kind  of  hinge  at  one  end,  and 
capable  of  being  pressed  together  at  the  other.  The 
nippers  being  passed  across  the  body  of  the  lull, 
and  their  detached  extremities  brought  together, 
they  embrace  it  so  closely,  that  nothing  can  pass 
downward  while  they  remain  in  this  position;  but 
when,  on  the  other  hand,  the  nippers  are  extended, 
the  lull  forms  a free  channel  of  communication  be- 
tween the  speck-trough  and  the  hold. 

Every  thing  being  now  in  readiness,  the  blub- 
ber, as  it  is  thrown  out  of  the  flens-gut,  undergoes 
the  following  several  operations.  It  is  received 
upon  deck  by  the  “krengers,”  whose  office  is  to 
remove  all  the  muscular  parts,  together-with  such 
spongy  or  fibrous  fat,  as  is  known  by  experi- 
ence to  produce  very  little  oil.  When  these  sub- 
stances, which  go  under  the  general  denomination 
of  kreng,  are  included  among  the  blubber  in  the 
casks,  they  undergo  a kind  of  fermentation,  and 
generates  such  a quantity  of  gas,  as  sometimes  to 
burst  the  containing  vessels,  and  occasion  the  loss 
of  their  contents.  From  the  krengers,  the  blubber 


22i 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


passes  to  the  harpooners.  Each  of  these  officers, 
provided  with  a blubber-knife,  or  a strand  knife, 
places  himself  by  the  side  of  a closh,’^  which 
is  an  upright  fixed  in  the  deck,  from  the  top 
whereof,  project  several  sharp  spikes.  An  attend- 
ant, by  means  of  a pair  of  hand  hooks,”  or  a 
pick  haak,”  then  mounts  a piece  of  blubber  upon 
the  spikes  of  the  closb,  and  the  harpooner  slices  off 
tlie  skin.  From  the  skinners,  the  blubber  is  passed 
into  an  open  space  called  the  bank,  prepared  as  a de- 
positary, in  front  of  the  speck-trough  and  it  is  then 
laid  upon  the  “ chopping  blocks,”  as  wanted.  It 
now  falls  under  the  hands  of  the  boat  steerers,  who 
armed  with  “ chopping  knives,”  are  arranged  in  a 
line  by  the  side  of  the  chopping-blocks,  with  the 
speck-trough  before  them.  Thus  prepared,  they 
divide  the  blubber,  as  it  is  placed  on  their  blocks, 
into  oblong  pieces,  not  exceeding  four  inches  in 
diameter,  and  push  it  into  the  speck-trough  intend- 
ed for  its  reception,  And,  finally,  the  blubber  falls 
under  the  direction  of  the  line  managers  stationed 
in  the  hold,  who  receive  it  into  tubs,  through  the 
medium  of  the  lull;  and  pass  it,  without  any  instru- 
ment’but  their  hands,  into  the  casks  through  their 
bung-holes.  The  casks  being  closely  filled,  are  then 
securely  bunged  up. 

When  the  ground  tier  casks,  as  far  as  they  have 
been  exposed,  are  filled,  the  second  tier  of  casks  is 
stowed”  upon  it,  and  likewise  filled  with  blubber, 
together  with  the  third  tier  casks  when  necessary. 
As  in  this  progressive  manner,  when  fish  can  be 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


335 


had  in  sufficiency,  all  the  hold  is  filled,  and  like- 
wise the  space  between  decks, — it  is  evident,  that 
the  process  of  making-off  must  be  tedious,  disagreea- 
ble and  laborious.  Fifty  men,  actively  employed, 
can  prepare  and  pack  about  three  tons  of  blubber 
in  an  hour;  though,  more  frequently,  they  are  con- 
tented with  making-off  little  more  than  half  that 
quantity.^ 

When  a ship,  which  makes  a successful  fishing, 
is  deficient  in  casks,  the  remaining  vacancies  adapt- 
ed for  the  reception  of  the  cargo,  are  filled  with 
“ blubber  in  bulk,”  that  is,  the  blubber,  in  large 
pieces  as  it  is  taken  off  the  whales,  is  laid  skin 
downward,  upon  the  highest  tier  of  casks,  and  over 
this,  stratum  after  stratum,  until  the  vacancies  are 
filled.  A little  salt  is  usually  scattered  over  the 
surface  of  each  stratum  of  blubber,  which  assists  in 
preserving  the  animal  fibre,  and  in  preventing  the 
discharge  of  the  oil.  Blubber  in  bulk,  notwithstand- 
ing every  precaution,  however,  generally  loses  much 
of  its  oil. 

A quick  passage  homeward,  with  cool  weather 
and  smooth  sea,  are  favourable  for  its  preservation. 


* The  operation  of  making-otf  was  always,  in  the  earlier 
ages  of  the  fishery,  performed  on  shore;  and  even  so  recently 
as  the  middle  of  last  century,  it  was  customary  for  ships  to 
proceed  into  a harbour,  and  there  remain  so  long  as  this 
process  was  going  on. 

VoL.  III. -39 


226 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


but  under  the  influence  of  opposite  circumstances, 
it  becomes  greatly  reduced. 

Py'ocess  of  boiling  Blubber,  or  extracting  Oil. 

The  blubber,  which  is  originally  in  the  state  of 
firm  fat,  is  found,  on  arrival  in  a warm  climate,  to 
be  in  a great  measure  resolved  into  oil.  The  casks 
containing  the  blubber  are  conveyed  by  a mechani- 
cal apparatus  to  the  top  of  a wooden  cistern,  called 
the  starting-hack,  capable  of  containing  from  3 to 
6 or  10  tons,  into  which  their  contents  are  started 
through  the  bung-holes.  When  the  copper  or  boil- 
er, which  is  a vessel  of  about  the  same  capacity  as 
the  starting-back,  is  properly  cleansed,  the  contents 
of  the  starting-back,  on  lifting  a clougli  at  the  ex- 
tremity, or  turning  a stop  cock,  fall  directly  into 
the  copper,  one  edge  of  which  is  usually  placed 
beneath.  The  copper  is  filled  within  two  or  three 
inches  of  the  top,  a little  space  being  requisite  to 
admit  of  the  expansion  of  the  oil  when  heated;  and 
then  a brisk  fire  is  applied  in  the  furnace,  and  con- 
tinues until  the  oil  begins  to  boil.  This  usually 
takes  place  in  less  than  two  hours.  Many  of  the 
fritters  or  fenks  ( the  refuse)  float  on  the  surface  of 
the  oil  before  it  is  heated,  but  after  it  is  boiled  off, 
the  whole,  or  nearly  so,  subside  to  the  bottom.  From 
the  time  the  copper  begins  to  warm,  until  it  is  boil- 
ed oft*,  or  ceases  to  boil,  its  contents  must  be  in- 
cessantly stirred  by  means  of  a pole  armed  with  a 


WHALE-FISHERY, 


227 


kind  of  broad  blunt  chisel,  to  prevent  the  fenks  from 
adhering  to  the  bottom  or  sides  of  the  vessel.  When 
once  the  contents  of  the  copper  boil,  the  fire  in  the 
furnace  is  immediately  reduced,  and  shortly  after- 
wards altogether  withdrawn.  Some  persons  allow 
the  copper  to  boil  an  hour,  others  during  two  or 
three  hours.  The  former  practice  is  supposed  to 
produce  finer  or  paler  oil,  the  latter  a greater  quan- 
tity. Supposing  the  copper  to  he  filled  at  four  in 
the  morning,  it  is  generally  brought  to  boil  by  half 
past  five,  and  boiled  off  at  half  past  six  or  seven. 
It  then  stands  to  cool  or  subside,  until  about  two 
in  the  afternoon,  when  the  bailing  process  com- 
mences. A back  or  cooler  having  been  prepared 
for  the  reception  of  the  oil,  by  putting  into  it  a quan- 
tity of  water,^  for  the  double  purpose  of  preventing 
the  heat  of  the  oil  from  warping  or  rending  the 
back,  and  for  receiving  any  impurities  which  it  may 
happen  to  hold  in  suspension;  a wooden  spout,  with 
a large  square  box-like  head,  which  head  is  filled 
with  brush-wood  or  broom,  that  it  may  act  as  a fil- 
ter, is  then  placed  along,  from  the  “ copper*head”f 
to  the  cooler,  so  as  to  form  a communication  be- 
tween the  two.  The  oil  in  the  copper  being  now 
separated  from  the  fenks,  water,  and  other  impuri- 


*Some  persons  dispense  with  the  water,  believing  that  it 
promotes  rancidity  in  the  oil. 

t The  platform  built  around  the  edge  of  the  copper,  is 
called  the  copper-head. 


228 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


ties,  all  of  which  have  subsided  to  the  bottom,  is, 
in  a great  measure,  run  oflf  through  the  pipe  com- 
municating with  the  cooler,  and  the  remainder  is 
carefully  lifted  in  copper  or  tin  ladles,  and  poured 
upon  the  broom  in  the  spout,  from  whence  it  runs 
into  the  same  cooler,  or  any  other  cooler,  at  the 
pleasure  of  the  boilers.”-  Besides  oil  and  fenks, 
the  blubber  of  the  whale  likewise  affords  a con- 
siderable quantity  of  watery  liquor,  produced  pro- 
bably from  the  putrescence  of  the  blood,  on  the  sur- 
face of  which,  some  of  the  fenks,  and  all  the  greasy 
animal  matter  called  footje  or  footing,  float,  and 
upon  the  top  of  these  the  oil.  Great  care,  there- 
fore, is  requisite,  on  approaching  these  impure  sub- 
stances, to  take  the  oil  off  by  means  of  shallow 
tinned  iron  or  copper  ladles,  called  skimmers,  with- 
out disturbing  the  refuse,  and  mixing  it  with  the 
oil.  There  must  always,  however,  be  a small 
quantity  towards  the  conclusion,  which  is  a mixturo 
of  oil  and  footing;  such  is  put  into  a cask  or  other 
suitable  vessels  by  itself,  and  when  the  grossy  part 
has  thoroughly  subsided,  the  most  pure  part  is 
skimmed  off,  and  becomes  fine  oil,  and  the  impure 
is  allowed  to  accumulate  by  itself  in  another  vessel, 
where,  in  the  end,  it  affords  “ brown  oil.” 

The  refuse  now  left  in  the  copper,  is  hailed  into 


* The  men  employed  in  extracting  oil  are  thus  denomi- 
nated. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


229 


a timuel  or  spout,  which  conveys  it  into  the  fenk- 
baek,  where  it  remains  as  long  as  the  capacity  of 
the  vessel  will  admit;  a portion  of  brown  oil,  which 
is  constantly  found  rising  to  the  surface,  being,  in 
the  meantime,  occasionally  skimmed  off. 

A few  years  ago,  my  father  instituted  a process 
for  reducing  blubber  into  oil,  by  the  use  of  steam; 
and  a similar  process  has  been  adopted  in  Hull,  and 
other  ports,  and  applied  to  the  extraction  of  oil, 
with  considerable  advantage. 

From  a ton,  or  252  gallons  by  measure,  of  blub- 
ber, there  generally  arises  from  50  to  65  gallons 
of  refuse,  whereof  the  greater  part  is  a watery 
fluid.  The  constant  presence  of  this  fluid,  which 
boils  at  a much  lower  temperature  than  the  oil, 
prevents  the  oil  itself  from  boiling,  which  is, 
probably  an  advantage,  since,  in  the  event  of  the 
oil  being  boiled,  some  of  the  flnest  and  most  in- 
flammable part,  would  fly  off  in  the  form  of  vapour; 
whereas,  the  principal  part  of  the  steam,  which 
now  escapes,  is  produced  from  the  water. 

Some  persons  make  a practice  of  adding  a quan- 
tity of  water,  amounting,  perhaps,  to  half  a ton,  to 
the  contents  of  each  copper,  with  the  view  of  weak- 
ening or  attenuating  the  viscid  impurities  contained 
in  the  blubber,  and  thus  obtaining  a finer  oil;  others 
consider  the  quantity  of  walery  fluid,  already  in  the 
blubber,  as  sufficient  for  producing  every  needful 
effect. 

Each  day,  immediately  after  the  copper  is  emp- 
tied, and  while  it  is  yet  hot,  the  men  employed  in 


230 


WHALE-FISHEKY. 


the  manufacture  of  the  oil,  having  their  feet  defend- 
ed by  strong  leathern  or  wooden  shoes,  descend  in- 
to it,  and  scour  it  out  with  sand  and  w'ater,  until 
they  restore  the  natural  surface  of  the  copper,  wher- 
ever it  is  discoloured.  This  serves  to  preserve  the 
oil  from  becoming  high  coloured,*  which  will  al- 
ways be  the  case,  when  proper  cleanliness  is  not 
observed. 

The  starting-back  being  previously  filled  with 
blubber,  its  contents  are  again  transferred  into  the 
copper,  and  the  fire  is  applied  as  before.  This  is 
generally  accomplished  by  four,  or  half  past  four 
o’clock  in  the  afternoon.  The  copper  again  boils 
by  half  an  hour  after  five  or  sixj  and  is  boiled  off 
by  seven  or  eight  in  the  evening.  The  men  em- 
ployed in  this  service,  consisting  of  about  six  per- 
sons, alternately  watch  in  the  night  by  couples. 
Those  on  watch,  commence  about  two  in  the  morn- 
ing to  empty  the  copper,  which  done,  they  again  fill  it 
from  the  starting-back,  which  is  always  made  ready 
the  night  before.  Thus  the  process  goes  on,  until  » 
the  whole  cargo  is  finished. 

By  means  of  three  coolers,  severally  capable  of 
containing  at  least  twice  the  quantity  of  oil  produc- 


* The  palest  coloured  oikismost  esteemed  by  buyers,  and 
is  supposed  to  be  the  best;  simply,  perhaps,  because  it  seems 
to  have  been  manufactured  with  care,  and  appears  to  be  free 
from  any  admixture  of  brown  or  black  oil,  produced  from 
the  fenk-back,  or  found  in  the  hold  of  the  ship. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


331 


ed  from  one  boiling  of  blubber  in  the  copper,  each 
can  be  allowed,  in  turn,  to  stand  undisturbed  up- 
wards of  twenty-four  hours.  Thus,  while  one  is  in 
the  act  of  being  filled,  the  other  stands  to  cool  and 
settle,  and  the  third  is  drawn  off.  If  the  backs  be 
twice  this  size,  or  four  times  the  capacity  of  the 
copper,  every  one  will  require  two  days  to  be  filled 
by  one  copper,  and  after  being  filled,  may  subside 
during  two  or  three  da^^s  undisturbed.  Even  two 
backs  in  number,  of  this  capacity,  Avould  admit  of 
an  interval  of  twenty  four  hours  each,  after  being 
filled,  before  it  would  be  necessary  to  begin  to  emp- 
ty it.  Thus  prepared  and  cooled,  the  oil  is  in  a 
marketable  state,  and  requires  only  to  be  transferred 
from  the  coolers  into  casks  for  convenience  of  con- 
veyance to  any  part  of  the  country.  Each  of  the 
coolers,  it  has  been  observed,  is  furnished  with  a 
stop-cock,  beneath  which  there  is  a platform  adapt- 
ed for  receiving  the  casks,  when  they  are  filled,  with 
great  ease,  by  the  introduction  of  a leathern  tube, 
extending  from  the  orifice  of  the  stop-cock  into  the 
bung-hole. 

At  the  conclusion  of  the  process  of  boiling,  each 
vessel’s  cargo  manufactured  on  the  premises,  the 
backs  are  completely  emptied  of  their  contents.  To 
effect  this,  water  is  poured  in,  until  the  lower  part 
of  the  stratum  of  oil  rises  to  within  a few  lines  of  the 
level  of  the  stop-cock,  and  permits  the  greater  part 
of  the  oil  to  escape.  The  quantity  left,  amounts, 
perhaps,  to  half  an  inch,  or  an  inch  in  depth.  To 


232 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


recover  this  oil  without  waste  requires  a little  ad- 
dress. A deal-board,  in  length  a little  exceeding 
the  breadth  of  the  cooler,  is  introduced  at  one  end, 
a little  diagonally,  and  placed  edgewise  in  its  con- 
tents. The  ends  of  the  board  being  covered  with 
flannel,  when  pressed  forcibly  against  the  two  op- 
posite sides  of  the  cooler,  prevent  the  oil  from  cir- 
culating past.  The  board  is  then  advanced  slowly 
forward,  towards  the  part  of  the  back,  where  the 
stop-cock  is  placed;  and  in  its  progress,  (the  ends 
being  kept  close  to  the  side  of  the  cooler,  and  the 
upper  edge  a little  above  the  surface  of  the  oil,)  all 
the  oil  is  now  collected  by  tile  board,  while  the  wa- 
ter has  a free  circulation  beneath  it.  When  the  oil 
accumulates  to  the  depth  of  the  board,  its  further 
motion  is  suspended,  until  the  oil,  thus  collected, 
is  drawn  ofif.  Another  similar  board  is  afterwards 
introduced  at  the  farthest  extremity  of  the  cooler, 
and  passed  forward  in  the  same  manner,  whereby 
the  little  oil  which  escapes  the  first  is  collected. 
N ow  the  remnant,  which  still  refuses  to  run  olf  by 
the  orifice  of  the  stop-cock,  being  collected  in  a cor- 
ner,  is  taken  up  by  sidmmers;  and  the  footing  or 
sediment  which  appears  at  the  last,  is  disposed  of 
in  the  same  way  as  the  footing  from  the  copper,  un- 
til the  oil  it  contains  rises  to  the  surface  and  can  be 
removed. 

In  most  of  the  out-ports,  the  oil  is  generally  de- 
posited in  casks,  in  which  it  remains  until  it  is  dis- 
posed of  by  the  importers.  In  London,  however, 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


S33 


and  in  some  concerns  in  Hull  and  other  ports,  the 
speculators  in  the  whale  fishery  are  provided  with 
cisterns  or  tanks,  wherein  they  can  deposit  their 
oil,  and  preserve  it  until  a convenient  time  for  sell- 
ing,  without  being  subject  to  the  waste  which  usu- 
ally takes  place  when  it  is  put  into  casks.  From 
these  cisterns,  any  quantity  can  be  drawn  off  at 
pleasure. 

The  smell  of  oil,  during  its  extraction,  is  un- 
doubtedly disagreeable;  but,  perhaps,  not  more  so 
than  the  vapour  arising  from  any  otlier  substance 
submitted  to  the  action  of  heat  when  in  a putrid 
state.  The  prevailing  opinion,  however,  that  a 
whale  ship  must  always  give  out  the  same  unplea- 
sant smell,  is  quite  erroneous.  The  fact  is,  that 
the  fat  of  the  whale,  in  its  fresh  state,  has  no  offen- 
sive flavour  whatever,  and  never  becomes  disagree- 
able until  it  is  brought  into  a warm  climate  and 
becomes  putrid;  neither  is  a whale  ship  more  un- 
pleasant than  any  other  trader,  until  after  her  cargo 
is  opened  on  her  arrival  in  port. 

Description  of  Whalebone,  and  the  Method  of  Pre- 
paring it. 

Whalebone,  or  whale  fins,  as  the  substance  is 
sometimes,  though  incorrectly  named,  is  found  in 
the  mouth  of  the  common  Greenland  whale,  to  which 
it  serves  as  a substitute  for  teeth.  It  forms  an  ap- 
paratus most  admirably  adapted,  as  a filter,  for  se- 
VoL.  III. — —30 


234 


WHALE-FISHEP.Y. 


parating  the  minute  animals,  on  which  the  whale 
feeds,  from  the  sea  water  in  which  they  exist. 

It  is  a substance  of  a horny  appearance  and  con- 
sistence, extremely  flexible  and  elastic,  generally 
of  a bluish  black  colour,  but  not  unfrequently  strip- 
ed longitudinally  wdth  white,  and  exhibiting  a 
beautiful  play  of  colour  on  the  surface.  Internally 
it  is  of  a fibrous  texture,  resembling  hair;  and  the 
external  surface  consists  of  a smooth  enamel,  capa- 
ble of  receiving  a good  polish. 

This  substance,  when  taken  from  the  whale,  con- 
sists of  laminse,  connected  by  what  is  called  the  gum, 
in  a parallel  series,  and  ranged  along  each  side  of 
the  mouth  of  the  animal.  The  laminae  are  about 
300  in  number,  in  each  side  of  tlie  head.  The 
length  of  the  longest  blade,  which  occurs  near  the 
middle  of  the  series,  is  the  criterion  fixed  on  by  the 
fishers,  for  designating  the  size  of  the  fish.  Its 
greatest  length  is  about  15  feet;  but  an  instance  very 
rarely  occurs  of  any  being  met  with  above  12|  or 
13  feet.  Its  greatest  breadth,  which  is  at  the  root 
end,  is  10  or  12  inches,  and  its  greatest  thickness 
four-tenths  or  five-tenths  of  an  inch. 

The  two  sides  or  series  of  the  whalebone,  are 
connected  at  the  upper  part  of  the  head,  or  crown 
bone  of  the  fish,  within  a few  inches  of  each  other, 
from  whence  they  hang  downward,  diverging  so  far 
as  to  enclose  the  tongue  between  their  extremities; 
the  position  of  the  blades,  with  regard  to  each  other, 
resembles  a frame  of  saws  in  a saw  mill;  and  taken 


WHALE-FISHEEY. 


S35 


altogether^  they  exhibit,  in  'some  measure,  the  form 
and  position  of  the  roof  of  a house.  The  smaller 
extremity  and  interior  edge  of  each  blade  of  bone, 
or  the  edge  annexed  to  the  tongue,  are  covered  with 
a long  fringe  of  hair,  consisting  of  a similar  Mud 
of  substance  as  that  constituting  the  exterior  of  the 
bone.  Whalebone  is  generally  brought  from  Green- 
land in  the  same  state  as  when  taken  from  the  fish, 
after  being  divided  into  portable  jiinlss,  or  pieces, 
comprising  ten  or  twelve  laminse  in  each;  but  occa- 
sionally it  is  subdivided  into  separate  blades,  and 
the  gum  and  hair  removed  when  at  sea. 

One  of  the  first  importations  of  whalebone  into 
England,  was  probably  in  the  year  1594,  when 
a quantity  of  this  substance,  being  part  of  the 
cargo  of  a wrecked  Biscayan  ship,  w^as  picked  up 
at  Cape  Breton,  by  some  English  ships,  fitted  out 
for  the  whale  and  morse  fisheries,  after  the  example 
of  the  Icelanders  and  Biscayans.^ 

This  substance  has  been  held  in  such  high  esti- 
mation, that,  since  the  establishment  of  the  Spitz- 
bergen  whale  fishery,  the  British  have  occasionally 
purchased  it  of  the  Dutch,  at  the  rate  of  700Z.  per 
ton.f  It  is  calculated,  that  at  least  100,000Z.  ])er 
annum  were  paid  to  the  Dutch  for  this  article,  about 
the  years  1715  to  1721?  when  the  price  was  400Z.J 


* Hakluyt’s  Voyages,  vol.  iii.  p.  194, 
t Macpherson’s  Annals  of  Commerce,  vol.  iii.  p.  51?, 
\ Elking’s  Vievr  of  the  Greenland  Trade,  &c.  p.  65. 


236 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


About  tlie  year  1763,  the  price  in  England  was 
500Z.  2^er  ton;  but  after  an  extensive  importation  of 
this  article  from  New  England,  the  price  delined  to 
3501.*  aud  subsequently  as  low  as  50Z.  per  ton.  Of 
late  years  the  price  has  usually  been  fluctuating  be- 
tween 50Z.  and  150Z.  per  ton.  Whalebone  becomes 
more  valuable  as  it  increases  in  length  and  thick- 
ness. 

On  or  near  the  premises  where  the  oil  is  extract- 
ed, the  whalebone  is  commonly  cleaned  and  pre- 
pared. 

The  first  operation,  if  not  already  done,  consists 
in  depriving  it  of  the  gum.  It  is  then  put  into  a 
cistern  containing  water,  until  the  dirt  upon  its  sur- 
face becomes  soft.  When  this  effect  is  sufficiently 
produced,  it  is  taken  out,  piece  by  piece,  laid  on  a 
plank  placed  on  the  ground,  where  the  operator 
stands,  and  scrubbed  or  scoured  with  sand  and  wa- 
ter, by  means  of  a broom  or  a piece  of  cloth.  It 
is  then  passed  to  another  person,  who,  on  a plank 
or  bench,  elevated  to  a convenient  height,  scrapes 
the  root-end  where  the  gum  was  attached,  until  he 
produces  a smooth  surface;  he  or  another  workman, 
then  applies  a knife  or  a pair  of  shears  to  the  edge, 
aud  completely  detaches  all  the  fringe  of  hair  con- 
nected with  it.  Another  person,  who  is  generally 
the  superintendent  of  the  concern,  afterwards  re- 


* Macphcrson’s  Annals,  vol.  iii.  p.  371. 


WHALE-FISHERY. 


237 


ceives  it,  washes  it  in  a vessel  of  clean  water,  and 
removes,  with  a bit  of  wood,  the  impurities  out  of 
the  cavity  of  the  root.  Thus  cleansed,  it  is  exposed 
to  the  air  and  sun  until  thoroughly  dry,  when  it  is 
removed  into  a warehouse,  or  other  place  of  safety 
and  shelter.  ^ 

Before  it  is  offered  for  sale,  it  it  usually  scrubbed 
with  brushes  and  hair-cloth,  by  which  the  surface 
receives  a polish,  and  all  dirt  or  dust  adhering  to  it 
is  removed;  and  finally,  it  is  packed  in  portable 
bundles,  consisting  of  about  a hundred  weight  each. 
The  size-hoxiQ,  or  such  pieces  as  measure  six  feet 
or  upward  in  length,  is  kept  separate  from  the  un- 
derside; the  latter'  being  usually  sold  at  half  the 
price  of  the  former.  Each  blade  being  terminated 
with  a quantity  of  hair,  there  is  sometimes  a diffi- 
culty in  deciding,  whether  some  blades  of  whale- 
bone are  size  or  not.  Owing  to  the  diminished  value 
of  under-size  bone,  and  more  particularly,  in  conse- 
quence of  the  captain  and  some  of  the  officers  engag- 
ed in  a fishing  ship,  having  a premium  on  every 
size  fish,  it  becomes  a matter  of  some  importance  in 
a doubtful  case,  to  decide  this  point.  From  a de- 
cision, which  I understand  has  been  made  in  a court 
of  law,  it  is  now  a generally  received  rule,  that  so 
much  of  the  substance  terminating  each  blade,  as 
gives  rise  to  two  or  more  hairs,  is  whalebone: 
though,  in  fact,  the*hair  itself  is  actually  the  same 
substance  as  that  of  which  the  whalebone  is  com- 
posed. 


APPENDIX. 


The  Common  Wild  Cat;  or  Bay  Lynx. 

Felis  Rufa,  Guld.  Penn.  &c. 

. (See  vol.  1.  plate  opposite  page  203,  fig.  2. ) 

It  is  highly  probable  that  all  the  species  of  wild 
cat  described  under  the  names  of  Fasciataf  aurea, 
Montana,  &c.,  may  be  correctly  referred  to  the  pre- 
sent, which  is  the  only  species,  (in  addition  to  the 
Felis  canadensis  Geoff.  Borealis;  Temm.)  of  whose 
existence  in  this  country,  sufficiently  satisfactory 
evidence  is  to  be  obtained.  At  least  we  have  not 
been  able  to  find  any  other  in  the  cabinets  of  natural 
history  to  which  we  have  had  access,  nor  in  the 
caravans  of  living  American  animals,  frequently 
exhibited  within  our  vicinity.  The  naturalists  at- 
tached  to  the  different  exploring  parties  which  have 
traversed  vast  extents  of  the  American  territory, 
have  not  been  able,  by  their  own  efforts,  nor  through 
the  aid  of  the  Indians,  to  procure  any  species  but 
the  common  wild-cat:  we  therefore  deem  it  most 


240 


APPENDIX. 


correct  to  wait  for  additional  observations,  before 
we  admit  the  existence  of  so  many  species  as  have 
been  proposed. 

The  common  wild-cat  stands  very  high  upon  its 
legs,  and  has  a short  tail,  which  is  curved  upwards 
at  its  extremity;  which  circumstances  tend  to  give 
the  animal  an  appearance  of  being  somewhat  dis- 
proportioned.  In  other  respects,  its  physiognomy 
reminds  one  strongly  of  the  domestic  cat,  to  which 
its  general  aspect  and  movements  are  very  similar. 
The  residence  of  the  wild-cat,  is  usually  in  wooded 
districts,  where  it  preys  upon  birds,  squirrels,  and 
other  small  animals,  which  are  taken  by  surprise, 
according  to  the  manner  of  all  the  animals  belong- 
ing to  the  genus  Felis. 

The  common  wild-cat  is  about  two  feet  long,  and 
twelve  or  thirteen  inches  in  circumference.  The 
tail  but  little  surpasses  three  inches  in  length. 

The  general  colour  of  the  pelage,  is  a deep  red- 
dish, mingled  with  small  spots  of  blackish  brown; 
the  inferior  parts  of  the  body  and  throat,  as  well  as 
the  inferior  surface  of  the  tail  are  white,  or  whitish. 
Numerous  small,  nearly  vertical  streaks  of  black, 
are  to  be  observed  on  the  front  between  the  ears, 
and  down  to  the  space  surrounding  the  orbits,  which 
are  encircled  by  a clear  pale,  red,  or  whitish  fur. 
There  are  small  pencils  of  hairs  to  the  tips  of  the 


ears. 


APPENDIX. 


241 


B. 

We  believe  the  observation  was  first  made  by 
Mitchill,  that  the  opossum,  Dulelphis  Vir^iniana, 
is  never  found  to  inhabit  the  country  north  of  the 
Hudson,  and  we  have  been  informed  by  a scientific 
friend,  who  has  devoted  an  especial  degree  of  at- 
tention to  the  subject,  that  from  repeated  researches 
and  inquiries,  he  is  satisfied  that  the  observation  of 
our  distinguished  countryman  above  named,  is  cor- 
rect. This  fact  appears  the  more  singular,  when 
it  is  remembered,  that  numbers  of  the  species  are 
found  along  the  southern  banks  of  the  river,  and  it 
is  well  known,  that  in  other  parts  of  tlie  country, 
rivers  of  nearly  equal  size  ojffer  no  barrier  to  the 
- dilfusion  of  this  species.  It  is  a curious  and  inter- 
esting inquiry  to  determine  the  causes  of  this  limi- 
tation; in  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge,  we 
have  no  satisfactory  explanation  to  offer. 

In  relation  to  the  generation  of  the  opossum, 
considering  that  this  work  is  destined  for  general 
readers,  we  have  deemed  it  advisable  to  omit  what 
we  have  prepared  on  this  subject,  and  to  make  tbe 
facts  we  have  been  enabled  to  collect  and  observe, 
the  subject  of  a paper  to  be  published  in  a work 
exclusively  devoted  to  students  of  natural  science. 


VoL.  III. 31 


242 


APPENDIX, 


D. 

Wistar^s  Fossil  Elk. 

(Vol,  2,  fig.  and  [ in  plate  opposite  page  197.) 

The  late  distingiiislied  [irofessor  Wistar  pub- 
lished an  account  of  some  fossil  skulls,  (exhumed 
at  Big-Bone  Lick,  Kentucky,  by  Gen.  Clark,  one 
of  the  enterprising  explorers  of  the  western  regions,) 
which  were  presented  to  the  American  Philosophi- 
cal Society,  by  Jefferson.  Among  other  descrip- 
tions,  is  the  followdng  of  the  head  of  one  of  the 
largest  species  of  the  genus  Cervus. 

The  breadth  of  the  skull,  at  its  narrowest  part,  is 
4.75  inches.  The  deptli,  Irom  the  margin  of  the 
occipital  surface  to  the  most  distant  part  of  the 
great  foramen  of  the  occipital  bone,  is  5.25  inches. 
From  the  superior  surface,  immediately  posterior  to 
the  base  of  the  horns,  to  the  body  of  the  sphenoid 
bone,  immediately  under  it,  4.7  inches.  The  length 
of  the  crauium,  from  the  centre  of  the  space  between 
the  horns,  to  the  projection  of  the  occipital  bone,  is 
6.37  inches. 

Dr.  Wistar  compared  this  skull  with  that  of 
ihe  American  Elk,  Cervus  Caradensis,  and  the 
Rein-Deer  C.  Tarandus,  and  concluded,  that  it 
more  nearly  resembled  the  Elk,  at  the  occiput, 
though  differing  from  it  greatly  in  the  position  and 
proiection  of  the  horns.  Aixiording  to  the  measure- 
ments  and  comparisons  of  l)i\  Wistar,  this  Elk 


Comm  021  0.x. 


'^C.Ttalc  Del 


T.Kttxrnx  Sc. 


APPENDIX. 


S43 

must  have  been  much  largei-  than  either  the  Ameri- 
can  Elk,  or  the  Rmn-Deer.  The  species  is  doubt- 
less  entirely  extinct.^' 

The  name  of  Americarms^^  has  been  given  b> 
this  species. 


F. 

Wisfar’s  Fossil  Ox. 

In  the  paper  above  referred  to,  Dr.  Wistar  de- 
scribed the  fossil  skull  of  an  ox,  obtained  from  the 
same  locality,  which  he  considered  as  nearly  allied 
to  the  Bison,  Bos  Amei'icanus.  The  most  remarka- 
ble  peculiarity  of  this  skull,  is  the  projection  or  con- 
vexity of  that  portion  of  the  facial  or  frontal  surface 
between  the  horns.  The  accompanying  plate  gives 
a front  and  back  view  of  this  skull.  The  species 
has  been  named  Bonibifrons.” 


Great  Fossil  Ox. 

The  portion  of  the  skull,  and  nucleus  of  the  horn, 
!)elonging  to  the  valuable  cabinet  of  the  American® 


* See  American  Philosophical  Trans,  vol.  1.  new  series, 
p.  377.  In  the  figures  we  have  transferred  from  Wistar’s 
plate,  the  posterior  and  superior  view  of  the  skull  is  marked 
with  a the  profile  view  with  a t» 


244 


APPENDIX. 


Philosophical  Society,  from  which  specimen,  the  an- 
nexed accurate  drawing  was  made  by  M.  Le  Sueur, 
was  first  described  and  figured  in  the  annals  of  the 
museum,  by  Cuvier,  and  subsequently  in  his  great 
work  on  Fossil  Bones.  The  drawing  renders  any 
detailed  description  unnecessary.  The  nucleus  of 
the  horn,  measures  twenty'-eight  inches  in  circum- 
ference. Though  nothing  but  the  fragment  here 
represented  is  preserved,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
but  that  the  animal  was  of  great  size  and  belonged 
to  a species  which  is  utterly  extinct.  The  species 
has  been  named  Catifrons.’^ 


Bekay^s  Fossil  Ox. 

We  must  refer  the  reader  to  the  3d  vol.  of  the 
Annals  of  the  Lyceum  of  New  York,  for  the  full 
description  of  the  fragments  of  this  skull,  and  the 
comparisons  instituted  by  Dr.  Dekay  to  determine 
the  species. 

Dr.  Dekay  considers  that  none  of  the  Grenus 
Bos,  now  to  be  found  in  this  country,  have  crania 
in  the  slightest  degree  resembling  this  specimen, 
lit  was  thrown  out  at  the  eruption  caused  by  an  earth- 
quake in  1812,  which  entirely  destroyed  the  town 
of  New  Madrid,  on  the  Mississippi. 

Dr.  Dekay  proposes  to  designate  the  species  of 
Fossil  crania  to  which  he  refers  those  of  Pallas  and 
Ozeretskovsky,  by  the  name  of  Bos  Pallasii,  and  the 


APPENDIX. 


245 


New  Madrid  fragment  he  refers  provisionally  to  tlie 
same. 


Mitchill’s  Fossil  Walrus. 

Dr.  Mitchill  has  received  from  the  shores  of  Long 
Island,  a very  interesting  skull  belonging  to  a spe- 
cies of  the  genus  TricJiecus.  This  skull  is  agatised 
and  in  a fine  state  of  preservation.  It  has  been  re- 
ferred to  the  examination  of  a committee  of  the  Ly- 
ceum, and  tlieir  report  will  be  found  in  the  2d  vol- 
ume of  the  annals  of  that  excellent  Institution. 


CONCLUSION. 


This  work  has  been  delayed  by  uncontrollable 
circumstances^  for  a much  longer  period  than  was 
anticipated.  It  is  not  now  the  time  to  offer  any 
apology  for  the  manner  in  which  the  undertakiug 
has  been  accomplished.  In  reviewing  wliat  we 
have  done,  it  is  easy  to  perceive  that  much  may  be 
hereafter  improved.  These,  and  all  other  deficien- 
cies will  no  doubt  be  indicated  by  those  who  inter- 
est themselves  in  the  execution  of  such  performances. 
We  shall  certainly  profit  by  their  suggestions,  whe- 
ther made  in  a spirit  of  candour  or  malevolence. 

We  liave  been  as  original  as  it  was  possible  to 
be,  in  such  a work,  unless  the  whole  business  of  the 
author’s  life,  had  been  the  collection  of  materials. 
The  observations  we  have  had  an  opportunity  of 
making  from  living  nature,  we  fear  not  to  have 
compared  witli  those  made  by  any  other  individual. 
Wherever  we  have  been  obliged  to  compile,  we 
have  anxiously  endeavoured  to  approximate  the 
truth,  and  have  faithfully  acknowledged  the  aid  ob- 
tained from  different  sources. 


CONCLUSION, 


247 


It  has  been  our  intention  to  render  this  study 
pleasing  and  intelligible^  more  than  to  discuss  mi- 
nutia  of  classification;  to  give  the  JVatural  Historij, 
instead  of  the  nomenclature  of  American  animals; 
to  impart  information  to  those  seeking  for  knowledge, 
rather  than  to  prepare  a book  for  such  as  consider 
themselves  the  founders  of  systems  and  settlers  of 
moot  points  in  philosophy.  If  we  have  accom- 
plished  nothing  more,  we  have  rendered  it  much 
easier  for  our  successors  to  attempt  the  composition 
of  a better  work,  having  saved  them  the  toil  of 
examining  a vast  number  of  books,  to  glean  the 
detached  observations  worthy  of  being  brought 
together. 

Reader,  I have  given  thee  an  xlccount  of  my 
intendments  and  endeavours  in  this  Performance; 
and  if  it  hath,  (as  1 am  too  conscious  to  myself,  it 
often  hath,)  happened,  that  I have  any  where  fail- 
•'^ed  of  my  design;  if  in  a long  and  tedious  Work, 
“ I have,  thro’  inadvertency,  streights  of  time,  and 
hurry  sometimes  of  other  business,  made  any  balk, 
and  committed  mistakes,  let  thy  humanity  excuse 
the  humane  infirmities  of  Thine,  and  his  Conn* 
“ try’s  Faithful  Servant,” 

JOHND.  GORMAN, 


s . 

-:? ; V. 

" 

, ' 

, .■>.•■  ;v-‘>  .-■; 

*■  \ ' ■■■'•  ’ 

■■ 


-■'V 


'/.  ■ 


i 


1 


GENERAL  SYNOPSIS  OF  MAMMALIA 


INHABITING  NORTH  AMERICA. 

BY  CHARLES  L.  BONAPARTE. 


Mammalia  are  vertebrated,  warm  blooded,  viviparous 
animals;  suckling  their  young;  breathing  by  lungs  which 
float  freely  in  the  chest,  imperforated;  the  heart  is  bilocular 
and  biauricular. 

In  the  present  state  of  science,  they  form  the  first  class 
of  the  first  type  of  the  animal  kingdom. 

GENERAL  DIVISIONS, 

Or,  view  of  the  natural  families  of  the  system,  adopted 
in  classifying  the  North  American  Mammalia. 

Sub-class  I.  Quadkupeda. 

Limbs  four,  obvious:  head  separated  from  the  body  by 
the  intervention  of  a neck. 

Section  I. 

Unguiculata;  nails  covering  only  the  tips  of  the  digits. 

§ Three  kinds  of  teeth. 

ORDER  I.  Primates. 

Mammae  2,  pectoral:  penis  free:  anterior  limbs  termi 
nated  by  hands. 

Tribe  I.  Bimana. 

Family!.  Bimana.  Anterior  limbs  only,  terminated  by 
hands:  body  vertical,  plantigrade. 

VoL.  IIL^ — —B2 


250 


APPENDIX. 


Tribe  II.  Quadrumana. 

The  four  limbs  terminated  by  hands. 

Family  2.  Simise.  Resembling  man;  4 incisive  teeth  in 
each  jaw. 

Family  3.  Lemurini.  Resembling  carnivorous  animals; 
incisors  varying  in  number,  shape  and  situation;  nostrils 
at  the  tip  of  the  snout. 

Family  4.  Dermoptera.  Digits  of  the  anterior  limbs 
moderate,  robust,  all  furnished  with  compressed  incurved 
nails;  connecting  membrane  pilous. 

ORDER  II.  Cheiroptera. 

Mammse  2,  pectoral;  penis  free:  limbs  connected  by  a 
membrane  formed  for  flying. 

Family  5.  Cheiroptera.  Digits  of  the  anterior  limbs 
excessively  elongated,  comprised  in  an  expansion  of  the 
naked  membrane  of  the  flanks,  thumb  free,  but  not  oppos- 
able. 

ORDER  III.  Fer^. 

Mammse  abdominal,  numerous;  penis  attached  to  the 
belly;  limbs  free,  formed  for  walking;  the  anterior  not 
terminating  by  hands. 

Family  6.  Insectivora.  Plantigrade;  no  carnivorous 
teeth;  false  molars  acute;  3 or  4 tuberculous  grinders  on 
each  side  of  bo.th  jaws;  from  one  to  six  incisors. 

Family  7.  Carnivera.  Last  molar,  at  least,  tuberculous; 
2 strong  canine,  and  six  incisive  teeth  above  and  below. 

* Plantigrada.  **  Digitigrada. 

Family  8.  Marsupialia.  Females  with  a pouch;  both 
sexes  furnished  with  marsupial  bones:  hind  thumb  destitute 
of  nail:  opposable;  sometimes  wanting. 

* 2 canines  and  several  small  incisors  above  and  below. 

No  canine  below — at  least  6 incisors  above. 


APPENDIX. 


251 


ORDER  IV.  Pinnipedia. 

Mammae  abdominal;  penis  attached  to  the  belly:  feet  very 
short,  covered  by  a skin  formed  for  swimming,  the  posterior 
turned  backward. 

Family  9.  Pinnipedia. 

§§  Not  more  than  two  kinds  of  teeth. 

ORDER  V.  Glires. 

No  canine  teeth;  incisive  2 below,  2,  4,  or  6 above;  22 
molar  at  most;  jaws  moving  horizontally. 

* Females  with  a pouch;  both  sexes  with  marsupial  bones. 

Family  10.  Marsupialia.(l)  Incisive  2 or  6 above. 

**  No  pouch,  no  marsupial  bones, 
t Clavicles  distinct  omnivorous. 

Family  11.  Murina. 

tt  Clavicles  rudimental.  Herbivorous. 

Family  12.  Aculeata.  Skin  covered  with  prickles;  up- 
per incisors  2;  toes  4-5. 

Family  13.  Duplicidentata.  Skin  covered  with  hair; 
upper  incisors  4,  (6  in  young  subjects;)  toes  5-4. 

Family  14.  Subungulata.  Skin  covered  with  hair;  upper 
incisors  2;  molars  16;  posterior  toes  3 or  5,  but  lateral  each 
side,  very  small. 

* 5 toed.  **  4-3  toed. 

ORDER  VI.  Bruta. 

No  canine  nor  incisor  teeth;  (except  in  one  genus  in 
which  there  are  4 below;)  from  14  to  9S  molars,  or  none; 
nails  enveloping  the  extremities  of  the  digits,  almost  hoop 
shaped. 


(1)  We  scatter  the  marsupial  animals,  as  naturally  they  should  be  sepa- 
rated: their  resemblance  being  merely  of  analogy  and  not  of  affinity, 
two  things  often  confounded  in  natural  history. 


252 


APPENDIX. 


Family  15.  Tardigrada.  All  having  teeth;  18  molars 
at  most;  no  incisors;  snout  short;  limbs  much  elongated. 

Family  16.  EfFodientia.  Some  edentous;  some  having 
incisors;  molars  from  26  to  98;  snout  elongated;  limbs  well 
proportioned  to  the  body. 

* Incisors  and  molars.  **  Molars.  ***  No  teeth  at  all. 

i Ungulata.  Vermilinguia. 

Section  II.  Ungulata. 

Nails  hoof-shaped,  covering  the  last  phalanges  of  the 
digits:  no  clavicles;  the  fore-arm  always  in  a state  of  pro- 
nation. 

ORDER  VII.  Pecora. 

Rarely  three  kinds  of  teeth;  no  incisors  above;  feet  didac- 
tyle,  with  two  hoofs;  the  metacarpal  and  metatarsal  bones 
united;  four  stomachs;  ruminating. 

Family  17.  Cavicornia.  No  canine  teeth;  both  sexes 
having  permanent  horns,  composed  of  a solid  nucleus,  grow- 
ing from  the  frontal  bones,  and  of  an  elastic  thin  case. 

* Lacrymatories;  nucleus  entirely  solid.  **  No  lacryma- 
tories;  nucleus  cellulous. 

Family  18.  Devexa.  No  canine  teeth;  both  sexes  with 
permanent  solid  horns  covered  by  a skin. 

Family  19.  Capreoli.  No  canine  teeth;  in  general  the 
males  only  having  caducous  solid,  branched  horns,  cover- 
ed at  least  for  a time  by  a hirsute  skin. 

Family  20.  Tylopoda.  With  canine  teeth;  hornless. 

ORDER  VIII.  Bellua. 

Generally  three  kinds  of  teeth;  stomach  simple;  or  di- 
vided into  several  pouches,  but  not  for  rumination. 

Family  21.  Solidungula.  Feet  apparently  monodac- 
tyle. 


APPENDIX. 


253 


Family  22.  Fissipedes.  Toes  3 or  4,  but  in  the  inter- 
mediaries approximated;  others  4-3  toed. 

* Toes  4—3.  *^Toes  4-4  Toes  2-2. 

Family  23.  Pachydermata.  Feet  pentadactyle  or  tri- 
dactyle,  the  other  digits  being  rudimental;  digits  only  per- 
ceived externally,  &c. 

* Pentadactyla,  (Proboscida.)  **  Tridactyla. 

Sub-class  II.  Bipeda. 

No  hind  limbs;  (merely  indicated  by  bones.)  Fore  limbs 
fins;  neck  not  distinct  from  the  body;  body  pisciform,  ter- 
minating in  a cartilaginous  horizontal  fin-shaped  tail.  ' 

(Live  in  the  water;  have  no  external  ears,  nor  hair  on 
the  body. 

ORDER  IX.  Cete. 

Family  24.  Sirenia.  Mammae  pectoral;  no  blow-holes. 

Family  25.  Hydraula.  Mammae  inguinal;  with  blow- 
holes. 


ANALYTICAL  TABLE 


OP  THE 

NORTH  AMERICAN  GENERA. 


ORDER  PRIMATES. 

FAMILY  BIMANA. 

Genus  1.  Homo. 

ORDER  CHEIROPTERA. 

FAMILY  CHEIROPTERA. 

Genus  2.  VespertHio. 

ORDER  FERA^. 

FAMILY  INSECTIVORA. 

Genus  3.  Sorex.  Ears  short,  rounded. 

Genus  4.  Scalops.  No  external  ears:  snout  simple. 

Genus  5.  Condjilura.  No  external  ears:  snout  stellated. 

FAMILY  CARNIVORA. 

* Plantigrada.  Treading  on  the  whole  sole  of  the  foot. 

Genus  6.  Ursus.  Seven  molar  on  each  side:  tail  short:  no  anal  odo- 
riferous follicules. 

Genus  7.  Procyon.  Six  molars  on  each  side:  tail  very  long,  pilous:  no 
anal  foUicules. 

Genus  8.  Meles.  Five  molars  on  each  side:  tail  short,  pilous:  an  anal 
pouch  filled  with  fetid  unctuous  substance. 

Genus  9.  Gulo.  Five  molarsabove,  six  below  on  eachside:  tailmoder- 
ate  or  short:  two  folds  of  the  skin  near  the  anus,  but  no 
anal  pouch. 


APPENDIX. 


255 


•*  Digitigrada.  Treading  on  the  extremities  of  their  digits, 
a.  Only  one  tuberculous  behind  the  upper  carnivorous  tooth : 
body  much  elongated,  vermiform:  feet  short. 

Genus  10.  Mustela.  Toes  cleft:  tail  moderate  and  bushy. 

Genus  11.  Mephitis.  Toes  cleft:  tail  long  and  bushy  or  wanting. 

Genus  12.  Lutra.  Toes  palmated. 

h.  Two  tuberculous  behind  the  upper  carnivorous  tooth. 

Genus  13.  Canis.  Feet5 — 4 toed;  nails  not  retractile:  tongue  smooth, 
c.  No  small  tooth  behind  the  inferior  large  molar. 

Genus  14.  Felis.  Feet  5 — 4 toed:  nails  retractile:  tongue  prickly. 

FAMILY  MARS  UPI  ALIA. 

Genus  15.  Didelphis. 

ORDER  PINNIPEDIA. 

FAMILY  PINNIPEDIA. 

Genus  16.  Phoca.  Both  jaws  furnished  v/ith  incisive  and  canine  teeth. 

Genus  17.  Trichecus.  No  incisors  nor  canine  below;  superior  canine 
greatly  prolonged  below  the  lower  jaw. 

ORDER  GLIRES. 

FAMILY  MURESn. 

Genus  18.  Castor.  Feet  five  toed,  anterior  cleft,  posterior  palmated; 
tail  wide,  depressed,  thick,  oval,  naked  and  scaly. 

Genus  19.  Fiber.  Feet  five  toed,  anterior  simple,  posterior  furnished 
with  stiff  bristles  replacing  the  membrane;  tail  compressed, 
linear,  scaly,  with  scattered  bristles. 

Genus  20.  Arvicola.  Feet  simple;  tall  cylindrical,  hairy,  grinders 
without  radicles. 

Genus  21.  Neotoma.  Feet  simple;  tail  cylindrical,  hairy:  grinders  with 
profound  radicles,  and  with  small  marked  triangles. 

Genus  22.  Sigmodan.  Feet  simple;  cyhndrical,  hairy:  molars  in  each 
jaw,  six,  subequal,  with  radicles,  and  with  deep,  alternate 
folds  towards  the  summit. 

Genus  23.  Mus.  Feet  simple;  tail  cylindrical,  subnaked,  scaly,  with 
scattered  hairs. 

Genus  24.  Gerbillus.  Hind  feet  very  long,  five  toed,  each  furnished 
with  a distinct  metatarsal  bone;  tail  elongated,  more  or  less 
bushy,  but  without  tuft  at  tip. 


S56  APPENDIX. 

Genus  25.  Arctemys.  Feet  and  tail  short;  nails  robust;  inferior  inci- 
sive subulate. 

Genus  26.  Sciurus.  Hind  feet  turned  towards  each  other;  nails  very 
sharp;  tail  lon^  and  bush3'^;  inf.  incisive  much  compressed. 
Genus  27.  Pertmys.  Tail  long  and  bushy;  skin  of  the  flanks  extend- 
ed between  the  fore  and  hind  hmbs. 

FAMILY  ACULEATA. 

Genus  28.  Hystrix. 

FAMILY  DUPLICIDENTATA. 

Genus  29.  Lepus.  Hind  limbs  very  long:  ears  very  long:  tail  short. 

ORDER  PECORA. 

FAmLY  CAVICORNIA. 

* Nucleus  of  the  horns  solid. 

Genus  30.  Antelope. 

* **  Nucleus  of  the  horns  cellular. 

Genus  31.  Ovis.  Tall  destitute  of  terminal  tuft. 

Genus  32.  Bos.  Tail  ending  in  a bushy  tuft. 

FAMILY  CAPREOLI. 

Genus  33.  Cervus. 

ORDER  CETE.  ' • 

FAMILY  SIRENIA. 

Genus  34.  Manatus.  Body  oblong,  ending  in  an  oval,  horizontal 
fin;  pectoral  fins  furnished  with  rudiments  of  nails. 

Genus  35.  SteUerus.  Body  elongated,  ending  in  a crescent  shaped  fin; 
no  rudiment  of  nails. 

FAMILY  HYDRAULA. 

Genus  36.  Delpliinus.  Head  proportioned:  teeth. 

Genus  37.  Monodon.  Head  proportioned:. no  teeth. 

Genus  38.  Physeter.  Head  exceedingly  disproportioned:  teeth. 

Genus  39.  Balaena.  Head  exceedingly  disproportioned:  teeth  carti- 
laginous, or  rather  cartilages  instead  of  teeth. 


INDEX 


Yol. 

Page 

Antelope 

- 

- 

- 

11. 

320 

Arctomys 

- 

- 

- 

11. 

98 

Monax 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

100 

Empetra 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

108 

Franklinii  - 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

109 

Richardsonii 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

111 

Tridecemlineatus 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

112 

Ludovicianus 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

114 

Parryii 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

120 

Argali 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

329 

Arvicola 

- 

- 

- 

11. 

63 

Xanthognatus 

- 

-■ 

- 

ii. 

65 

Riparius 

- 

- 

- 

11. 

67 

Hispidus 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

68 

Fioridanus  - 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

69 

Badger 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

176 

American 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

179 

Balaena 

- 

- 

- 

111. 

98 

Mysticetus 

- 

- 

- 

111. 

ib. 

Physalis 

- 

- 

- 

iu. 

137 

Musculus 

- 

- 

- 

111. 

141 

Boops 

- 

- 

- 

111. 

142 

Rostrata 

- 

- 

- 

111. 

144 

Bat  - - - 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

48 

Carolina 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

67 

New  York 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

68 

Hoary 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

ib. 

Arcuated 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

70 

Subulate 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

71 

Bear  - - - 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

109 

Brown 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

113 

American  or  Black 

- 

i. 

114 

Grizzly 

VoL.  in.  33 

** 

i. 

131 

258 


INDEX, 


Bear  Polar 
Beaver 

Fabulous  History 
Description  of 

Belluse 

Bison  - - - 

Bos  . - - 

Americanus 
Moschatus 

Bruta  - - - 

Cachalot  - _ - 

Spermaceti 

Canis  - - - 

Familiaris 
Lupus 
Latrans 
Nubilus 
Lycaon 
Lagopus 
Argentatus 
Fulvus 

Cinereo-Argentatus 

Velox 

Capra 

Montana 

Carnivora 

Amphibia 

Castor 

Fiber 

Cat 

Common  whld 
Cervus 

Alcis 
Taranclus 
Canadensis 
Macrotis 
Virginianus 
Cete  (Order)  - 
(Family) 
Cheiroptera 
Condylura 
Cougar  - - 

Deer  - 

Black-Tail 

Common 


Vol.  Pago 

i.  143 


. 

. 

ii. 

19 

. 

ii. 

38 

. 

• 

ii. 

55 

_ 

- 

ii. 

202 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

4 

• 

- 

iii. 

3 

_ 

. 

- 

iii. 

4 

iii. 

29 

_ 

ii. 

173 

- 

iii. 

93 

- 

iii. 

94 

_ 

- 

i. 

232 

- 

i. 

243 

_ 

. 

- 

i. 

255 

- 

- 

i. 

260 

- 

- 

i. 

265 

_ 

- 

i. 

267 

_ 

- 

- 

i. 

268 

- 

- 

L 

274 

_ 

- 

i. 

276 

- 

- 

i. 

280 

_ 

- 

i. 

282 

- 

ii. 

326 

- ■ 

- 

ii. 

ib. 

- 

i. 

107 

- 

i. 

305 

_ 

- 

ii. 

19 

* 

_ 

- 

ii. 

21 

_ 

- 

i'. 

285 

_ 

- 

iii. 

239 

- 

- 

ii. 

271 

- 

- 

ii. 

274 

_ 

- 

ii. 

283 

- 

ii. 

294 

_ 

- 

ii. 

304 

- 

ii. 

306 

- 

iii. 

37 

_ 

- 

iii. 

56 

. 

_ 

i. 

48 

. 

i. 

97 

i. 

291 

. 

_ 

ii. 

271 

- 

ii. 

304 

_ 

- 

ii. 

306 

INDEX. 


259 


Delphinus  (Tribe)  - 
Genus 
Delphis 
Gladiator  - 
Phoccena 
Didelphis  - 

Virginiana  * 
Digitigrada 
Dog  - - 

Domestic 
Newfoundland 
Dolphin  Proper 
(Genus) 

True 

Gladiator 

Elk  - 

Wistar’s  Fossil 
Elephant 

Fossil 

Elephas  ' ^ - 

Primogenius 
Ermine  Weasel 
Felis  - - - 

Concolor 
Canadensis 
Ferae 

Rufa 

Fiber  - _ - 

Zibethicus 
Field  Mouse 
Flying  Squirrel 
Fox  Arctic 

Black  or  Silver  - 
Red 
Gray 
Swift 
Gerbillus 

Canadensis  = 
Labradorius 

Glires 

Glutton 

Gulo  - - * 

Luscus 

Hairy  Campagnol 
Hare  - - 

American 


Vol. 

Page 

iii. 

57 

. 

iii. 

58 

. 

iii- 

59 

• 

ili. 

67 

<9 

A 

iii. 

69 

ii. 

4 

ii. 

7 

e, 

i. 

191 

i. 

232 

. 

i. 

243 

. 

i. 

254 

iii. 

57 

• 

iii. 

58 

iii. 

59 

• 

iii. 

67 

ii. 

294 

iii. 

242 

ii. 

253 

ii. 

255 

. 

• 

ii. 

253 

ii. 

255 

i. 

193 

• 

i. 

285 

. 

i. 

291 

i. 

302 

. 

- 

iii. 

239 

i. 

146 

. 

ii. 

57 

ii. 

58 

ii. 

63 

- 

ii. 

146 

i. 

268 

_ 

i. 

274 

_ 

. 

i. 

276 

i. 

280 

• 

i. 

282 

_ 

. 

ii. 

93 

ii. 

94 

• 

ii. 

97 

ii 

17 

. 

' i 

184 

* 

i. 

ib. 

- 

i. 

185 

^ ■ 

ii. 

68 

. 

ii. 

. 155 

_ 

- 

ii. 

, 157 

260 


INDEX 


Hare  Polar 

Vol. 

ii. 

Page 

162 

Herbivorous  Cetacious  animals 

- 

iii. 

39 

Hystrix 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

149 

Dorsata 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

150 

Inclaviculata  - 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

149 

Indian 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

17 

Insectivora 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

73 

Isatis 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

268 

Jumping  Mouse 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

93 

Labrador 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

97 

Lamantin 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

41 

Amei’ican 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

43 

Lemming 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

73 

Hudson’s  Bay 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

ib. 

Lemmus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

ib. 

Hudsonius 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

ib. 

Lepus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

155 

Americanus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

157 

Glacialis 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

162 

Lutra  - 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

220 

Brasiliensis 

- 

- 

- ■ 

i. 

222 

Marina 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

228 

Lynx  Northern 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

302 

Bay 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

239 

Man  American 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

17 

Manatus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

41 

Americanus 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

43 

Marmot 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

98 

Maryland 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

100 

Quebec 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

108 

Franklin’s 

- . 

- 

ii. 

109 

Tawny  American 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

111 

Hood’s 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

112 

Prairie 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

114 

Parry’s 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

120 

Marsh  Campagnol 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

67 

Marsupialia 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

3 

Marten 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

191 

Pine  - 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

200 

Pennant’s 

- 

_ 

- 

- 

i. 

203 

Mastodon 

- 

_ 

- 

- 

ii. 

204 

Gigantic 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

208 

Meadow  Mouse 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

65 

Megatherium 

- 

- 

- 

, - 

ii. 

173 

Cuvicri 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

180 

INDEX.  261 

Vol.  Page 


Megatherium  Jeffersonii 
Mephitis 

Americana 

Meles 

Lahradoria 

Mink  - - ■ 

Mole  Star-nose 
Monodon 

Monoceros 

Moose 

Morse 

Mouse  Common 
Rustic 

Mus  - - ■ 

Decumanus 
Rattus 
Musculus 
Agrarius 
Musk  Ox 
Musk  Rat 
Mustela 

Erminea 

Martes 

Pennanti 

Lutriola 

Zibellina 

Narwal 

Opossum 

Common 
Otter  - _ - 

American 
Sea 

Ovis  - - - 

Ammon 

Ox  - - - 

Wistar’s  Fossil 
Great  Fossil 
Dekay’s  Fossil 
Pecora 
Phoca 

Vitulina 

Cristata 

Barbata 

Groenlandica 

Fetida 


11.  196 


_ 

- 

i. 

211 

- 

i. 

213 

* 

- 

i. 

176 

- 

i. 

179 

_ 

- 

i. 

206 

- 

i. 

100 

_ 

_ 

- 

iii. 

SO 

- 

iii. 

ib. 

_ 

- 

ii. 

274 

- 

- 

i. 

351 

- 

ii. 

84 

_ 

- 

ii. 

SS 

_ 

- 

ii. 

76 

_ 

- 

- 

ii. 

78 

_ 

_ 

- 

ii. 

83 

_ 

_ 

- 

ii. 

84 

- 

ii. 

88 

- . 

iii. 

29 

- 

- 

ii. 

57 

_ 

- 

i. 

191 

- 

i. 

193 

_ 

- 

i. 

200 

- 

- 

i. 

203 

_ 

- 

i. 

206 

- 

- 

i. 

208 

_ 

_ 

- 

iii. 

81 

_ 

- 

ii. 

4 

ii. 

7-iii. 

241 

_ 

_ 

- 

i. 

220 

_ 

_ 

- 

i. 

222 

_ 

_ 

- 

i. 

228 

_ 

- 

- 

ii. 

328 

_ 

- 

- 

ii. 

329 

- 

- 

iii. 

3 

_ 

_ 

- 

iii. 

243 

_ 

- 

- 

iii. 

ib. 

_ 

- 

iii. 

244 

_ 

- 

ii. 

267 

_ 

- 

- 

i. 

306 

- 

i. 

313 

- 

- 

i. 

336 

_ 

- 

i. 

342 

- 

- 

i. 

343 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

345 

S63 


INDEX. 


Phoca  Ursina 

Vol. 

i. 

Page 

346 

Physeter 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

93 

Macrocephaliis 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

94 

Piscivorous  Cetaceous  animals 

- 

- 

iii. 

56 

Plantigrada 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

108 

Porcupine  Canada 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

149 

Porpus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

69 

Pouched  Rat 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

89 

Proboscidia 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

202 

Procyon 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

161 

Lotor 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

163 

Pseudostoma 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

89 

Pteromys 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

146 

Volucella 

. 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

ih. 

Rabbit 

- 

- 

- 

— 

ii. 

157 

Raccoon 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

161 

Rat 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

76 

Brown  or  Norway 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

78 

Black* 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

S3 

Rein  Deer 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

283 

Sable 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

208 

Scalops 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

81 

Sciurus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

122 

Vulpinus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

128 

Cinereus- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

129 

Carolinensis 

- 

- 

ii. 

131 

Niger 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

133 

Macroureus 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

134 

Grammurus 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

136 

Quadrivittatus 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

137 

Hudsonius 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

138 

Rufiventer 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

141 

Striatus 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

142 

Lateralis 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

144 

Seal 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

306 

Common 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

313 

Hooded 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

336 

Great 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

342 

Harp 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

343 

Fetid 

- 

- 

. 

- 

i. 

345 

Ursine 

- 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

346 

Sea-Swine 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

169 

Sea-Unicorn 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

81 

Sirenia 

- 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

39 

Sheep 

- 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

328 

INDEX. 

263 

Shrew 

Vol. 
- 1, 

Page 

74 

Mole 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

81 

Skunk 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

211 

Sloth 

- 

- 

■ - 

ii. 

173 

Giant 

- 

- 

ii. 

ib. 

Cuvier’s 

“ 

- 

ii. 

180 

Jefferson’s 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

197 

Sorex 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

74 

Parvus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

78 

Brevicaudus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

79 

Araneus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

80 

Squirrel 

- 

- 

-■ 

ii. 

122 

Fox 

- 

- 

ii. 

128 

Cat  - 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

129 

Common  Gray 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

131 

Black 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

133 

Great  Tailed 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

134 

Line  do 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

136 

Four  Lined 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

137 

Hudson’s  Bay 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

138 

Red  Belly 
Ground 

ii. 

ii. 

141 

142 

Rocky  Mountain 

- 

- 

ii. 

144 

Stellerus 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

49 

Borealis 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

50 

Steller 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

49 

Boreal 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

50 

Trichecus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

351 

Rosmarus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

354 

Tardigrada 

- 

- 

- 

ii. 

173 

Ursus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

109 

Americanus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

114 

Horribilis 

- 

- 

- 

^i. 

131 

Maritimus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

143 

Vespertilio 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

51 

Carolinensis 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

67 

Noveboracensis 

- 

- 

i. 

67 

Pruinosus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

ib. 

Arcuatus 

- 

- 

i. 

70 

Subulatus 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

71 

Walrus  - 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

354 

Mitchill’s  Fossil 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

245 

Weasel 

- 

- 

- 

i. 

193 

Whale 

- 

- 

- 

iii. 

98 

Razor-back 

- 

- 

- 

lii. 

137 

204 


INDEX. 


Vol. 

Paga 

Whale  Broad-nosed 

- 

- 

iii. 

141 

Finner 

- 

- 

iii. 

142 

Beaked 

- 

- 

iii. 

144 

Wolf  Common 

- 

i. 

255 

Prairie  or  Barking 

- 

i. 

260 

Dusky 

- 

- 

i. 

265 

Black 

- 

- 

i. 

267 

Wolverine 

- 

- 

- i. 

185 

Wood-Rat 

- 

- 

ii. 

69 

ERRATUM. 

Page  239,  5tli  line,  for  203  read  302. 


V 


Godman 

V.3 


